Home

deflt (f5)

Contents

1. 478 TE EE 661 Matched points esie Gia citet 559 POIT E 79 Details on instrument errors ENEE 374 DEVCE 314 322 330 332 CIE 313 eid M 317 crc me 317 Edit 319 Devices Access configuration sesenta 314 fu Jaa EE 313 Recall deleted default ss 315 Difference limit exceeded stakeout eee 679 Directory structure of memory device eene 729 Display iuuenum SUE 294 DEES RN 240 Display mask uertit er toten tera peat acess 240 Auto PONTS eter tratte ster rper eges 695 El ments ite EE tie eee 242 Distance STONEX Display format erect ntnttecttt censeo 281 Input output in COGO eener 475 Distribution Residuals COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale sssr 477 DMASK hU 691 E E 241 DTM jobs drett seess Ee 729 Diu 215 Driewenigm 212 Export format 5 eiae siete eeu endete d 205 DXF Export Configuration ote t e ete etae 212 DXF file Directory for import export to from job Dynamic Aim window ee Dynamic iLock window E Edit Codelist rau eaman ID template aaa aaaea e WINGO E R9 737 Object MATING ON AT CAs ite desertum dace dass et a cs cena ust shes atananeverasesis 83 Fast Quick set MOE sc 25 faute 25 Standard SynchroTrack Tracki
2. MANAGE This screen shows the point codes from the active job and codes currently used as filter Point Point Code Filter codes are sorted according to the settings in MANAGE Sort Codes Area Code Filter CONT F1 Activated To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed GROUP F4 To activate and deactivate code groups Accesses MANAGE Code Groups Any code group that have been previously deactivated are displayed as deactivated here Codes belonging to a deacti vated code group are not displayed in MANAGE Code Filter Refer to 8 6 Managing Code 02a t Groups CONT GROUP USE NONE use rs To activate and deactivate the filter for the high lighted code S T O N E X Manage Data R9 126 NONE F6 or ALL F6 To deactivate or activate all point codes SHIFT SORT F5 To define the order of the codes Accesses MANAGE Sort Codes S T O N E X Manage Data R9 127 7 6 3 Description L Access step by step MANAGE Stakeout Filter STONEX Stakeout Filter The settings on this screen define a filter for the Stakeout application program for example to show points which are already staked or points that are still to be staked The stakeout filter acts in addition to any other filter set in MANAGE Sorts amp Filters For example points still to be staked out with a particular code can be filtered Step Description 1 Refer to 7 6
3. 477 Set AZIMUTH Zero eese nter tenete tenente tennis 611 honum 294 Setstation and azimuth eser 609 Reticule illumination EEN 294 Set station and backsight EEN 617 hij er eec 424 SEUBS iue eet eee dau ds ELE 34 RLG EDM ty pe 419 SET D Rotate MapView EEN 439 Configuration Set ENEE 195 RPN mode SE PUP 682 rry ere eee Setup Default devices ACCESS iicet Standard Additional information User defined Application program serena RSLT1 Configuration e seen tte tnnn tnnt nn tnn tetto RSLT2 Measure target points ENEE pre Methods 42 sin tete tte bees uic aN Properties of points Resection Eent S Set station and azimuth EE etie etim t EE Set station and backsight Illumination SHIFT e Scroll bar description Tee RE esarch Wind EE KI IWWEL Select codes Shift Rotate amp Scale STONEX R9 747 COGO calculation method eene 544 COGO match points ENEE 558 Sideshot traverse COGO calculation 489 490 496 Skip point in Stakeout ENEE 679 SmartCodes Assigning codes EEN Code Block stet pe ipte eroi ciat Copying Code Block eee Creating Code Block s Measuring lines areas Measuring points Software upload
4. NO F4 returns to the R9 Main Menu Convert Import Data to Job R9 220 14 4 Importing Data in GSI Format Requirements At least one ASCII file in GSI format with the file extension gsi is stored in the GSI directory of the CompactFlash card Access Refer to 14 2 Accessing the Data Import Functionality to access IMPORT Import ASCII GSI Data to Job Import data step by step Step Description 1 IMPORT Import ASCII GSI Data to Job lt Import GSI Data gt lt From File gt All files with extension gsi in the GSI directory on the CompactFlash card can be selected lt To Job gt Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the active job All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected CONF F2 accesses IMPORT Define GSI Import For lt Switch WI81 WI82 Yes gt all WI 81 data normally Easting is imported as Northing and all WI 82 data normally Northing is imported as Easting This coordinate switch is necessary for left handed coordinate systems CONT F1 imports the data Points with a height gt 20000 m are not imported Information message Are more data to be imported e Ifyes continue with step 4 e Ifno continue with step 5 STONEX Convert Import Data to Job R9 221 STONEX Step Description YES F6 Repeat steps 1 to 3 NO F4 returns to the R9 Main Menu Convert
5. CONF F2 accesses EXPORT Configuration Export page lt Points gt Defines if points are exported lt Lines gt Defines if lines are exported lt Areas gt Defines if areas are exported lt Filter gt Defines which points are exported PAGE F6 changes to the DXF page lt Lines amp Areas gt Defines if lines and areas are exported as Line or Polyline entities lt Dimensions gt Defines the dimension of the DXF file STONEX Convert Export Data from Job R9 212 STONEX Step Description lt DXF Layer gt Defines the DXF Layer as lt Default gt lt Code Group gt lt Code gt Code Attri or lt Code Descr Attri gt PAGE F6 changes to the Labels page The settings on this page define which labels with information Point ID Coords Height and Pt Code for each point are exported Each label can be exported as separate layer or in the same layer as the point is exported For each label the color can be defined and for user defined labels the DXF layer name can also be defined Additionally the decimals can be defined for the Coords and Height label CONT F1 accepts the changes and returns to EXPORT Export DXF from Job CONT F1 exports the data Message Do not remove CF Card Information message Are more data to be exported If yes continue with step 5 If no continue with step 6 YES F6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 NO F4 returns to the R
6. SHIFT QUIT F6 to return to the screen from where STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin was accessed Stake out in orthogonal The steps are identical to those of staking out in orthogonal from station mode Follow the to station mode instructions in paragraph Stake out in orthogonal from station mode step by step using step by step lt Orientate To Station gt and lt Stake Mode Orthogonal gt The values are calculated from the point to the station STONEX Stakeout R9 674 34 4 4 Description Diagram Le Access STAKEOUT Polar Stakeout Stake page STONEX Staking Out in Polar Mode The stakeout elements are a direction from the station a horizontal distance and a cut fill The range information is calculated from the current position to the point to be staked in reference to the station PO Station P1 Current position P2 Pointto be staked a A DISTANCE gt b A HZ gt c lt CUT gt or lt FILL gt lt Stake Mode Polar gt is configured in STAKEOUT Configuration General page Refer to 34 3 Configuring Stakeout Refer to 34 2 Accessing Stakeout to access STAKEOUT Polar Stakeout The pages shown are those from a typical configuration set An additional page is available when a user defined display mask is used The keys are identical with those in STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Stake page Refer to 34 4 3 Staking Out in Orthogonal Mode for information on the
7. change Next step CALC F1 performs the shift rotation and scale calculation and accesses COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Store seo eee COGO R9 554 COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Store E Shift Rotate amp Scale General Summary P1ot Store Pts Selected General page Store Job construction dl Add Identfier Yes Identifier cogo STORE F1 Pref ix Suf fix dr Toto store the results and continue with the next subsequent screen 02a PAGE F6 STORE PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Pts Selected gt Output The number of selected points having been shifted rotated and or scaled lt Store Job gt Choicelist The calculated COGO points will be stored in this job All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected The original points are not copied to this job Add Identifier Yes or No Activates the use of additional identifiers for the point ID s of the calculated COGO points lt Identifier gt User input The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the calculated COGO points STONEX COGO R9 555 COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Results Result page STONEX Field Option Description lt Prefix Suffix gt Prefix Adds the setting for lt Identifier gt in front of the orig inal point I
8. SHIFT e Tapping the icon shows additional softkeys Icon Description tt Additional softkeys are available in the currently visible screen t The SHIFT key has been pressed S T O N E X User Interface R9 52 Quick coding The quick coding is displayed Visible during Survey and other application programs where it is possible to measure a point with quick codes Tapping the icon turns the quick coding on or off Icon Description 01 Quick coding is turned on Quick codes with one two three digit are used from the active codelist 01 Quick coding for quick codes with one two thre digit is turned off S T O N E X User Interface R9 53 Description Filter Attributes Limits Staked out 4 5 STONEX Symbols The symbols provide information regarding settings Symbol Description Example Y The filter symbol is shown on the Points Lines Area or Map page if a point line or area filter is active Points v Li Symbol Description Example B The attribute symbol is displayed in MANAGE Codes to indicate codes that have attributes attached ine is Symbol Description Example d Indicates a defined limit has been exceeded 0 051 0 005 Symbol Description Example h This symbolis used in MANAGE Data Job Name to indicate points which have been staked out The staked out flag can be reset in MANAGE Stakeout Filter zg
9. Select Main Menu Convert Convert provides access to data exchange options Convert Data 1 Export Data from Job 2 Import Data to Job CONT F1 af To select the highlighted option and to continue CONT with the subsequent screen For Main Menu Convert Export Data from Job Refer to chapter 13 For Main Menu Convert Import Data to Job Refer to chapter 14 Main Menu R9 61 5 6 Access Description R9 Configuration Configuration Set Next step STONEX Config Select Main Menu Config OR Press USER and then CONF F2 Config accesses all configuration parameters related to a survey the instrument and the inter faces Any changes made are stored in the configuration set Configuration 123 X 1 Survey Settings 2 Instrument Settings 3 General Settings 4 Interfaces CONT F1 To select the highlighted option and to continue af CONT with the subsequent screen For Main Menu Config Survey Settings Refer to chapter 15 For Main Menu Config Instrument Settings Refer to chapter 16 For Main Menu Config General Settings Refer to chapter 17 For Main Menu Config Interfaces Refer to chapter 19 Main Menu R9 62 5 7 Access Description Tools Menu Next step STONEX Tools Select Main Menu Tools Tools provides functionality which is not directly related to survey
10. Step Description 1 Press ALL F1 in SURVEY Survey Job Name Ce Press DIST F2 to measure a distance Ce Press R GO F5 to lock onto the reflector without measurement The instrument searches for the prism with iLock search in the Aim window If a prism was found e Distance and angles are measured and stored Theinstrument locks on to the prism and follows its movements The Robotic icon is displayed If no prism was found e The instrument turns to the starting position of the iLock search Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 39 3 4 3 Description Requirements STONEX Working Example 3 Loss of Robotic Application Points were measured with Robotic until loss of lock Working technique Application program Survey Goal Prism search after loss of lock Automation Robotic e The instrument is locked onto the prism e Theinstrument is remotely controlled e Predict for 3 s Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 40 Prism search after loss of Robotic step by step STONEX Step Description Move the prism behind an object to make the instrument lose lock The prism path is predicted for three seconds The instrument turns with the calcu lated velocity and direction of the lost prism during this time If a prism was found during prediction e theinstrument locks on to the prism and follows its movements The Robotic icon is
11. esent Sort Codes Codelist management ENEE 142 Data management eebe ege EE 127 Sort settings define eren tieeeti teet pater tuos cu 80 Sorting doni 118 Points lines and areas eene 118 TOLDI QO eL 87 SO e M 496 Staked out Sun M 54 Staked points AVera pIE ee eege 649 STONEX GO CIN E 647 Properes ege secte A ee 648 Stakeout Application program serena Configuration tte EES Difference limit exceeded Elements of graphical display Orthogonal mode enn Orthogonal mode step by step s Polar modestes eeann aiea eer Polar mode step by step ees E e Skip point E Standard deviation Standard EDM ise aude enhanc Standard re Standard RS232 esit Standing axis itii e testet iei tont eetto aatiiontinadmmiaecn tee Start ol EECH RN RE Station setup begin Station orientate to Stakeout R9 748 Stonex Tools Creating nM i iii 132 Creation Quick Mel TE 152 el EE 180 SUD ClaSS NL 86 Subdirectories CompactFlash Card s 729 Summary of errors to be adjusted electronically 378 KU 428 Naja 55 ACCESS 682 Application program PUDOR Generale nene ddr e Remote point Default screen
12. Arrows and or a graphical display in STAKEOUT XX Stakeout help finding the point to be staked S T O N E X Stakeout R9 655 STONEX Field Option Description Off Neither arrows nor a graphical display are shown Arrows Upon pressing DIST F2 arrows are shown Graphics A graphical display is shown Refer to 34 4 1 Elements of the Graphical Display in the Stakeout Arrows amp Grap Upon pressing DIST F2 arrows are shown A graph hics ical display is always shown Message Line For each point which is selected for staking angle and distance information is momentarily displayed in the message line Off No information is displayed in the message line Dist From Stn The delta Hz angle that the instrument should turn to the point and the distance from the instrument to the point is momentarily displayed in the message line Dist Frm Last The delta Hz angle that the instrument should turn to Pt the point and the distance from the last staked point is momentarily displayed in the message line Display Mask Choicelist The user defined display mask to be shown in STAKEOUT XX Stakeout All display masks of the active configuration set defined in CONFIGURE Display Settings can be selected Closest Point gt Stakeout The order ofthe points suggested for staking out R9 656 Field Option Description Yes After staking and storing a point the next point suggest
13. STONEX COGO R9 567 Area division method lt Divide gt lt Using gt lt Shift gt 1 By Defined Line Parallel Line Through Point P2 P3 PO PO P1 P2 Point A gt of defined line Point B of defined line Through Point gt in this case it is a known point of the existing border New COGO point lt HDist XX gt STONEX COGO R9 568 Area division method lt Divide gt lt Using gt lt Shift gt 1 By Defined Line Perpendic Line Through Point P2 PO Point A gt of defined line P1 Point B gt of defined line P3 P2 lt Through Point gt inthis case it is a known point of the existing border d P3 New COGO point PO d HDist XX STONEX COGO R9 569 Area division method Divide lt Using gt lt Shift gt 1 By Percentage Swing Line 2 By Area Swing Line N pi P a PO First new COGO point PO P1 Second new COGO point P3 Rotation Pnt gt a Azimuth STONEX COGO R9 570 32 11 2 Choosing an Area to be Divided Access COGO Choose Area to be Divided STONEX Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Choose Area to be Divided Choose Area to be Divided Area to Use Select Existing d Area ID Se No of Points 4 Area 1088 29 n Perimeter 356 135 m CONT F1 02a t Toacceptthe changes and access
14. Access SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth 33 4 2 SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth Setup page lt Azimuth gt The azimuth to the backsight point lt Backsight ID gt The point ID of the backsight point lt Reflector Ht gt The current reflector height Aim at the reflector on the backsight point SET F1 to set the station and orientation and return to Main Menu Setup R9 616 33 4 3 Known Backsight Point Requirements The position coordinates ofthe station point are required The instrument is set up and oriented to a known backsight target Access step by step Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter Press ON to access the Programs menu Select and activate Setup to move to the first screen Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Station Setup DWI NI e lt Method gt Ensure that Known BS Point is selected lt Station Coord gt Select the source for the instrument station coordi nates lt Station ID gt Enter Select the instrument station lt Instrument Ht gt Enter the height of the instrument station lt Fixpoint Job gt Select the fixpoint job of the control target points The geometric scale correction is displayed The correction displayed depends upon the options chosen in CONFIGURE TPS Corrections GeoPPM page e if Calc Scale Automatically lt Computd Scale
15. COGO R9 489 Diagram STONEX COGO traverse calculation with offset for a single point P4 d3 P1 Known P1 Known point a Direction from P1 to P2 d1 Distance between P1 and P2 d2 Positive offset to the right d3 Negative offset to the left Unknown P2 COGO point without offset P3 COGO point with positive offset P4 COGO point with negative offset COGO traverse calculation without offset for multiple points N Known P1 Known point Q1 Direction from P1 to P2 Q2 Direction from P2 to P3 Q3 Direction from P3 to P4 Q4 Direction from P3 to P5 d1 Distance between P1 and P2 d2 Distance between P2 and P3 d3 Distance between P3 and P4 d4 Distance between P3 and P5 Unknown P2 First COGO point P3 Second COGO point P4 Third COGO point sideshot P5 Fourth COGO point COGO R9 490 32 5 2 COGO traverse calcula tion with azimuth bearing step by step STONEX Traverse with Azimuth Bearing The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Traverse Input Ce COGO Traverse Input Input page 32 3 SHIFT CONF F2 to configure the COGO application program 2 COGO Traverse Input Input page Method Azimuth gt lt From gt The point ID of the known point for the COGO calculation Select a point to be used Ce
16. Step Description Refer to chapter Perform the calculations 24 4 1 24 4 2 10 SHIFT DONE F4 to return to COGO Traverse Input Ce The calculated value is taken over for lt Azimuth gt Tools Calculator R9 365 25 Description L Access TOOLS Device Directory STONEX Tools File Viewer Allows ASCII files on the memory device to be viewed The ASCII file can have up to 500 KB Refer to Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device for more information on the contents of folders on the memory device The DBX directory cannot be accessed to view files Select Main Menu Tools File Viewer Data Time CONT F1 To access the highlighted directory or to view the highlighted file DIR F2 Available for a directory or being highlighted To access the highlighted directory or to move up one directory VIEW F3 Available for a file being highlighted To view the highlighted file Accesses TOOLS View File File Name Refer to TOOLS View File File Name DEL F4 Available for a file being highlighted To delete the highlighted file MORE F5 To display information about the size of a direc tory or file Tools Ale Viewer R9 366 STONEX Description of columns Column Description First Directories and files are displayed if available The file extension is shown for files at the beginning of a line indicates a directory is d
17. lt Log By gt STONEX Time Distance Height Diff Dist or Ht Stop amp Go Survey Auto Points Auto points are stored according to a time interval The difference in distance from the last stored auto point which must be reached before the next auto point is measured The auto point is stored with the next available measured position The height difference from the last stored auto point which must be reached before the next auto point is measured The auto pointis stored with the next avail able measured position Before the next auto point is measured either the difference in distance or the difference in height must be reached The auto point is stored with the next available measured position An auto point is stored when the position of the reflector does not move more than the distance config ured in lt Stop Position gt within the lt Stop Time gt Once a point has been stored the position from the point just stored must change more than the distance configured in lt Stop Position gt before he routine starts again R9 692 Field Option User Decides Description An auto point is stored upon pressing REC F3 in SURVEY Survey Job Name Auto page In the begin ning the chain to which the auto points should be assigned must be started with START F1 In the end the chain must be closed with STOP F1 lt Log Every gt Available when e Log By Ti
18. PAGE F6 Tap on a page tab SHIFT FIT F3 Tap on fit touch icon Refer to 30 4 3 Toolbar MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 442 30 4 2 Description Standard screen Reflector Instrument station STONEX Screen Area The MapView screen area is very similar in all cases The positions of the scale bar the North arrow and the toolbar if visible do not change a Toolbar ets DI North arrow lat c Scale bar Reflectors are displayed on the Map page The reflector path is shown as dashed line Symbol Description bg Measured position Symbol Description fe Position of the instrument station MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 443 Scale bar Symbol Description 120 Scale of the current screen The minimum is 0 5 m There is no maximum for the zoom but the scale cannot display values greater than 99000 m In this case the value displayed will be gt 99000 m North arrow Symbol Description T North arrow North is always orientated towards the top of the screen Toolbar Symbol Description A Touch icon toolbar Refer to 30 4 3 Toolbar for more information about the hs functionality of the touch icons in the toolbar Paint wath focus Symbol Description The point that has the focus S T O N E X MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 444 30 4 3
19. Points Status M Survey remote POM eciaceireecne cans tt tnnc ind in rte task beant Survey SOLEITIBS E un gem Symbols MapView points SynchroTrack EDM System files directory System information status System language STONEX s M M 293 System language upload een 343 System RAM EE 728 System RAM codelist ere 136 KE 337 T Target point find EEN Telescope Accessories Thematic coding RE CORd COGS c Select Codes eccesso a With codelist Without codelist Thematical code Thematical coding ENEE Tilt Longitudinal 1 Transversal t Tilting axis ouest ettet E EE ens Adjustment a Error a eet tee Time Stamp E R9 749 TPS GORTOCELONS M M 268 Tracking EDM y P iiinis 420 Transfer From to CompactFlash card From to internal memory From to system RAM ENEE lo m a E E Objects basic procedure ss Traverse COGO calculation method eee 489 With azimuth bearing eene 491 Triplet coordinate siriasi 84 Truezero prism syst m feiss can ttt titt irte eren conde 203 Type in new attribute ENEE 145 Unlock keyboard ttt entier tre 47 Upload Application programs sesenta 341 olgod vid ee EE System files
20. Resection Helmert Local Resection COGO Begin Check Backsight Check Backsight Description of softkeys Softkey Description CONT F1 To continue with the existing program NEW F3 To start the Setup program and create a new station setup CHKPT F6 To open the Check Recorded Pt Backsight Pt screen STONEX Setup R9 608 33 4 2 Set Azimuth Requirements e The position coordinates of the station point are required The instrument is set up and oriented to either a known or unknown target point to which a true or assumed azimuth is set Updating e Astation setup using this setup method is always automatically flagged with an update later Hz measurements attribute Therefore all angle measurements taken from that station are always automati cally updated Access step by step e This screen can be accessed from the SETUP Station Setup screen or by pressing SETAZ F5 in the SURVEY Survey screen The step by step description is for access from the SETUP Station Setup screen e Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens STO N EX Setup R9 609 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Press ON to access the Programs menu Select and activate Setup to move to the first screen Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Station Setup Aw mr lt Method gt Ensure that Set Azimuth is selected Station Coo
21. User Interface R9 54 5 1 Description Le Main Menu Description of the main menu functions STONEX Main Menu Main Menu Functions The main menu is normally the first screen displayed when the instrument is switched on If the PIN protection is active R9 Enter Security PIN Code is displayed first After typing in the correct PIN code the main menu is displayed If desired the instrument can be configured to start up with a user defined screen Refer to 17 6 Start Up amp Power Down Hain Menu 1 Survey 2 Programs 3 Manage 2 ai i d S c cs 4 Convert 5 Config 6 Tools CONT F1 01A 2 To select the highlighted option and to continue CONT with the subsequent screen Main menu function Description Refer to chapter Survey e To start measuring 5 2 Programs e To select and start application programs 5 3 Main Menu R9 55 STONEX Main menu function Description Refer to chapter Manage e To manage jobs data codelists configurations sets and reflectors 5 4 Convert e To export data from a job on the instrument to a file on the CompactFlash card in a customised ASCII format or in DXF format To import ASCII GSI or DXF data from a file on the CompactFlash card to a job on the instrument 5 5 Config e To access all configuration parameters related to a survey the i
22. lt Job gt Choicelist The active job All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected lt Codelist gt Choicelist Output No codes are stored in the selected job All codelists from Main Menu Manage Codelists can be selected Codes have already been stored in the selected job If codes had been copied from a System RAM codelist then the name ofthe codelist is displayed If codes have not been copied from a System RAM codelist but typed in then the name of the active job is displayed lt Config Set gt Choicelist The active configuration set All configuration sets from Main Menu Manage Configuration Sets can be selected lt Reflector gt Choicelist The reflector currently set in the selected configuration set All reflectors from Main Menu Manage Reflec tors can be selected lt Add Constant gt Output The additive constant stored with the chosen reflector Setup R9 596 STONEX Next step IF the Setup application program is to be accessed THEN CONT F1 to accept the changes and continue is to be configured CONF F2 Refer to 33 3 Configuring Setup Setup R9 597 33 3 Access SETUP Configuration General page STONEX Configuring Setup Select Main Menu Programs Setup In SETUP Station Setup Begin press CONF F2 to access SETUP Configuration OR Press ON Hig
23. 8 4 Creating Editing a Codelist Access Refer to 8 3 Accessing Codelist Management to access MANAGE Codelists Create edit a codelist The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more step by step information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 MANAGE Codelists 8 3 NEW F2 or EDIT F3 to access MANAGE XX Codelist 2 MANAGE New Codelist or MANAGE Edit Codelist lt Name gt A unique name for the codelist The name may be up to 16 characters long and may include spaces Input required lt Description gt A detailed description of the codelist This can be for example work to be performed Input optional Creator The person s name who is creating the new codelist Input optional LS CODES F4 accesses MANAGE Codes where codes can be created 8 5 2 8 5 3 edited or deleted and code groups can be accessed or 8 6 3 STORE F1 stores the codelist and returns to MANAGE Codelists S T O N E X Manage Codelists R9 140 8 5 Managing Codes 8 5 1 Accessing MANAGE Codes Description Managing codes includes e creating new codes e viewing codes with their related information e editing codes e deleting existing codes Access step by step Step Description 1 Refer to 8 3 Accessing Codelist Management to access MANAGE Codelists 2 In MANAGE Codelists highlight the codelist of which codes are to be manag
24. CONF F2 Config Set S SURVEY 4 To configure the COGO application program Reflector 360 Prism Accesses COGO Configuration Refer to 32 3 Add Constant 23 4mm Configuring COGO SETUP F3 01A 2 To set up station Accesses SETUP Station coNT coNF seTUP Setup COGO R9 467 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Job gt Choicelist The active job All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected lt Codelist gt Choicelist Output No codes are stored in the selected lt Job gt All codelists from Main Menu Manage Codelists can be selected Codes have already been stored in the selected lt Job gt If codes had been copied from a System RAM codelist then the name of the codelistis displayed If codes have not been copied from a System RAM codelist but typed in then the name of the active job is displayed Config Set gt Choicelist The active configuration set All configuration sets from Main Menu Manage Configuration Sets can be selected lt Reflector gt Choicelist The active reflector All reflectors from Main Menu Manage Reflectors can be selected lt Add Constant gt Output The additive constant stored with the chosen reflector Next step CONT F1 accepts changes and accesses COGO COGO Menu COGO R9 468 COGO COGO Menu COGO Henu 1 Inverse Traverse
25. CONT F1 imports the data Message Do not remove CF Card Information message Are more data to be imported If yes continue with step 5 If no continue with step 6 YES F6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 NO F4 returns to the R9 Main Menu STONEX Convert Import Data to Job R9 224 15 Config Survey Settings 15 1 ID Templates 15 1 1 Overview of Templates Description Description of the default ID templates STONEX ID templates are predefined templates for point line or area numbers ID templates save having to type in the ID for each object They are useful when many points are collected ID templates that are selected to be used suggest ID s for Point ID Line ID and Area ID whenever points lines and areas are to be surveyed Default ID Template Description 0001 e Suggested as ID for measured points in default configuration sets e This ID is automatically incremented Area0001 e Suggested as ID for areas in default configuration sets e This ID is automatically incremented Auto0001 e Suggested as ID for auto points in default configuration sets These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate e This ID is automatically incremented Aux0001 e Suggested as ID for auxiliary points in default configuration sets These points are used when measuring a hidden point e This ID is automatically incremented Line0001 e Suggest
26. Description Frequently used settings can be accessed quickly and changed with three key strokes For example press SHIFT USER and 1 to turn the iLock on or off The change is immediately applied and the screen where QUICK SET Change Settings to was accessed from opens The workflow is not interrupted This screen displays the possible settings to change to All possible settings have two states and allow very quick setting changes Highlight a field and press ENTER to change to the displayed setting or press the number next to the function Ee Changes made on the QUICK SET Change Settings to screen are stored in the active configu ration set S T O N E X Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 23 3 2 QUICK SET Change Settings to Access Press SHIFT USER QUICK SET Refer to 29 Functions for information on functions and to 16 Config Instrument Settings Change Settings To for information on instrument settings Change Settings to X COMPS F1 4 iLock Turn ON To turn the instrument using compass readings 2 Robotic Turn OFF Hz V F2 3 EDH Type Change to RL To turn the instrument to a specific entered 4 EDH Mode Change to TRK position 5 RCS Hode Turn OFF JSTCK F3 B PS Window gt Turn ON To turn the instrument using the arrow keys 7 V Angle Running CHKPT F4 8 Change Face To check a point or the instrument orientation R GO F5 or R INT F5 QTA 8 R GO F5 to start an iLock search to set lt Au
27. STONEX Structure of a codelist Structure Example Codelist Codelist Code group 1 Trees Code 1 1 Birch Attribute 1 1 1 Height Attribute Condition Attribute 1 1 20 Remark Code 1 2 Oak Attribute 1 2 1 Circumference Attribute Condition Attribute 1 2 20 Code Code group 2 Infrastructure Code 2 1 Road Attribute 2 1 1 Material Codelist types System RAM codelist Job codelist A codelist stored in the System RAM ofthe instrument The collection of codes contained within the currently active job Manage Codelists R9 136 8 2 L Steps from creating to using a codelist STONEX Overview It is recommended to create a codelist in Stonex Tools A codelist can be transferred from Stonex Tools to the System RAM of the instrument using the CompactFlash card Instrument Codelist Management Create codelist Stonex Tools Serial upload System RAM System RAM codelist Copy of codes i Selecting codelist s for a job Job Job codelist T Transfer Compact Flash card a The creating editing and managing of codelists is explained in this chapter In order to use a codelist on the instrument it must be tr
28. Configure RS232 Step Description connection step by step 1 Refer to 18 2 2 Accessing CONFIGURE Interfaces to access CONFIGURE Interfaces 2 In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight an interface which has an RS232 device attached CTRL F4 to access CONFIGURE RS232 Connection CONFIGURE RS232 Connection lt Device gt The type of device highlighted when CONFIGURE RS232 Connection was accessed Bluetooth Some devices ask for the identification number of the Bluetooth The identification number of Stonex s Bluetooth is 0000 D Address gt Available for Bluetooth Yes The ID address of the Bluetooth device to be used Ce SRCH F4 available for Bluetooth Yes to search for all available Bluetooth devices If more than one Bluetooth device is found a list of available devices is provided 5 CONT F1 returns to CONFIGURE Interfaces S T O N E X Config Interfaces Controlling The Device R9 336 21 Description Access TOOLS Format Memory Device STONEX Tools Format Memory Device Allows the CompactFlash card and the System RAM to be formatted All data will be erased Refer to Appendix B Memory Types for more information on the types of memory devices available Select Main Menu Tools Format Memory Device Format Memory Device Memory Device CF Cardi Format Method Format Quick 4 CONT F1 To format a memory device a
29. Description of fields Field Option Description Station ID gt Output Station ID as selected in SETUP Station Setup Instrument Ht gt User input The instrument height lt Code gt Choicelist The code for the station point lt Code Desc gt Output A short description of the code lt Stn Easting gt Output The easting coordinate for the setup station lt Stn Northing gt Output The northing coordinate for the setup station lt Stn Height gt Output The height of the setup station STO N EX Setup R9 614 Field Option Description lt Current Scale gt Output The geometric scale correction is displayed The correction displayed depends upon the options chosen in CONFIGURE TPS Corrections GeoPPM page Refer to 16 4 TPS Corrections for details Next step IF THEN the next page is to be accessed PAGE F6 changes to the Setup page the station and orientation is to be set SET F1 to set the station and orientation Set azimuth Application step by step Set up the instrument over a known point with orientation to a point with known azimuth Settings Set lt Automation iLock gt in CONFIGURE EDM amp iLock Settings STONEX Setup R9 615 STONEX The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter
30. EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Point Point ID Cg The visible pages on this screen depend on the properties of the point being edited MANAGE Edit Point Point ID Coords page It is possible to edit the point ID and for points of Class CTRL gt Other point related data is shown in output fields Points of Class REF cannot be renamed Ce Changing the point ID for a point of any class applies this new point ID to all other points with the same original name regard less of class 7 3 1 MORE F5 displays information about class sub class estimated 3D coordinate quality time and date of when point was stored instrument source and source Changing the height type does not edit the point 7 3 1 Is Class MEAS gt e Ifyes continue with step 5 Manage Data R9 95 STONEX Step Description e Ifno continue with step 7 Refer to chapter The edited point is lt Class MEAS gt PAGE F6 changes to the Obs page MANAGE Edit Point Point ID Obs page It is possible to edit the reflector height The station from where the point was measured is shown in an output field Ce The reflector height is shown and may be edited Changing the reflector height recalculates the point height The reflector type is shown in an output field The distance variables AHz AV ASlop Distare shown in an output field whenever a measurement has been taken in both fac
31. Is the attached code the same as Yes e Point imported for the point already existing in the database m No Should the existing code for the Point imported existing code from data point in the database be replaced base applies p No Is the new point code already in yp Point imported with code code added to the job job as thematical code i Point imported with code S T O N E X Convert Import Data to Job R9 217 14 2 Accessing the Data Import Functionality Access Select Main Menu Convert Import Data to Job OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key Next step IF importing data in THEN ASCII format Refer to 14 3 Importing Data in ASCII Format GSI format Refer to 14 4 Importing Data in GSI Format DXF format Refer to 14 5 Importing Data in DXF Format S T O N E X Convert Import Data to Job R9 218 14 3 Requirements Access Import data step by step STONEX Importing Data in ASCII Format At least one ASCII file with any file extension is stored in the DATA directory of the Compact Flash card Refer to 14 2 Accessing the Data Import Functionality to access IMPORT Import ASCII GSI Data to Job Step Description 1 IMPORT Import ASCII GSI Data to Job
32. MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 462 31 Application Programs General 31 1 Overview Description Application programs are software packages supporting specific tasks Available are e Survey integrated into the instrument firmware and cannot be deleted e Setup integrated into the instrument firmware and cannot be deleted e COGO e Stakeout For an explanation of the application programs refer to the relevant chapters Loadable and non load Loadable application programs e Can be loaded onto the instrument able application programs e Can be deleted from the instrument Non loadable application programs e Are always available on the instrument e Survey and Setup are non loadable application programs To get updates for these programs the system software has to be reloaded S T O N E X Application Programs General R9 463 31 2 Description Access to the application programs menu R9 Programs STONEX Accessing the Programs Menu The application programs menu contains all loaded application programs including Survey and Setup They are listed in the order in which they were loaded Selecting an option in the menu starts the application program assigned to the option Configurations and measurements that can be performed depend on the application program The screen ofthe application programs menu is called R9 Programs Select Main Menu Programs OR Press ON CONT
33. Move the focus on the screen Function keys F1 F6 Correspond to the six softkeys that appear on the bottom of the screen when the screen is activated User Interface R9 42 Key combinations STONEX Keys Description ON plus USER Turns the instrument off when in R9 Main Menu SHIFT USER Calls QUICK SET Change Settings to SHIFT A Pages up SHIFT v Pages down User Interface R9 43 4 2 Screen Screen f a Time a IR eal 3 b Caption ELS g c Title f T B d Screen area Gi e Message line d 1 Wer 2 Programs 3 eie f Icons 0 Wd p mes 4 Convert 5 Config B Tools h CAPS e i i i EE i Pa T j Quick coding icon k k Softkeys Elements of the screen Hemant Description Time The current local time is shown Caption Shows location either in Main Menu under ON key or USER key Title Name of the screen is shown Screen area The working area of the screen Message line Messages are shown for 10 s Icons Shows the current status information of the instrument Refer to 4 4 Icons Can be used with touch screen ESC x Can be used with touch screen Same functionality as the fixed key ESC The last operation will be undone S T O N E X User Interface R9 44 STONEX Element Description CAPS The caps mode for upper case letters is active The caps mode
34. Next step Step Description 1 CONT F1 returns to CONFIGURE Display Settings 2 CONT F1 returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Display Settings was accessed S T O N E X Config Survey Settings R9 246 15 3 Description Access CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Coding page STONEX Coding amp Linework Settings The settings on this screen define the method of coding for both points and lines Refer to 9 Coding for a complete description of coding Select Main Menu Config Survey Settings Coding amp Linework Settings OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management Coding amp Linework Coding Linework Quick Code Digits i 2 4 Rec Free Code Before Point dy Attributes Default Values dr Hand Attribs Only If No Value du CONT F1 Thematc Codes With Codelist p To accept changes and return to the screen from Show Codes All Codes where this screen was accessed 02a t PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen Config Survey Settings R9 247 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Quick Code gt Never Prevents the use of quick coding completely On Allows the use of quick coding and activates it Off Allows the use of quick coding
35. WI51 PPM Total mm PPM Total mm WI81 East East WI 82 North North WI 83 Elev Elev WI 87 Refl Ht Refl Ht Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 325 STONEX Example 1 GSI8 Each word has 16 characters of which 8 characters are used for the data block Word 1 110001 0000A110 110002 0000A111 110003 0000A112 110004 0000A113 110005 0000A114 Example 2 GSI16 Word 2 Word 3 81 00 00005387 82 00 00000992 81 00 00007586 82 00 00003031 81 00 00007536 82 00 00003080 81 00 00003839 82 00 00003080 81 00 00001241 82 00 00001344 Each word has 24 characters of which 16 characters are used for the data block Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 110001 000000000PNC0055 21 002 0000000013384650 22 002 0000000005371500 110002 000000000PNC0056 21 002 0000000012802530 22 002 0000000005255000 110003 000000000PNC0057 21 002 0000000011222360 22 002 0000000005433800 110004 000000000PNC0058 21 002 0000000010573550 22 002 0000000005817600 110005 000000000PNC0059 21 002 0000000009983610 22 002 0000000005171400 GSI Word information Pos Name Description of values Applicable for 1 2 Word Index WI Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 326 STONEX Pos Name Description of values Applicable for 3 No signifi No information WI 11 WI 21 WI 22 cance WI 31 WI 51 WI 81 WI 82 WI 83 WI 87 4 Automatic No informatio
36. e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used S N P2 Known P4 a P1 First known point P2 Second known point b P3 Third known point P5 P4 Fourth known point P3 a Line from P1 to P2 b Line from P3 to P4 Unknown P1 P5 COGO point COGO R9 511 COGO intersection calcu lation with by points step by step STONEX The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Intersection Input Ce COGO Intersection Input Input page 32 3 SHIFT CONF F2 to configure the COGO application program 2 COGO Intersection Input Input page Method By Points 1st Point gt The point ID ofthe known start point of the first line for the COGO calculation 2nd Point gt The point ID of the known end point of the first line for the COGO calculation Select the points stored in the job Ce SURVY F5 when 1st Point gt or 2nd Point gt is highlighted To 35 2 measure a known point for the COGO calculation Ce For all point fields the MapView interactive display on the Map page 30 5 can be used to select the desired point Ce Totypein coordinates for a known point open the choicelist when 1st 7 3 2 Point gt or 2nd Point gt is highl
37. lt Grade gt Output The grade between the two points lt AEasting gt Output The difference in Easting between the two points lt ANorthing gt Output The difference in Northing between the two points Storing the results step by step Step Description 1 Press STORE F1 to store the inverse result to the active job There are no points stored to the database only the inverse result 2 Inverse results can be exported from the job using a format file The format file is created with Format Manager in Stonex Tools STONEX COGO R9 483 32 4 3 Starting step by step Calculating STONEX Inverse Between a Known Point and a Line Pt Line Step Description 1 COGO Henu 1 Inverse 2 Traverse 3 Intersections 2 COGO Inverse 1 Inverse Pt Pt 2 Inverse Pt Line 3 Inverse Pt Are Inverse Pt Line Input CALC F1 Input Map To calculate the result Hethod ZEN INV F2 To calculate the inverse between two points Start Point 200 dp LAST F4 End Point 2014 To select the values for distance and offset from previous COGO inverse calculations SURVY F5 Offset Point 101 sp To measure a known point for the calculation SHIFT CONF F2 Q2a tr To confi gure the program CALC INV CAST SURVY PAGE oer MODIF F4 To modify the original azimuth distance or offset value COGO R9 484 PAGE F6 To change to another
38. 342 23 2 Description Access TOOLS Upload System Languages STONEX System Languages System language uploads are possible from the CompactFlash card to the instrument These files are stored in the SYSTEM directory of the active memory device and use an extension that is individual to each language Select Main Menu Tools Upload System Files System Languages Upload System Languages From CF Card To Instrument Language GERHANMM Version v1 00 CONT F1 To upload a system language and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed 02a t DEL F4 CONT DEL To delete a language from the System RAM Description of fields Field Option Description lt From gt Output Upload from CompactFlash card lt To gt Output Upload to the instrument lt Language gt Choicelist List of language files stored on the CompactFlash card lt Version gt Output Version of the language file Tools Upload System Files R9 343 Next step CONT F1 uploads the selected language LE Itis not possible to have more than three language files stored on the instrument English is always available as the default language and cannot be deleted S T O N E X Tools VUpload System Files R9 344 Description Access TOOLS Upload System Firmware 23 3 STONEX Instrument Firmware Firmware uploads are possible fro
39. ALL F1 to record the measurement SETUP Measure Target 2 33 4 4 Choose a target point and type in a reflector height Aim correctly at the reflector ALL F1 to record the measurement and to access SETUP Results SETUP Results Stn Coords page 33 5 SET F1 to store the selected setup data and exit the application program Setup R9 630 Description Access SETUP Results Stn Coords page STON 33 5 33 5 1 EX Setup Results Least Square and Robust Calculation e This screen is displayed after a resection or orientation and height transfer calculation e For the calculations the least square or the robust method can be used After the station is set all following measurements will be related to this new station and orientation Press CALC F5 in the SETUP Measure Target screen The screen described consists of the Stn Coords Sigma Stn Code and Plot page The explana tions for the softkeys given below are valid for the Stn Coords and Sigma page Refer to 7 3 2 Creating a New Point for information on the keys on the Stn Code page refer to 30 6 Plot Mode MapView Screen Area for information on the keys on the Plot page Setup R9 631 Results Least Squares Stn Coords Sigma Stn Code P1ot Station ID 0001 No of Points 4 Set d E N or Instrument Ht 1 255 m Stn Easting 100 000 m Stn Northing 100 000 m Stn Height 10 001 m New Azimuth 299 9998 g
40. Field Option Description lt Point ID gt User input The identifier for measured points The configured point ID template is used The ID can be changed To start a new sequence of point ID s overtype the point ID For AN individual number independent of the ID template SHIFT INDIV F5 SHIFT RUN F5 changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template Refer to 15 1 ID Templates Survey General R9 687 STONEX Field Option Description lt Reflector Ht gt User input The last used reflector height is suggested when accessing the Survey application program An indi vidual reflector height can by typed in lt Hz gt Output The current horizontal angle lt V gt Output The current vertical angle lt Horiz Dist gt Output The horizontal distance after DIST F2 was pressed No distance is displayed when accessing the screen and after REC F3 or ALL F1 lt Ht Diff gt Output The height difference between station and measured point after DIST F2 Displays when accessing the screen and after REC F3 or ALL F1 lt Easting gt Output Easting coordinate of the measured point lt Northing gt Output Northing coordinate of the measured point lt Height gt Output Elevation of the measured point Next step PAGE F6 changes to another page on this screen EH Survey General R9 688 36 36 1 Descr
41. Next step CONT F1 returns to R9 Main Menu S T O N E X Config Mnstrument Settings R9 276 16 7 Description Access CONFIGURE Telescope Accessories Hz Limit page STONEX Telescope Accessories The settings on this screen offer the possibility to limit the motorization to a certain part of the horizontal and or vertical circle as used telescope and lens accessories may obstruct a full rota tion of the telescope General positioning functions are then restricted to these boundaries Select Main Menu Config Instrument Settings Telescope Accessories elescope Accessories Hz Limit WLimit Hz Begin 0 00 00 Hz End 90 00 00 CONT F1 To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu Use Limit RE wu F2 To define new horizontal limits for instrument rotation SHOW F5 To define new horizontal limits for instrument at CONT NEW SHOW PAGE rotation Description of fields Field Option Description lt Hz Begin gt Output User The boundaries of the window within the instrument Hz End gt input is allowed to turn lt Use Limit gt Yes Instrument turning is restricted to the defined window Config Instrument Settings R9 277 CONFIGURE Telescope Accessories V Limit page STONEX Field Option Description No Instrument rotates without any limitation from 0 to 400 gon Next step PAGE F6 returns to t
42. Step Description 1 Press ON to access the Programs menu Select and activate Setup to move to the first screen Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Station Setup 2 3 4 lt Method gt Ensure that Local Resection is selected lt Station ID gt Enter the instrument station lt Instrument Ht gt Enter the height of the instrument station lt Stn Ht From gt Select the source for the instrument station height lt Station Ht gt Enter the elevation of the instrument station Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Measure Target Setup R9 627 SETUP Station Setup STONEX Station Setup CONT F1 Hethod Local Resection J To accept all settings and continue The chosen settings are activated and the next screen SETUP Measure Target is displayed Station ID 100 Instrument Ht 1 587 m SCALE Fa l To display the geometric corrections used with Stn Ht From User Entered 4 the measurements Refer to 16 4 TPS Correc Station Ht 455 220 m tions PPM F5 To display the atmospheric corrections used 02a with the measurements Refer to 16 4 TPS Cont j scate PPM Corrections SHIFT CONF F2 To configure the application program SETUP The screen SETUP Configuration is displayed Refer to 33 3 Configuring Setup SHIFT INDIV F5 and SHIFT RUN F5 To change between successive numbering Station ID and individual numbering Indiv Pt ID enteri
43. V Check amp Adjust R9 388 Description of columns and fields Column Option Description New g J Shows the new determined and averaged instrument errors The unit is displayed in Use Yes Stores the new adjustment error No Keeps the currently used error active on the instru ment and rejects the new one Old g Shows the old adjustment errors which are currently valid on the instrument The unit is displayed in Next step IF the results are THEN to be stored CONT F1 overwrites the old adjustment errors with the new ones if Yes is set in the Use column to be determined again REDO F2 rejects all new determined adjustment values and repeats the whole procedure Refer to step 2 of paragraph Combined proce dure step by step S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 389 27 6 Tilting Axis Adjustment a Access step by step Step Description 1 Refer to 27 3 Accessing Check amp Adjust Menu to access TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu In TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu highlight Tilting Axis a CONT F1 to access TOOLS Tilting Axis Adjustment I Description This procedure determines the following instrument error a Tilting axis error Tilting axis adjustment The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more step by step information on screens Step
44. e DXF files for import export to from job e Logfiles created from application programs DBX e Job files various files e DTM jobs various files GSI e GSI files gsi e ASCII files for export from job S T O N E X Directory Structure of the Memory Device R9 729 SYSTEM Application program files a e Firmware files fw Language files s e Licence file key e System files System ram S T O N E X Directory Structure of the Memory Device R9 730 Index Symbols xm 360 c M 360 A Vd M S 101 Absolute coordinate difference IDEAE 103 Limit exceeded erter 103 Absolute difference EEN 100 Access Ii ousia 699 Configuration devices ENEE 314 Configuration set management ENEE 194 Datta export iuter ite Find target point ID template configuration MapViEW c Move by joystick ene Orientate with compass ENEE Orientation and height transfer cesses 622 Positioning Hz V Quick settings Remote point ENEE Set station and azimuth seen 609 STONEX Set station and backsight Setup application Ni d m Acclimatise to the ambient temperature 373 Activate Code ele 126 Code group eset rts critt icti natn aoo 126 Activate application programs see 3
45. e Some reflectors are predefined as default and can be selected e Additional reflectors can be defined Default reflector Following default reflectors are always available on the instrument Name in list Type Additive Constant 360 Prism Prism 23 1 mm Reflectorless RL 34 4 mm Active reflector One reflector is always the active reflector S T O N E X Manage Reflectors R9 200 12 2 Access MANAGE Reflectors STONEX Accessing Reflector Management Select Main Menu Manage Reflectors OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR From a choicelist in some screens for example the SURVEY Survey Begin screen X Add Constant 23 1mm 34 4mm Reflectorless 01A 1 CONT NEW EDIT DEL Hore CONT F1 To select the highlighted reflector and to return to the previous screen NEW F2 To define a new reflector Refer to 12 3 Creating a New Reflector EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted reflector except for default reflectors Refer to 12 4 Editing a Reflector DEL F4 To delete the highlighted reflector except for default reflectors MORE F5 To display information about the additive constant the reflector type and the creator ofthe reflector Manage Reflectors R9 201 Next step IF a reflector THEN is to be selected highlight the desired reflector CONT F1 closes the screen
46. e four points twolines Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used Line Calculations To calculate the base point of the line using 32 7 e two known points and an offset point abearing and a distance from a known point and an offset point To calculate the offset point of the line using COGO R9 470 STONEX COGO menu options Description Refer to chapter e two known points that define the line a distance along the line and an offset adistancealonga bearing from a known point and offset To calculate new points on aline using e two known points that define the line and either the segment length or the number of segments e a bearing and distance from a known point that define the line and either the segment length or the number of segments Arc Calculations To calculate 32 8 e thearccentre e the base point ofthe arc e the offset point of the arc e new points on an arc The arc can be defined using e three points e aradius to two known points e aradius and two tangents each of it defined by a point and the intersection point of the tangents COGO R9 471 STONEX COGO menu options Description Refer to chapter e the length of an arc and two tangents each of it defined by a point and the intersection point of the tangents e the length of a chord and two tangents each of it defined bya point and the intersection point of the tangents K
47. lt Name gt User input Name of new device lt Type gt Output Same device type as was highlighted when NEW F2 was used lt Baud Rate gt From 1200 to Frequency of data transfer from instrument to device 115200 in bits per second lt Parity gt None Oddor Error checksum at the end of a block of digital data Even Data Bits gt 7or8 Number of bits in a block of digital data lt Stop Bits gt 1or2 Number of bits at the end of a block of digital data Flow Control gt None or Available for some devices Activates hardware hand RTS CTS shake When the instrument device is ready for data it asserts the Request To Send line indicating it is ready to receive data This is read by the sender at the Clear To Send input indicating it is clear to send the data Next step STORE F1 to closethe screen and toreturn to the screen from where CONFIGURE Device was accessed Interfaces Ports Devices R9 318 18 4 4 Editing a Device Access step by step Step Description 1 Refer to 18 4 2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices to access CONFIGURE Devices 2 Highlight the device to be edited from the list 3 EDIT F3 to access CONFIGURE Edit Device CONFIGURE The availability of options may change depending on the selected device Most fields are iden Edit Device tical with the creation of a new device Refer to 18 4 3 Creating a New Device for informatio
48. step Matching new points and editing matched points is very similar Step Description scale scale 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Match Common Points 2 NEW F2 or EDIT F3 3 COGO Choose Matching Points or COGO Edit Matching Points lt Source Pt gt A point of origin for the calculation of the shifts and or rotation and or lt Target Pt gt A target point for the calculation of the shifts and or rotation and or STONEX COGO R9 561 Step Description lt Match Type gt The type of match to be made between the points selected in lt Source Pt gt and lt Target Pt gt Position amp Height Position Only Height Only or None Select the points to be matched Ce SURVY F5 To manually occupy a point and store it in the active job 4 CONT F1 returns to COGO Match Common Points n and adds a new line of matched points to the matched points list Fix parameters The settings on this screen define the parameters to be used in the transformation IF the value for a THEN the value for this parameter will be field is calculated any number fixed to that value Description of fields Field Option Description lt A Easting gt User input Shift in Easting direction lt A Northing gt User input Shift in Northing direction lt A Height gt User input Shift in Height direction lt Rotation gt User inpu
49. 12 3 Creating a New Reflector 203 12 4 Editing a Reflector 204 13 Convert Export Data from Job 205 13 1 Overview 205 13 2 Accessing the Data Export Functionality 206 13 3 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII Format 207 13 4 Exporting Data from a Job to another Device 210 13 5 Exporting Data in DXF Format 212 Table of Contents R9 7 14 Convert Import Data to Job 214 14 1 Overview 214 14 2 Accessing the Data Import Functionality 218 14 3 Importing Data in ASCII Format 219 14 4 Importing Data in GSI Format 221 14 5 Importing Data in DXF Format 223 15 Config ASurvey Settings 225 15 1 ID Templates 225 15 1 1 Overview of Templates 225 15 1 2 Accessing ID Template Configuration 228 15 1 3 Creating a New ID Template 230 15 1 4 Editing an ID Template 234 15 1 5 Deleting an ID Template 236 15 1 6 Working Example 237 15 2 Display Settings 240 15 3 Coding amp Linework Settings 247 15 4 Offsets 253 15 5 Target Check 256 16 Config Mnstrument Settings 258 16 1 EDM amp iLock Settings 258 16 2 Search Windows 264 16 3 Automatic Prism Search 266 16 4 TPS Corrections 268 16 5 Compensator 273 16 6 Instrument ID 275 16 7 Telescope Accessories 277 S T O N E X Table of Contents R9 8 17 Config XGeneral Settings 280 17 1 Units amp Formats 280 17 2 Wizard Mode 289 17 3 User Menu 291 17 4 Language 293 17 5 Lights Display Beeps Text 294 17 6 Start Up amp Pow
50. 13 STORE F1 to store the area and to access COGO Define How to Divide Area 14 COGO Define How to Divide Area Input page Divide By Defined Line Using Parallel Line Point A gt and Point B gt Select the first and the second point of the line which is used as the reference for the new border The new border will run parallel to this line COGO R9 585 STONEX Step Description lt Shift Through Point gt lt Through Point 100 gt 15 CALC F1 to access COGO Results of Area Division 16 COGO Results of Area Division Result page The size of the two new sub areas is displayed 17 CONT F1 to access COGO Area Division Results 18 COGO Area Division Results Result1 page lt Point ID gt The identifier for the first COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for lt Survey Pts gt in CONFIGURE ID Templates The point ID can be changed The calculated coordinates are displayed Type in a point ID Ce COORD F2 views other coordinate types Ce _ RSLT1 F3 and RSLT2 F3 to view the first and second result Ce STAKE F5 to access the Stakeout application program and stake out the calculated COGO point Ce SHIFT INDIV F5 for an individual point ID independent of the ID template SHIFT RUN F5 changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template 19 STORE F1 stores the first COGO point and displays the coordinates of the s
51. 30 5 Map Mode for infor mation on the functionality and softkeys available Elements of graphical j Theodolite Current scale display Reflector Q Point to be staked N North n North arrow eS For lt Visual Guides Off gt no graphical display is shown on the screen STONEX Stakeout R9 663 For scale gt 1000 m the circle is displayed in grey To Station or North 0 Graphical display For scale 0 5 m From Station or North ei H 50 m R9 664 S T O N E X Stakeout 34 4 2 Description L Manual entry of points step by step STONEX Manual Entry of Points to be Staked Manual entry of points to be staked can be used to input angle and distance values It is possible to type in angles and distances independent of the used lt Stake Mode gt The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Set up and orient the instrument 33 2 Start the Stakeout application program STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin Check the settings CONT F1 to access STAKEOUT XX Stakeout 34 4 STAKEOUT XX Stakeout SHIFT MSTAK F3 to access STAKEOUT Manual Entry 6 STAKEOUT Manual Entry Enter the values of the point to be staked 7 STAKE F1 to access STAKEOUT XX Stakeout Ce The point is created and the coordinates of the point
52. 32 10 Computation of shift rotation and scale values STONEX COGO Calculation Shift Rotate amp Scale Match Pts Method The COGO calculation shift rotate amp scale match pts applies shifts and or rotation and or scale to one or several known points The shifts and or rotation and or scale are calculated from selected points using a 2D Helmert tranformation Elements that must be known are e the coordinates of at least two matching points for the calculation of the shifts and or rota tion and or scale e the coordinates of the points to be shifted rotated and or scaled They must be stored in the active job e the shift values They can be defined as the direction of Easting Northing and Height or as an azimuth and a grid distance or as shift from one point to another e the rotation value It can be defined by a point as rotation centre plus a rotation or by an existing and new azimuth e the scale It is only applied to the position Points with full coordinate triplets position only points and height only points can be used The number of pairs of points matched determines whether the shift rotation and scale values are computed Number of Shift East Shift North Shift Height Rotation Scale pairs of points matched 1 X X X wt_ M smm Hil COGO R9 558 Access COGO Match Common
53. 32 4 The values for the azimuth the distance and the offset can be selected from previous COGO inverse calculations LAST F4 when lt Azimuth gt lt HDist XX gt or lt Offset gt is highlighted To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations Upon pressing CONT F1 in COGO Last Inverse Calculations the selected result is copied to the field which was highlighted when LAST F4 was pressed 32 12 The values for the azimuth the distance and the offset can be mathe matically modified COGO 32 13 R9 492 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter SHIFT MODIF F4 when lt Azimuth gt lt HDist XX gt or lt Offset gt is highlighted To add subtract multiply and divide values 4 Is the COGO point a foresight e Ifyes CALC F1 The result is calculated and displayed in COGO Traverse Results After storing the result and returning to COGO Traverse Input Input page the point displayed in lt From gt is the newly calculated COGO point The next COGO calculation can be continued from this new point e Ifno SSHOT F3 The result is calculated and displayed in COGO Traverse Results After storing the result and returning to COGO Traverse Input Input page the point originally selected in lt From gt is still displayed The next COGO calculation can be continued from that same point 5 COGO Traverse Results Result page Point ID gt The identifie
54. 34 3 all pages in STAKEOUT Configuration 6 CONT F1 to access STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin Stakeout R9 672 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter CONT F1 to access STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Stake page Check the suggested point ID and the reflector height DIST F2 10 Move to the point to be staked either by following the range information in the fields lt FORW gt lt BACK gt lt RGHT gt and lt LEFT gt or the graph ical display When the value is at or nearly zero the current position is the point to be staked 11 Hold the reflector steady over the marker 12 REC F1 stores distance and angles For lt Pos Check Yes gt and or lt Height Check Yes gt in STAKEOUT Configuration Checks page a check is made on the horizontal and or vertical coordinate distance from the staked point to the point to be staked If either of the configured difference limits are exceeded STAKEOUT Difference Limit Exceeded is accessed 34 4 5 13 Are more points to be staked e Ifyes continue with step 14 e Ifno continue with step 16 14 STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Stake page Stakeout R9 673 Step Description According to sort and filter settings the subsequent point in lt Stakeout Job gt is suggested for staking out Refer to chapter 15 Repeat steps 8 to 13 16
55. A format file defines which and how data is written to a logfile Format files are created using Stonex Tools A format file must first be transferred from the CompactFlash card to the System RAM before it can be selected Refer to 22 Tools Transfer Objects for information on how to transfer a format file Opening the choicelist accesses XX Format Files where an existing format file can be selected or deleted Next step PAGE F6 changes back to the Parameters page Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 383 27 5 Combined Adjustment I t i c and iLock Access step by step Step Description 1 Refer to 27 3 Accessing Check amp Adjust Menu to access TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu In TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu highlight Combined 1 t i c iLock CONT F1 to access TOOLS Combined I Description The combined adjustment procedure determines the following instrument errors in one process Lt Compensator longitudinal and transversal index errors i Vertical index error related to the standing axis c Hz collimation error also called line of sight error iLock Hz iLock zero point error for Hz angle option iLock V iLock zero point error for V angle option STONEX Tools Check amp Adjust R9 384 Combined procedure step by step STONEX Step Description Before determining the instrument errors the instrument has to be levelled up us
56. After storing the measurement data to the lt Job gt the next lt Point ID gt in the job is displayed The instru ment positions to the point if enough data is available DIST F2 To measure and display distances REC F3 Records displayed values to the current job A distance measurement is not necessary before pressing REC F3 After storing the measure ment data to the lt Job gt the next lt Point ID gt in the job is displayed The instrument positions to the point if enough data is available CALC F5 Available when sufficient data when two or more points have been measured is available for calculation Runs the setup calculation and accesses SETUP Results SHIFT FIND F2 Available once sufficient data is available for calculation Accesses SETUP Find Target to guide the reflector to the selected target point Refer to 33 6 Finding a Target Point for infor mation on this screen SHIFT POSIT F4 Available once sufficient data is available for calculation To position the instrument to the selected target point R9 623 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Point ID gt Choicelist The point ID of the target point to be measured All points from lt Fixpoint Job gt can be selected except class NONE lt Reflector Ht gt User input The default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set is suggested lt Azimuth gt Output Th
57. ENTER Ce Y 8 gt X 7 gt 8 Type in 6 9 ENTER Ce lt Z 8 gt Y 7 gt X 6 gt 10 F1 Ce lt Y 8 gt lt X 13 gt 11 F4 Ce lt X 0 61538 gt Tools Calculator R9 353 24 4 2 Standard Mode Requirements Access TOOLS Standard Calculator STONEX lt Operatng Mode Standard gt in TOOLS Calculator Configuration Refer to 24 2 Accessing the Calculator to access TOOLS Standard Calculator Refer to paragraph Working example for information about the operating principle Standard Calculator M 45 00000 COS 45 000 0 707 The function keys F1 F6 are allocated seven times Using A or V the various allocations can be accessed Refer to 24 4 3 Description of Softkeys 02a tt SIN cos TAN ASIN Acos ATAN for information about the function keys Description of fields Field Option Description First field on the Output The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calcu screen lator as configured in TOOLS Calculator Configura tion DEG Degrees RAD Radians Tools Calculator R9 354 Field Option Description GRAD Gon x Output The result of the sum or difference of values in the last field on the screen using 2 F1 and amp F2 Third to sixth field on Output Previously entered value the screen OR Latest operation including result amp indicates that the value is cut after t
58. Filter Line of sight en Line of sight error c Line style COIN eege eege Eesen 145 For line area code EEN 77 STONEX UA 107 Lines Sorting and filter 5 asas etes trneespetttns 118 Jug secreten 182 uy eieans 289 LO EDM Bau D 420 Lock keyboard eerte tee ie 47 Logfile Create name Check amp Adjust nee 383 Logfile create name AOLE O 478 S OCW E 605 Stake Ut ue diee ete i i 661 Logfile directOEy 1 tertie aree sisters 729 Logging auto points enee 691 Long range EDM gereest eaae 420 Loss of Robotic enee 426 M R9 742 Points seese Reflectors Manual entry Points to be staked Step by step Map View t ACCESS GOMpPONents uias n cutem ee Aa LEa raian iaa Enas oif N Mode Sud 456 North Ela de VE 444 Point symbols ee aa 446 Point with focus EEN 444 Results in plot mode Scale bar sn Screen area Select Lines and Areas ENEE 461 Select POE masanna aR 449 SOftkeys osos ek A 441 Symbol STONEX Instrument station cssssssssssssscssssessssssessssecsseesseeseesess 443 Reflectors eege dente e 443 Toolbar Description EE 445 Symbol Match POINTS M Mean page ACCESS LA SE Measure Reuter Setup po
59. Intersections Area Division End COGO woon OO P w pr cont 1 Line Calculations Arc Calculations Shift Rotate amp Scale Hanual Shift Rotate amp Scale Match Pts The COGO menu lists all COGO calculation methods and the option to end COGO CONT F1 with the subsequent screen SHIFT CONF F2 To select the highlighted option and to continue To configure the COGO application program 02a t Configuring COGO Description of the COGO menu options Accesses COGO Configuration Refer to 32 3 COGO menu options Description Refer to chapter Inverse To calculate the direction the distance and the 3D 32 4 coordinate differences between e two known points e aknown point and a given line aknown point and a given arc Points with full coordinate triplets position only points and height only points can be used Traverse To calculate the position of new points using 32 5 STONEX COGO R9 469 STONEX COGO menu options Description Refer to chapter e the azimuth bearing and the distance froma known point Offset optional e the angle and the distance from a known point Offset optional Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used Intersections To calculate the position of an intersection point 32 6 using e bearings from two known points e a bearing and a distance from two known points e distances from two known points
60. Logfile page STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description Write Logfile Yes or No To generate a logfile when the application program is exited A logfile is a file to which data from an application program is written to Itis generated using the selected Format File gt File Name Choicelist Available for Write Logfile Yes The name of the file to which the data should be written A logfile is stored in the NDATA directory of the active memory device The data is always appended to the file Opening the choicelist accesses XX Logfiles where a name for a new logfile can be created and an existing logfile can be selected or deleted Format File gt Choicelist Available for Write Logfile Yes A format file defines which and how data is written to a logfile Format files are created using Stonex Tools A format file must first be transferred from the CompactFlash card to the System RAM before it can be selected Refer to 22 Tools Transfer Objects for information on how to transfer a format file Opening the choicelist accesses XX Format Files where an existing format file can be selected or deleted COGO R9 478 Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen Ce lt Azimuth gt is used throughout this chapter This should always be considered to also mean lt Bearing gt STONEX COGO R9 479 32
61. Manage Codelists R9 149 9 Coding 9 1 Overview Description A code is a description which can be stored with a point line area or alone Coding on R9 is very flexible with thematical free and quick coding being available Thematical and free coding is possible by selecting codes from a codelist or by directly typing in codes SmartCodes are a quick way for a code to be stored with a point to be selected and to be meas ured Ce For coding points lines and areas have the same behaviour In this chapter the word object is used as a generic term for points lines and areas Coding methods Coding Characteristic Description method Thematical Use To store a description together with an object inside an application program or in Main Menu Manage Data Selection ofthe codes e Forthematical coding with codelist On a configured display mask codes are selected from the job codelistin a choicelist The job codelist must contain thematical codes e For thematical coding without codelist On a configured display mask codes are typed in Recording of the codes Together with the objects STO N EX Coding R9 150 STONEX Coding method Characteristic Description Free Use Selection of the codes Recording of the codes To store a description independent of an object at any time A free code can be used to store a description related to an object or to store addi
62. Point A 0001 To calculate the value for the distance from two Point B 0002 existing points Available if lt HDist XX gt is high Shift By Distance lighted SIZE F3 and PERC F3 HDist Grid 20 0008 To display the size and the perimeter of the sub Q2a tr area CALC INV SIZE LAST SURVY PAGE LAST F4 To select the value for the distance from previous COGO inverse calculations Available if lt HDist XX gt is highlighted SURVY F5 To manually occupy a point for the COGO calcu lation Available if Point A gt Point B gt or Rotation Pnt gt is highlighted PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT CONF F2 To configure the COGO application program COGO R9 576 STONEX SHIFT MODIF F4 To mathematically modify the values for the distance or angle Available if lt HDist XX gt or lt Azimuth gt is highlighted Description of fields Field Option Description lt Divide By gt This field defines how the size of the sub area is defined Percentage The size of the sub area is given in Area The size of the sub area is given in mi Defined Line The new border defining the size of the sub area is known lt Using gt Parallel Line This field defines how the new border will run The border will be parallel to a line defined by lt Point A gt and lt Point B gt Perpendic The border will be perpendicular to a line defined by Line lt
63. Refer to 34 4 2 Manual Entry of Points to be Staked Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID gt Choicelist The point ID ofthe point to be staked Accesses STAKEOUT Data Job Name where points are shown according to sort and filter settings and staked points are indicated by Ps lt hr gt Reflector Ht gt or User input The default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set is suggested lt FORW gt Go FORWARD gt or Output The horizontal distance along the line defined by station and reflector from the current position to the point to be staked 4 or f to move towards the station depending on lt Symbols gt STONEX Stakeout R9 669 STONEX Field Option Description lt Go BACK gt or lt BACK gt Output The horizontal distance in reverse direction from the line defined by station and reflector from the current position to the point to be staked t or 4 to move away from the station depending on lt Symbols gt Go RIGHT gt or lt RGHT gt Output The direction depends on lt Stake Mode gt The hori zontal distance orthogonal to the right of the line defined by station and reflector from the current posi tion to the point to be staked gt to move to the right of the line defined in lt Symbols gt to move to the left of the line defined in lt Symbols gt lt Go LEFT gt or
64. WI 81 WI 82 WI 83 WI 87 Output format Format Pt N E Ht Date Point ID Northing Easting Elevation Date Time lt CR LF gt Description of fields The format settings are defined in CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Field Description Point ID Text describing the point identification Northing The northing coordinate Easting The easting coordinate Elevation The height coordinate Date The measurement origination date Time The measurement origination time STONEX Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 328 Field Description lt CR LF gt Carriage Return Line Feed Example 2004 4997 635 6010 784 393 173 09 10 2001 16 34 12 2 2005 4997 647 6010 765 393 167 09 10 2001 16 34 12 4 2006 4997 657 6010 755 393 165 09 10 2001 16 34 12 7 Output format Format Pt E N Ht Date This output format is identical to the Pt N E Ht Date format except the order of the Easting and Northing variables are reversed m Fields are always separated by a comma A comma is never placed before the Checksum field When information for a field is not available the position in the data string is empty S T O N E X Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 329 19 2 Description Access step by step CONFIGURE GeoCOM Mode STONEX GeoCOM Mode The GeoCOM Mode permits communication of the R9 with a RC9 controller Step Description 1 Refe
65. chapter Creating lines areas most efficiently OE IF the task is to THEN multiple lines areas with subsequent line area ID s use the user menu function FUNC Create New Line Quick FUNC Create New Area Quick Selecting the function from the user menu creates and immediately stores the new line area For the line area ID the line area ID template as defined in CONFIGURE ID Templates is used The code and attributes are taken over from the last created line area lines areas with certain codes use quick coding The job codelist must contain quick codes for lines areas By tying the quick code a new line area is created and immediately stored with that line area code and attributes For the line area ID the line area ID template as defined in CONFIGURE ID Templates is used STONEX Manage Data R9 109 7 4 3 Editing a Line Area Le Access Edit line step by step STONEX The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the editing of both lines and areas The step by step instructions for editing a new line can be applied for areas Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management to access MANAGE Data Job Name The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 MANAGE Data Job Name 2 PAGE F6 until the Lines page i
66. d screen The chosen settings become active Codelist test CONF F2 To configure SmartCodes auto points and Config Set 1 23 remote point measurements Accesses SURVEY Configuration Refer to 36 Survey Auto Reflector Circular prism 4 Points and to 37 Survey Remote Point for Add Constant 0 0nn information on the fields and keys SETUP F3 a To set up station Accesses SETUP Station covr cowF seTE Setup Survey General R9 682 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Job gt Choicelist The active job All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected lt Codelist gt Choicelist Output No codes are stored in the selected job All codelists from Main Menu Manage Codelists can be selected Codes have already been stored in the selected lt Job gt If codes had been copied from a System RAM codelist then the name of the codelist is displayed If codes have not been copied from a System RAM codelist but typed in then the name of the active job is displayed lt Config Set gt Choicelist The active configuration set All configuration sets from Main Menu Manage Configuration Sets can be selected lt Reflector gt Choicelist The active reflector All reflectors from Main Menu Manage Reflectors can be selected lt Add Constant gt Output The additive constant stored with t
67. eee ORO e ic EE 320 k npgs e 320 User defined ette torre des 320 j qt 547 Recall ASCII import settings sese 220 Default Aim window settings EEN 264 Attribute values Auto points ee Display mask Instrument ID e Deleted default Configuration set ENEE 195 Drac e 315 Last used attribute values seres 94 STONEX Previous result COGO NENNEN AER 492 REENEN 637 Record codes Inge 151 Quick coding eite tete Ee aaa 151 Thematical coding siisii 150 Recorded point check eene 34 Red laser visible eerte tnnt tnnennn nnn 430 Redlas t seem eiae d rie ce ee 294 REE CASS os unie enean ier Potes 84 Reference datum EEN 270 Reflector LI s natione atthe inet cer esito nicer euge ie RARE 203 Default xtc Sein chet ie ee edes 200 lee EE 49 EE GE 200 Search EE 422 fa ats 203 Refraction RTE Te EE Correction Relock Remote control Remote POM Ciacci deett rete tha inii Le hii ira cias huuc M OM R9 746 Configuration usse ptite tente tbt nare cR ee 721 Fr ee TE 151 Ee 722 Quick coding EEN 151 Request To Send seed 318 Thematical coding ENEE 150 ResectiOn EEN 626 Serial number eisereen Green ur 413 Residual Service tripod asusta Eeer 405 Distribution COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale
68. gt ACOS F5 To calculate arccosine of lt X gt ATAN F6 To calculate arctangent of lt X gt DMS F1 To convert decimal degrees into dd mm ss DEC F2 To convert dd mm ss into decimal degrees PI F3 To insert lt X 3 1415926536 gt The number of decimals depends on the selection for lt Display Dec gt in TOOLS Calculator Configuration D gt R F5 To convert degrees into radians R gt D F6 To convert radians into degrees Tools V Calculator R9 360 POLAR RECT SORT X 2 4 x Y X POLAR F1 Conversion of rectangular coordinates into polar coordinates The y coordinate must be visible in lt Y gt and the x coordinate in lt X gt when pressing this key The angle is displayed in Y and the distance in lt X gt RECT F2 Conversion of polar coordinates into rectan gular coordinates The angle must be visible in Y and the distance in X when pressing this key The y coordinate is displayed in lt Y gt the x coordinate in lt X gt SQRT F3 To calculate J Xi X 2 F4 To calculate X 2 1 X F5 To inverse lt X gt Y X F6 To calculate Y S T O N E X Tools Calculator R9 361 Vy to access the Sixth level LOG 10 X LN e X Ix 106 F1 To calculate the log 9 H 10 X F2 To calculate 10 LN F3 To calculate the log Hi e X F4 To calculate e lt Y X F6 To calculate Y 4 7 V to access the Seve
69. gt The device on which the new job will be stored Depending on the instrument options this may be an output field PAGE F6 changes to the Codelist page MANAGE New Job Codelist page lt Codelist gt Choosing a codelist copies the codes to the job PAGE F6 changes to the Avge page MANAGE New Job Avge page In order to check measurements the same point can be measured more than once If activated an average or an absolute difference is calcu lated Manage Jobs 7 3 4 R9 68 STONEX Step Description lt Averaging Mode gt Defines the averaging principles for multiple measured points lt Averaging Mode Average gt computes the average for the position and the height Points exceeding the defined limits are marked with in MANAGE Edit Point Mean page lt Averaging Mode Absolute Diffs gt computes the absolute differences between two points selected from a list of measured points which are all stored with the same point ID The selection determines the availability of the subse quent fields for setting the acceptable averaging limits or absolute differences For lt Averaging Mode Average gt lt Method gt The method used for computing the average lt Method Weighted gt calculates a weighted average while lt Method No Weighting gt is calculating an arithmetic average lt Points to Use gt The type of points which will be taken into account for avera
70. gt is displayed e if Calc Scale Manually gt Current Scale gt is displayed 16 4 Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Known BS Point STONEX Setup R9 617 SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Known BS Point SET F1 Set Stn amp Ori Setup BS Info Stn Info To set the station and orientation and exit the Known BS Point Backsight ID 10000 Setup application program Setup page Reflector Ht 1 941 m DIST F2 Cale Azimuth 45 00 00 To measure the distance to the backsight point i MORE F5 E a IANT s Available on the Setup page Toggles between AHoriz Dist een m r the displayed values As default the A values for AHeight B m azimuth horizontal distance and height are shown If MORE F5 is pressed the display 02 aft changes to the measured values of azimuth hori _SET DIST Emm MORE PAGE zontal distance and height PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description Backsight ID gt Choicelist Backsight point ID All 3D and 2D points from Fixpoint Job can be selected Reflector Ht gt User input The default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set is suggested Calc Azimuth gt Output Displays the calculated azimuth from the selected station to the backsight point Calc HDist gt Output Displays the calculated horizontal distance between the s
71. instrument errors Writes to or appends to an existing logfile if the logfile recording has been enabled Refer to 27 4 Configure Check amp Adjust REDO F2 To reject all results and to repeat the complete check and adjust procedure Refer to step 2 of 02a t paragraph Compensator index adjustment CONT REDO step by step Description of columns and fields Column Option Description New g Shows the new determined and averaged instrument errors The unit is displayed in Old g Shows the old instrument errors which are currently valid on the instrument The unit is displayed in S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 397 Next step IF the results are THEN to be stored CONT F1 overwrites the old instrument errors with the new ones to be determined REDO F2 rejects the new determined instrument errors and repeats again the whole procedure Refer to step 2 of paragraph Compensator index adjustment step by step S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 398 27 8 Access TOOLS Current Values Le STONEX Current Instrument Errors Step Description 1 Refer to 27 3 Accessing Check amp Adjust Menu to access TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu In TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu highlight Current Values CONT F1 to access TOOLS Current Values Current Valu
72. is to be viewed PAGE F6 until the Map page is active Refer to 30 5 Map Mode for information about the functionality and softkeys available on the Map page Manage Data R9 83 7 3 Point Management 7 3 4 Terminology Description e This chapter describes technical terms related to data management Coordinate triplet e Ameasured point consists of three coordinate components two horizontal components and one vertical component The generic term for the three coordinate components is coordinate triplet e Depending on the class a point ID can contain more than one coordinate triplet of the same and or of different classes Class The class describes the type of coordinate triplet Description of classes The following table shows the classes in descending hierarchical order Class Characteristic Description CTRL Type Control points Automatically assigned to entered points Instrument source TPS or Stonex Tools Number of triplets One REF Type Station point set by Setup application program Instrument source TPS or Stonex Tools Number of triplets One STONEX Manage Data R9 84 STONEX Class Characteristic Description AVGE Type Averaged point calculated when more than one coor dinate triplet of class MEAS exist for the same point ID unless lt Averaging Mode Off gt Instrument source TPS Number of triplets One MEAS Type e Measur
73. lt Import ASCII Data gt lt From File gt All files in the DATA directory on the CompactFlash card can be selected lt To Job gt Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the active job All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected lt Header gt This option allows up to ten header lines which may exist in an ASCII file to be skipped Select the number of header lines CONF F2 defines the format of the data to be imported IMPORT Define ASCII Import lt Delimiter gt The separator between the import variables lt Multi Spaces gt Available for lt Delimiter Space gt lt Multi Spaces No gt for space delimited data having one space between the variables lt Multi Spaces Yes gt for space delimited data having multi spaces between the variables Convert Import Data to Job R9 219 STONEX Step Description lt No Lines Pt gt Available for lt Delimiter Line Feed gt The number of lines used to describe each point Select the delimiter and the positions of the particular variables DEFLT F5 recalls the default ASCII import settings 4 CONT F1 leads back to IMPORT Import ASCII GSI Data to Job 5 CONT F1 imports the data Ce Points with a height gt 20000 m are not imported 6 Information message Are more data to be imported e Ifyes continue with step 7 e Ifno continue with step 8 YES F6 Repeat steps 1 to 6
74. next increment requires nega tive sign and will result in more than 16 characters For lt Increment Alphanumeric gt The rightmost character within the point ID is incremented regardless of whether that char acter is numeric or alphanumeric Point ID increment fail Template Increment value Next point ID s Notes Point994 5 Point999 Point99E Point99 994point 5 994poiny Lower case alpha characters Point ID increment fail increment until z is reached Then a new point ID must be entered Abcdef 5 Abcdea Lower case alpha characters AbcdeV decrement from lower to Se upper case until A is reached AbcdeB Then a new point ID must be entered Config Survey Settings R9 232 STONEX Template Increment value Next point ID s Notes ABCDEB 5 ABCDEB Upper case alpha characters ABCDEG increment from upper to lower ai case until z is reached Then a Abcdez new point ID must be entered Point ID increment fail Config Survey Settings R9 233 15 1 4 Editing an ID Template Description Refer to 15 1 2 Accessing ID Template Configuration to access CONFIGURE ID Templates In CONFIGURE ID Templates highlight any field ENTER to access CONFIGURE ID Template Library CONFIGURE ID Template Library Highlight the ID template to be edited The ID template Time amp Date cannot be edited EDIT F3 CONFIGURE Edi
75. repeat step 4 Ifno continue with step 6 Manage Codelists R9 145 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter STORE F1 adds the new code and any associated attributes to the System RAM codelist and returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed Anew code can also be created within an application program In this case the new code is added to the job codelist Manage Codelists R9 146 8 5 3 Editing a Code Access step by step STONEX Step Description 1 Refer to 8 5 1 Accessing MANAGE Codes to access MANAGE Codes 2 EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Code 3 All following steps are identical with the creation of a new code Refer to 8 5 2 Creating a New Code Follow the instructions in paragraph Create a new code step by step from step 3 onwards Attribute names that have already been typed in cannot be edited in a job codelist Manage Codelists R9 147 8 6 Access step by step MANAGE Code Groups STONEX Managing Code Groups Step Description 1 Refer to 8 5 1 Accessing MANAGE Codes to access MANAGE Codes 2 SHIFT GROUP F4 to access MANAGE Code Groups The listed code groups belong to the selected System RAM codelist when this screen was accessed through Main Menu Manage Codelists OR to the job codelist when MANAGE Codes was accessed from an
76. to access the Stakeout application program and stake out the calculated COGO point After staking and storing the COGO point COGO Brng Brng Results Result1 page is displayed 34 4 SHIFT INDIV F5 for an individual point ID independent of the ID template SHIFT RUN F5 changes back to the next ID from the config ured ID template PAGE F6 changes to the Code page where a code and attributes can be selected Pressing PAGE F6 twice changes to the Plot page Both COGO points and known points are displayed 30 6 SHIFT QUIT F6 does not store the COGO points and exits COGO calcu lations RSLT1 F3 or RSLT2 F3 to view the first and second result COGO R9 506 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter 4 COGO Brng Dist Results Result1 page s the first result to be stored e Ifyes STORE F1 to store the result and activate the Result page For Write Logfile Yes in COGO Configuration Logfile page the result is written to the logfile Ifno RSLT2 F3 to activate the Result2 page 5 COGO Brng Dist Results Result2 page Repeat step 3 6 COGO Brng Dist Results Result2 page Is the second result to be stored e Ifyes STORE F1 to store the result and return to COGO Intersec tion Input Input page For Write Logfile Yes in COGO Config uration Logfile page the result is written to the logfile e Ifno ESC does not store the COG
77. 02a f PAGE F6 SET PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Backsight ID gt Output Backsight ID as entered in SETUP Station Setup lt Code gt Choicelist The code for the backsight point lt Code Desc gt Output A short description of the code lt BS Easting gt Output The easting coordinate for the backsight point lt BS Northing gt Output The northing coordinate for the backsight point lt BS Height gt Output The height of the backsight point STO N EX Setup R9 620 Next step IF THEN the next page is to be accessed PAGE F6 changes to the Stn Info page the station and orientation is to be set SET F1 to set the station and orientation SETUP This screen has the same functionality as SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth Stn Info page Set Stn amp Ori Refer to 33 4 2 Set Azimuth for further information Refer to 8 5 3 Editing a Code for further Known BS Point information on coding Stn Info page Next step IF THEN the next page is to be accessed PAGE F6 changes to the Setup page the station and orientation is to be set SET F1 to set the station and orientation STONEX Setup R9 621 33 4 4 Orientation and Height Transfer Requirements The position coordinates of the station point are required The instrume
78. 1 Sorting and Filters for Points Lines and Areas to access MANAGE Sorts amp Filters In MANAGE Sorts amp Filters PAGE F6 until the Points page is active STAKE F5 to access MANAGE Stakeout Filter Stakeout Filter View All Points CONT F1 To close the screen andreturn to the screen from where this screen was accessed RESET F4 To reset the staked flag for all points ofthe mf CONT RESET currently active job Manage Data R9 128 Description of fields Field Option Description lt View gt All Shows all points Pts to Shows points not yet staked out Stakeout Staked Points Shows points which are already staked out S T O N E X Manage Data R9 129 Description Le Object Code group Code STONEX 8 1 Manage Codelists Terminology This chapter describes technical terms related to codes and codelists The values for code groups codes and attributes are case sensitive For example the code group Tree is not the same as the code group TREE For coding points lines and areas have the same behaviour In this chapter object is used as generic term for points lines and areas A code group allows codes belonging to the same theme to be grouped together Individual groups can be activated or deactivated The codes belonging to a deactivated code group cannot be selected from the choicelist for code se
79. 113 S T O N E X Table of Contents R9 5 7 5 Data Log 116 7 6 Point Sorting and Filters 118 7 6 1 Sorting and Filters for Points Lines and Areas 118 7 6 2 Point Line and Area Code Filter 126 7 6 3 Stakeout Filter 128 8 Manage Codelists 130 8 1 Terminology 130 8 2 Overview 137 8 3 Accessing Codelist Management 138 8 4 Creating Editing a Codelist 140 8 5 Managing Codes 141 8 5 1 Accessing MANAGE Codes 141 8 5 2 Creating a New Code 144 8 5 3 Editing a Code 147 8 6 Managing Code Groups 148 9 Coding 150 9 1 Overview 150 9 2 Thematical Coding 153 9 2 1 Thematical Coding with Codelist 153 9 2 2 Thematical Coding without Codelist 157 9 3 Free Coding 159 9 3 1 Free Coding Using a Codelist 159 9 3 2 Free Coding with Direct Input 163 9 4 Quick Coding 164 9 5 SmartCodes 168 9 5 1 Overview 168 9 5 2 Configuring SmartCodes 169 S T O N E X Table of Contents R9 6 STONEX 9 5 3 Code Block 173 9 5 4 Using SmartCodes 176 9 6 Code and Attribute Mismatch 178 9 6 1 Code Mismatch 178 9 6 2 Attribute Mismatch 180 10 Linework 182 10 1 Overview 182 10 2 Performing Linework 183 10 3 Combining Linework and Coding 188 11 Manage Configuration Sets 193 11 1 Overview 193 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management 194 11 3 Creating a New Configuration Set 196 11 4 Editing a Configuration Set 198 12 Manage Reflectors 200 12 1 Overview 200 12 2 Accessing Reflector Management 201
80. 4 COGO Calculation Inverse Method 32 4 1 Overview Description It is possible to compute an inverse result between point line and arc elements A Option 1 inverse between point point To compute an inverse between two known points p p N P2 Known elements P1 First known point From P2 Second known point To Unknown elements a Direction from P1 to P2 d1 Slope distance between P1 and P2 d2 Horizontal distance between P1 and P2 d3 Height difference between P1 and P2 Option 2 inverse between point line To compute an inverse between a known point and a given line the inverse is computed as the perpendicular between the known point and the given line Known elements PO Instrument station P1 Starting point P2 End point or the direction from P1 to P2 P3 Offset point Unknown elements P4 Base point di The perpendicular offset to the base point d2 The distance along the line STONEX COGO R9 480 PO P1 P2 P3 P4 P4 Option 3 inverse between point arc To compute an inverse between a known point and a given arc the inverse is computed as the perpendicular between the known point and the given arc Known elements Instrument station Starting point End point Offset point Second point or arc radius or arc chord length Unknown elements Base point di The perpendicular offset to the base point d2 The distance along the arc The coordinates of the points must
81. Annotation 1 4 Attrib free 01 20 Survey Auto Points Output field for the additive constant of the currently selected reflector Output field for the angle right Input field for comments to be stored with the point Output field for attributes for free codes R9 695 STONEX Field Option Attrib pt 01 03 Azimuth Code auto Code free Code Desc Code Desc free Code Type EDM Mode EDM Type Easting Height Height Diff Horiz Dist Hz Angle Line Space Full Survey Auto Points Description Input field for attributes for point codes Output field for the azimuth Choicelist or input field for auto point codes Output field for free codes Output field for the description of codes Output field for the description of free codes Output field for the description of point codes Output field displaying the current EDM mode Output field displaying the current EDM type Output field for the Easting coordinate of the measured point Output field for the height coordinate of the measured point Output field for the height difference between station and reflector Output field for the horizontal distance calculated from the measured slope distance and the vertical angle Output field for the horizontal angle Insert full line space R9 696 STONEX Field Option Line Space Half Longitudinal Tilt Msd Auto P
82. COGO The functionality ofthe Plot page is similar to COGO Traverse Results Plot page XX Point Results Plot page Next step STORE F1 stores the result and accesses COGO Line Calculations Input Input page STONEX COGO R9 525 32 7 2 Line Calculation Offset Point Description The COGO line calculation offset point calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of station and offset values in relation to a line Elements that must be known are e coordinates of two points e offsets OR coordinates of one point e bearing and distance from one point e offsets The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered Ke Line management is not available for COGO line calculations STONEX COGO R9 526 COGO line calculation offset point step by step STONEX The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Line Calculations Input Ce COGO Line Calculations Input Input page SHIFT CONF F2 to configure the COGO application program 32 3 2 COGO Line Calculations Input Input page 32 7 1 Task Calc Offset Point CALC F1 calculates the results 4 COGO Offset Point Results Result page 32 7 1 STORE F1 stores the
83. COGO intersection calcu The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more lation with distance information on screens distance step by step Step Description Refer to chapter 1 The procedure for a COGO intersection calculation with distance distance is very similar to a COGO intersection calculation with bearing bearing Follow the steps 1 to 5 in paragraph COGO intersection calculation 32 6 1 with bearing bearing step by step The differences are e Method Dist Dist isto be selected in COGO Intersection Input Input page e For both known points lt HDist XX gt is used instead of lt Azimuth gt The keys mentioned are still valid e lt Offset gt is unavailable 2 The remaining procedure is identical to a COGO intersection calculation with bearing distance The screen is called COGO Dist Dist Results Follow the steps 2 to 8 in paragraph COGO intersection calculation 32 6 2 with bearing distance step by step STONEX COGO R9 510 32 6 4 Description Diagram STONEX Intersection with By Points The COGO intersection calculation by points calculates the intersection point of two lines A line is defined by two points Elements that must be known are e the coordinates of four points e offsets of the lines if required and configured The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job
84. Code SSE OK F4 To accept the PIN code and to continue with the subsequent screen Q2a SHIFT QUIT F6 sl pose pem oed E To turn off the instrument Instrument Protection with PIN R9 16 Description of fields Field Option Description PIN Code User input The PIN code as previously defined in CONFIGURE Start Up amp Power Down PIN Code page The correct PIN code must be typed in within five attempts or the PUK code is required Next step IF the PIN code THEN entered is correct R9 Main Menu is displayed Refer to 5 Main Menu wrong refer to paragraph R9 Enter Security PIN Code Error 479 wrong the fifth time the PUK code is required Refer to paragraph R9 Enter Security PIN Code Error 478 S T O N E X Instrument Protection with PIN R9 17 R9 Enter Security PIN Code Error 479 Enter Security PIN Code You have 4 attempts left OK F4 a To return to R9 Enter Security PIN Code where a PIN code can be typed in again Next step IF the PIN code THEN entered is correct R9 Main Menu is displayed Refer to 5 Main Menu wrong the fifth time the PUK code is required Refer to paragraph R9 Enter Security PIN Code Error 478 S T O N E X Instrument Protection with PIN R9 18 R9 Enter Security PIN Code Error 478 R9 Enter Security PUK Code STONEX Enter Security PIN Code Wrong PIN Code was
85. Day Month Year How the date is shown in all date related fields Month Day Year or Year Month Day Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Format page Refer to paragraph CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Format page Units amp Formats X Units Angle Time Format Grid Format Geodetic Format Lat Long CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed 02a f PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen Config General Settings R9 287 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Grid Format gt East North or The order in which grid coordinates are shown in all North East screens The order in display masks depends on the user settings lt Geodetic Format gt Lat Long or The order in which geodetic coordinates are shown in Long Lat all screens The order in display masks depends on the user Settings Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 288 17 2 Wizard Mode Description The settings on this screen define the behaviour of the configuration set wizard Access Select Main Menu Config General Settings Wizard Mode OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Manage ment CONFIGURE izard Mode Wizard Mode Wizard Mode WTA ED An CONT F1 To accept changes an
86. Description Refer to chapter Ce Before determining the tilting axis error the instrument has to be e levelled up using the electronic level e protected from direct sunlight e acclimatised to the ambient temperature approximately two minutes per C difference compared to the storage place e The Hz collimation error has to be determined before 27 1 27 5 1 TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu Select the option Tilting Axis a S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 390 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter TOOLS Tilting Axis Adjustment I Aim the telescope accurately at a target at a distance of about 100 m For distances less than 100 m make sure to precisely point to the target The target must be positioned within at least 27 30 gon above or beneath the horizontal plane KE The procedure can be started in any telescope face KE The fine pointing has to be performed manually in both faces Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 391 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter MEAS F1 to measure and to continue to the next screen _ Motorised instruments change automatically to the other face TOOLS Tilting Axis Adjustment II MEAS F1 to measure the same target in the other face and to calculate the tilting axis error If the error is bigger than the predefined limit the procedure has to be repeated Th
87. F1 To start the highlighted application program Next step Select an option in the menu to open the application Refer to the chapter on the individual application programs Four application programs can be open at one time XX Begin is shown for the application program opened first but not for the following application programs Application Programs General R9 464 32 32 1 Description L COGO calculation methods STONEX COGO Overview COGO is an application program to perform coordinate geometry calculations such as coordinates of points e bearings between points e distances between points The calculations can be made from e existing point data in the job known distances or known azimuths e measured points e entered coordinates In contrast to remote point measurements within the Survey application program COGO is more of a calculation program than a measuring program Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in COGO does not result in the point being recomputed The COGO calculation methods are e Inverse e Arc calculations e Traverse e Shift Rotate amp Scale Manual e Intersections e Shift Rotate amp Scale Match Pts e Line calculations Area Division COGO R9 465 Distances and azimuths Type of distances Grid Type of azimuths The azimuths are grid azimuths relative to the local grid Coding of COGO points e Themat
88. F5 Available on the Setup page and if lt iLock Off gt HOLD F5 freezes the current lt Azimuth gt value making it possible to set the lt Azimuth gt value first turn the instrument to the desired direction and release the lt Azimuth gt value using FREE F5 PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT INDIV F5 and SHIFT RUN F5 Available on the Setup page To change between entering an individual backsight point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template Refer to 15 1 ID Templates for more informa tion on point ID templates STO N EX Setup R9 611 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Backsight ID gt User input Point ID of the backsight point according to the point ID template lt Reflector Ht gt User input The default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set is suggested lt Azimuth gt User input The current system azimuth value If a different azimuth is typed in and ENTER is pressed or if Az 0 F4 is pressed this azimuth value is displayed in the field and updated with the telescope movement The value is not set to the system until SET F1 is pressed lt Horiz Dist gt Output Press F2 to measure a distance to the target point being used to set the azimuth Next step IF THEN the next page is to be accessed PAGE F6 changes to the BS Info page the station
89. Functions R9 427 29 4 SureBeam Description The SureBeam navigation light consists of two differently coloured flashing lights in the tele scope housing of the R9 The SureBeam is used for guidance into the line of sight If the left light is seen the prism should be moved right and vice versa If both flashing lights can be seen the prism is in the line of sight of the instrument Functionality CN The SureBeam can be used ui e to help guiding the reflector into the tele A scope line of sight when the instrument is l remotely controlled and Automation iLock gt e to stake out points The instrument emits two differently colored flashing cones of light At a target distance of 100 m the cones have a width of 6 m Between the two cones of light a sector with a width of 30 mm is created where both guide lights are visible simultaneously In this position the prism is in the line of sight of the instrument 100 m 300 ft Q oe e 6m 6m 20 ft 20 ft S T O N E X Functions R9 428 Using the SureBeam The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more step by step information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Set lt Automation Robotic gt and press COMPS F1 or Hz V F2 or 3 2 JSTCK F3 on the QUICK SET Change Settings to screen OR Set lt SureBeam On gt on the CONFIGURE Lights Display Beeps 17
90. Import Data to Job R9 222 14 5 Importing Data in DXF Format Requirements Access Import data step by step STONEX At least one file in DXF format with the file extension dxf has to be stored in the DATA direc tory of the CompactFlash card Refer to 14 2 Accessing the Data Import Functionality to access IMPORT Import DXF Data to Job Step Description 1 IMPORT Import DXF Data to Job lt From File gt All files with extension dxf in the DATA directory on the Compact Flash card can be selected lt To Job gt Choosing a job as destination for import makes this job the active job All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected CONF F2 accesses IMPORT Configuration lt Block Prefix gt Optional prefix to imported blocks lt Point Prefix gt Optional prefix to imported points lt Line Prefix gt Optional prefix to imported lines lt File Units gt Choosing the unit for the DXF data to be imported lt Create Vertex Points gt Option if points will be created at vertices of the imported line arc polyline elements lt Convrt White Elements gt Option if white colored elements will be converted to black colored elements Convert Import Data to Job R9 223 Step Description lt Exclude Height gt Height value inside the DXF file are considered invalid and will not be converted CONT F1 leads back to IMPORT Import DXF Data to Job
91. Job Name Requirement Atleastone format file was created using Stonex Tools and has been transferred to the System RAM Access Refer to 13 2 Accessing the Data Export Functionality to access EXPORT Export ASCII from Job Export data step by step The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 EXPORT Export ASCII from Job 6 Export To CF Card Directory Available for Export To CF Card The data can be exported to the Data the GSI or the root directory lt Job gt All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected Format File The format files currently available in the System RAM S T O N E X Convert Export Data from Job R9 207 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter lt File Name gt The name of the file to which the data should be exported The name is automatically suggested based on the job name to be exported and an extension The default extension to be used can be configured in the EXPORT Define ASCII Export panel using CONF F2 Select the job to be exported and enter an individual file name or accept the suggested name Highlight lt Format File gt and ENTER EXPORT Format Files All format files available in the System RAM are listed Select the format file to be used Ce DEL F4 deletes the highlig
92. Job Name Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Manage ment lt Area ID gt Choicelist Available for lt Filter Individual Area gt Opening the choicelist opens MANAGE Data Job Name Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Manage ment STONEX Manage Data R9 122 Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Lines page Refer to paragraph MANAGE Sorts amp Filters Lines page MANAGE Sorts amp Filters Sorts amp Filters Points Lines Areas Lines page Sort Ascend Line ID CONT F1 To close the screen andreturn to the screen from Filter where this screen was accessed The selected sort and filter settings are applied and the lists in MANAGE DATA Job Name are updated CODES F4 Available for Filter Code Code Group To select the line codes to be used 02a PAGE F6 CONT CODES PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Sort gt Ascend Line ID Always available The method the lines are Descend Line ID sorted by Fwrd Start Time Bwrd Start Time Fwrd End Time or Bwrd End Time lt Filter gt Always available The method by which the lines are filtered No Filter Shows all lines S T O N E X Manage Data R9 123 MANAGE Sorts amp Filters Areas page STONEX Field Option Description Code Code Group Shows lines with selected codes attached Refer to 7 6 2 Point Line and Area Code Filter since t
93. Menu Programs COGO In COGO COGO Begin press CONF F2 to access COGO Configuration OR Press ON Highlight COGO CONT F1 In COGO COGO Begin press CONF F2 to access COGO Configuration OR Press SHIFT CONF F2 in COGO COGO Menu Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO OR Press SHIFT CONF F2 in COGO XX This screen consists of the Parameters page Residuals page and the Logfile page The expla nations for the softkeys given below are valid for all pages i Residuals Logfile Parameters Distance Type Gr id ar CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen Two Faces Use Offsets Store Pts As EECH Est Pos Qity 0 300 n SHIFT ABOUT F5 Est Ht Qity 0 300 nv To display information aboutthe program name 02a t the version number the date of the version the CONT PAGE copyright and the article number COGO R9 474 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Distance Type gt Grid The type of distances and offsets to be accepted as input shown as output and used in the calculation Distances are calculated as the trigonometric distance between the position of two points The distance field is lt HDist Grid gt lt Two Faces gt No Defines if the instrument measures the second face automatically after storing the first After stor
94. Move by Joystick In QUICK SET Move by Joystick the instrument can be turned using the arrow keys on the keyboard of the instrument or the arrow keys displayed on the touch screen When QUICK SET Move by Joystick is accessed the SureBeam is turned on automatically When leaving the screen the SureBeam is turned off Press JSTCK F3 on the QUICK SET Change Settings to screen Refer to 3 2 QUICK SET Change Settings to Hove by Joystick X Use cursor keys BN 0 OP Speed J 02a f CONT F1 CONT To exit QUICK SET Move by Joystick Fee Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 32 Move by joystick step by step STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description Speed Output Displays the rotating speed of the instrument Press the same arrow key to change the speed from to slow to medium to fast Next step CONT F1 to exit the QUICK SET Move by Joystick screen Step Description 1 QUICK SET Change Settings to 2 JSTCK F3 to access QUICK SET Move by Joystick 3 QUICK SET Move by Joystick Use the arrow keys to start the telescope movement Press an arrow key again to speed up the movement Press any of the other arrow keys while the instrument turns to stop the movement The behaviour of the touch screen when working with a controller is similar Addi tional to the arrow keys a stop key is displayed as a round key in the middle o
95. N E X Coding R9 152 L Requirements Access 9 2 9 2 1 STONEX Thematical Coding Thematical Coding with Codelist Thematical coding of points with a codelist is explained in this chapter Refer to 7 4 Line Area Management for information on coding lines areas e The job codelist contains thematical codes e Thematc Codes With Codelist gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Adisplay mask with an input field for point codes must be configured Open the choicelist for Code in a display mask of an application program OR Open the choicelist for lt Code gt lt Point Code gt in MANAGE New Point Code page in data management OR Open the choicelist for Point Code in MANAGE Edit Point Point ID Code page in data management OR Open the choicelist for Auto Pt Code in SURVEY Survey Job Name Auto page if config ured Coding R9 153 MANAGE Select Code x Code Description top of bank toe of bank gum tree road centre line 02a t CONT NEM mont CONT F1 To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed NEW F2 To create a new code Refer to 8 5 2 Creating a New Code ATRIB F3 Available unless accessed from MANAGE New Point Line Area or MANAGE Edit Point Line Area To type inattribute values for the selected code and or add new attributes for the selected code LAST F4 Available if a code has been previously used in the
96. Point A gt and lt Point B gt Swing Line The border will be a line rotated around lt Rotation Pnt gt by lt Azimuth gt lt Sub Area XX gt User input For lt Divide By Percentage gt and lt Divide By Area gt COGO The size of the sub area must be typed either in orin 2 m R9 577 STONEX Field Option Description Output When dividing the area using a parallel or perpendic ular line a reference line is defined by lt Point A gt and lt Point B gt The direction of the new dividing line is always the same as the direction of the reference line The sub area is always to the left of the new dividing line When dividing a line using a swing line the direction of the new dividing line is defined by the lt Rotation Pnt gt and the lt Azimuth gt The sub area is always to the left of the new dividing line For lt Divide By Defined Line gt The size of the sub area is calculated in the background and displayed lt Point A gt Choicelist The first point of the line which is used as the reference for a new parallel or perpendicular border All points from COGO Data Job Name can be selected lt Point B gt Choicelist The second point of the line which is used as the refer ence for a new parallel or perpendicular border All points from COGO Data Job Name can be selected lt Shift gt By Distance Through Point Available for
97. Points n STONEX Number of ShiftEast Shift North Shift Height Rotation Scale pairs of points matched 21 x x x X x Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Match Common Points n This screen provides a list of points chosen from the active job The points are used for the deter mination of the 2D Helmert transformation The number of points matched is indicated in the title for example COGO Match Common Points 3 Unless there is no pair of matching points in the list all softkeys are available Refer to paragraph Match points step by step for informa tion on how to match points Target Pt To confirm the selections compute the transfor mation and continue with the subsequent screen NEW F2 To match a new pair of points This pair is added to the list A new point can be manually occu pied Refer to paragraph Match points step by step Q2a EDIT F3 CALC NEW EDIT DEL HATCH RESID To edit the highlighted pair of matched points DEL F4 To delete the highlighted pair of matched points from the list 200 COGO R9 559 MATCH F5 To change the type of match for a highlighted pair of matched points Refer to Description of columns RESID F6 To display a list of the matched points used in the transformation calculation and their associ ated residuals Refer to paragraph Fix parame ters SHIFT PARAM F5 To define the param
98. Press Unit gt mbar mmHg The units shown for all pressure related fields Inch Hg psi pounds per square inch inHg hPa or psi Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Angle page Refer to paragraph CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Angle page Config General Settings R9 283 CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Units amp Formats Units Angle Time Format Angle page Direc Ref North Azimuthfg Zenith Angle dr V Display V Angle Hold after DIST CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed 02a PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Direc Ref gt North Sets the reference direction as well as the direction Azimuth from where and how azimuths are computed South For lt Direc Ref Bearing gt the azimuth bearing fields Azimuth in other screens are called lt Bearing gt NE SW SE and North Anti NW indicate the quadrant of the bearing clock or Bearing S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 284 STONEX Field Option Description For all other options the azimuth bearing fields in other screens are called lt Azimuth gt lt V Display gt Zenith Angle V 0 in zenith Elev Angle V 0 horizontal elevation angle V angles are positive above the horizon and negative below it Elev Angle
99. Pt COGO Arc Calculation Centre Point Arc Offset Pt COGO Arc Calculation Offset Point Arc Segmt Pt COGO Arc Calculation Segmentation COGO Area Divsn COGO Area Division COGO Shift Rtn COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Manual COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Match Pts COGO Traverse COGO Traverse GSI File Convert Data Import ASCII GSI Data to Job Intsct Brg Brg COGO Intersection Bearing Bearing Intsct Brg Dst COGO Intersection Bearing Distance Intsct Dst Dst COGO Intersection Distance Distance Intsct 4 Pts COGO Intersection By points Line Base Pt COGO Line Calculation Base Point Line Offset Pt COGO Line Calculation Offset Point Line Segmt Pt COGO Line Calculation Segmentation None No information on the source is available STONEX Manage Data R9 87 Instrument source STONEX Source Originated from application program functionality Setup Known BS Setup Known Backsight Point Setup Loc Rsct Setup Local Resection Setup Ori amp Ht Setup Orientation and Height Transfer Setup Resect Setup Resection Setup Resect H Setup Resection Helmert Setup Set Az Setup Set Azimuth Srvy Auto Offset Survey Auto Points automatically recorded with offsets Stakeout Stakeout Survey Survey measu
100. R9 426 L Prediction Prism search after prediction Relock STONEX The iLock sensor is still active Whenever the prism is moved in the field of view of the telescope the instrument locks automat ically to the prism a Moving reflector locked onto by the instrument ANNA RR A b Loss oflock C Prediction As long as the prism is being tracked by the instrument a mathematical filter continuously calcu lates the average speed and direction of the prism If the line of sight between instrument and prism is disturbed the instrument keeps on moving using these calculated values This behav iour is called prediction The prediction time can be configured During prediction the Robotic icon is displayed If the prism comes into the field of view of the iLock it automatically locks on again After prediction the prism is searched for depending on the settings in the CONFIGURE Auto matic Prism Search screen e Search with No Search If prism moved in field of view prism is not searched for until ALL F1 DIST F2 R GO F5 CONT F1 SCT F6 or SHIFT SCT lt F5 is pressed e Search with iLock gt prism is searched for in the dynamic Aim window with iLock e Search with Last Point The instrument turns back to the last stored point Independent of Search with gt the instrument can relock onto the prism Refer to paragraph Enable Robotic for information on how to enable lock
101. Remote Control The following radio for remote control supports channel changing e RH9 e RH9 GLRBT Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Access CONFIGURE Interfaces 18 2 2 2 In CONFIGURE Interfaces highlight GeoCOM Mode when port 2 is set active CTRL F4 to access CONFIGURE Radio Handle CONFIGURE Radio Handle Radio Type The type of protocol Link Number gt The assigned channel number from 0 to 20 Ce The link number for the RC9 controller and the radio must be the same lt Set as gt The option Remote or Base are available Remote sets the radio into remote mode Config Interfaces Controlling The Device R9 334 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Base sets the radio into base mode Ce The radio modules inside the RC9 controller and the radio must be set to opposite settings It is recommended to set the RC9 controller to Remote and the RH9 to Base DEFLT F5 To recall the default settings Config Interfaces Controlling The Device R9 335 20 2 RS232 Description RS232 is a standard serial communication method that is able to transfer data without the need for predefined time slots RS232 can be used with a Bluetooth housing to provide a wireless connection to another Bluetooth enabled device for example a computer
102. SURVY F5 when From is highlighted To measure a known point 35 2 for the COGO calculation Ce For all point fields the MapView interactive display on the Map page 30 5 can be used to select the desired point Ce Totypein coordinates for a known point open the choicelist when 7 3 2 lt From gt is highlighted Press NEW F2 to create a new point COGO Traverse Input Input page Azimuth The direction from the known point to the COGO point HDist XX The horizontal distance between the known point and the COGO point COGO R9 491 STONEX Step Description lt Offset gt Available for lt Use Offsets Yes gt in COGO Configuration Parameters page The offset of the COGO point from the line of direc tion A positive offset is to the right a negative offset is to the left Type in the azimuth the distance and the offset if required Refer to chapter The values for the azimuth the distance and the offset can be calculated from two existing points INV F2 when lt Azimuth gt lt HDist XX gt or lt Offset gt is highlighted To perform a COGO inverse calculation Ce Upon pressing STORE F1 in COGO Inverse the result from the COGO inverse calculation is copied to the field which was high lighted when INV F2 was pressed Ce For Write Logfile Yes in COGO Configuration Logfile page the result ofthe COGO inverse calculation is written to the logfile
103. Settings Search Windows OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management CONFIGURE Search Windows CONT F1 iLock Window page To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu DEFLT F5 To recall the default iLock window settings PAGE F6 To change to other page on screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Hz Search gt User input Horizontal extent of window S T O N E X Config Instrument Settings R9 264 Field Option Description This field is disabled when lt Target View On gt or lt Target View Always On gt lt Target view active gt is displayed at the bottom on this page when the field is disabled V Search gt User input Vertical extent of window This field is disabled when lt Target View On gt or lt Target View Always On gt lt Target view active gt is displayed at the bottom on this page when the field is disabled Next step CONT F1 returns to R9 Main Menu S T O N E X Config Mnstrument Settings R9 265 16 3 Description Access CONFIGURE Automatic Prism Search STONEX Automatic Prism Search e The settings on this screen define the behaviour of automatic prism search after the target is lost in lock mode e Refer to 29 Functions for information on iLock lock and automa
104. System language User defined menu eene tette tete tnnn STONEX User ere EE 42 User menu configuration ENEE 291 USER description 4 e tcigeciektent tnc laca oett 21 V V Angle Quick set EEN Versions of system firmware Vertical index error i s View File M H 366 Points lines areas free code stored in job 80 View current adjustment errors e 399 Volume display format ENEE 283 WwW Wild Card ME 121 VE aede aaa Ea 193 289 Wizard mode s ssssssnsesserernerennesnnerersnsnnrrerensnnrrerensnnnnnrrersnnnnrrernnssnnrere 289 Z Ke 441 Nou 441 WiINGOW 445 R9 750 STONEX Stonex R9 Original text 2012 Stonex Monza Italy STONEX Stonex www stonexeurope com
105. To determine the compensator l t errors 27 7 Current Values To view the current instrument errors 27 8 S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 379 STONEX Function Description Refer to chapter End Check amp Adjust To exit the TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu Next step IF the task is to THEN determine the instru ment errors select one of the three available check and adjust procedures Combined I t i c iLock Tilting Axis a or Compensator I t adjust the circular level Refer to 27 9 Adjusting the Circular Level of the Instrument and Tribrach inspect the laser Refer to 27 11 Inspecting the Laser Plummet of the Instrument plummet adjust the tripod Refer to 27 12 Servicing the Tripod to end check and adjust select End Check amp Adjust Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 380 27 4 Configure Check amp Adjust Access step by step Step Description 1 Refer to 27 3 Accessing Check amp Adjust Menu to access TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu 2 CONF F2 to access TOOLS Configuration TOOLS Configuration Configuration Parameters Logfile Parameters page Adjust Reminder MEMME CONT F1 To accept the settings and to return to the screen TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu 02a a PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen STONEX Tools Check amp Adj
106. Toolbar Description Touch icons in the toolbar STONEX Touch icons are available in a toolbar if lt Toolbar On gt in XX MapView Configuration Display page The toolbar is always located on the left hand side of the screen Some of the func tions performed by the touch icons can also be replicated using a softkey in the same mode as when the touch icon appears The softkey equivalent to each touch icon if one exists are indi cated below Touch icon Softkey Description SHIFT FIT F3 Available as a touch icon in map mode The fit touch icon fits all displayable data according to filters and the map configuration into the screen area using the largest possible scale Cu The windowing touch icon zooms to a specified area amp y window An area window can be drawn by tapping on thetop left and the bottom right corner ofthe area This causes the screen to zoom to the selected area x Available in survey mode This touch icon displays the T current direction as dashed line A location on the Map page can then be tapped and the instrument turns to this direction MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 445 30 4 4 Point Symbols Points When lt Show Points Yes gt in XX MapView Configuration points are displayed in all modes according to their class Symbol Description A 3D control point is a point of class CTRL with horizon
107. V 0 horizontal V angles are expressed in 96 and are positive above the horizon and negative below it lt V Angle gt Hold after The vertical angle is fixed after a distance measure DIST ment with DIST F2 whereas the horizontal angle is continuously updated with the telescope movement Config General Settings R9 285 CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Time page STONEX Field Option Description Running The vertical angle is continuously updated with the telescope movement Ce The active reflector height is applied in the calculation of remote point elevations The reflector height must be set to zero to display and record the elevation of the targeted remote point Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Time page Refer to paragraph CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Time page Units amp Formats Units Angle Time Format Time Format ENEETETT hour du Time 17 29 03 Date Format Day Honth Year p Date 18 11 05 CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed 02a f PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen Config General Settings R9 286 CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Format page STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Time Format gt 24 hour or How the time is shown in all time related fields 12 hour am pm lt Date Format gt
108. With Codelist gt To recall the default attribute values for the selected code PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen Survey Auto Points R9 709 STONEX Description of fields Field lt Point Code gt lt Code gt Option Choicelist User input Description The thematical code for the offset point Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt The setting for lt Show Codes gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework determines if either all codes or only point codes are available The attributes are shown as output input or choicelist fields depending on their definition The thematical code for the offset point Available for lt Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt Codes can be typed in but not selected from a codelist A check is performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in the job If so the according attributes are shown lt Code Desc gt Output Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt The description of the code lt Attribute n gt User input Available for lt Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt Up to three attribute values can be stored Next step IF THEN offset point configu ration is finished CONT F1 to return to SURVEY Survey Job Name Survey Auto Points R9 710 IF THEN a second offset point PAGE F6 and then OFST2 F2 or OFST1 F2 to change to SURVEY is
109. a CONFIGURE XX screen Refer to 17 3 User Menu for the configuration of the user defined menu Selecting an option in the menu carries out the function or starts the application program assigned to the option Press USER to access R9 User Menu Job Name This is an example of what a user defined menu can look like The softkeys and their order is fixed The functions and application programs which are assigned to the individual places in the user defined menu can differ depending on the configuration User Henu SURVEY X 1 Display Beeps Text 2 Level amp Laser Plummet 3 Job Management 4 TPS Corrections 5 Check amp Adjust 6 Export Data from Job CONT F1 7 Interfaces To execute the selected function 8 Units amp Formats CONF F2 9 Battery amp Memory Status To configure the user menu 01A t STAT F3 CONT CONF STAT To access the Status Menu USER Key R9 21 Define user menu step by step STONEX This step by step description shows how to assign the CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework screen to the first line of R9 User Menu Job Name Step Description 1 Select Main Menu Config General Settings User Menu 2 CONFIGURE User Menu Select User Menu lt 1 CONF Coding amp Linework Settings gt CONT F1 Press USER and 1 to access CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework USER Key R9 22 3 Quick Settings SHIFT USER 3 1 Overview
110. a New Job is to be edited highlight the job and EDIT F3 Refer to 6 4 Editing a Job S T O N E X Manage Jobs R9 66 6 3 Access Create job step by step STONEX Creating a New Job Refer to 6 2 Accessing Job Management to access MANAGE Jobs Device The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 In MANAGE Jobs Device highlight a job The settings of this job 6 2 including sort and filter settings are applied to the new job 2 NEW F2 to access MANAGE New Job New Job General Dedelist Avge 11 Name new job Description WEEN Creator M ee STORE F1 Device CF Card dl D To store the settings and to return to the screen from where MANAGE New Job was accessed M af PAGE F6 STORE PAGE To change to another page on this screen Manage Jobs R9 67 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter MANAGE New Job General page lt Name gt A unique name for the new job The name may be up to 16 characters long and may include spaces Input required lt Description gt Two lines for a detailed description of the job This can be for example work to be performed or the classes contained in the job Input optional lt Creator gt The person s name who is creating the new job Input optional lt Device
111. active Short Range mode is active Robotic active PAHAR S T O N E X User Interface R9 48 Reflector STONEX Icon Description Robotic active Prism being followed Robotic active Prism lost Instrument locks onto reflector if in field of view iLock Searching SOS SC Prediction n H A Tapping the icon leads to MANAGE Reflectors Icon Description H 360 Prism d Reflectorless User User defined prism EH User Interface R9 49 EDM STONEX Tapping the icon leads to CONFIGURE EDM amp iLock Settings Icon Description IR EDM type Reflector IR possible modes are STD Standard FAST Fast TRK STD Tracking AVG Averaging SYNC SynchroTrack RL Red laser is turned on STD RL EDM type Reflectorless RL possible modes are STD Standard TRK Tracking STD AVG Averaging LO EDM type Long Range LO possible modes are STD Standard AVG Averaging STD IRs Auto points are being recorded by time TRK IR Auto points are being recorded by distance or height TRK IR Auto points are being recorded by stop amp go TRK User Interface R9 50 Compensator face I amp II Bluetooth Line area STONEX Tapping the icon leads to CONFIGURE Compensator Icon Description x Compensator is turned off S Compensator is turned on b
112. additional attributes to be created for this point code Ce NAME F3 or VALUE F3 Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in To highlight Attribute n or the field for the attribute value The name of Attribute n can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in Manage Data R9 93 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter LAST F4 recalls the last used attribute values which were stored with this point code DEFLT F5 recalls the default attribute values for the selected code STORE F1 stores the new point entered and all associated informa tion and returns to MANAGE Data Job Name Points page The properties stored with the point are Class CTRL Sub class Fixed Pos amp Ht Source User Entered Instrument source TPS It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job If the codes and or attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match a screen opens where they can be corrected Manage Data R9 94 7 3 3 Access Edit point step by step STONEX Editing a Point Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management to access MANAGE Data Job Name The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter In MANAGE Data Job Name Points page highlight a point to be edited
113. and or scaling Shift Rotate amp Scale Points Shift Rotate Scale CALC F1 To perform the shift rotation and scale calcula tion and to continue with the subsequent screen Calculated COGO points are not yet stored ADD F2 To add several points from the active job to the list Accesses COGO Data Job Name Selected sort and filter settings apply CONT F1 adds all 02a displayed points to the listin COGO Shift Rotate CALC ADD ADD 1 REHOV HORE PAGE amp Scale and returns to that screen COGO R9 546 ADD 1 F3 To add one point from the active job to the list Accesses COGO Data Job Name Selected sort and filter settings apply CONT F1 adds the currently highlighted point to the list in COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale and returns to that screen REMOV F4 To remove the highlighted point from the list The point itself is not deleted MORE F5 To display information about the codes if stored with any point the time and the date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality and the class PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT REM A F4 To remove all points from the list The points itself are not deleted SHIFT RANGE F5 To define a range of points from the active job to be added to the list Refer to paragraph COGO Select Points by Range STONEX COGO R9 547 COGO Select Points by Range STONEX Next step Data Job Name
114. and orientation is to be set SET F1 to set the station and orientation STONEX Setup R9 612 SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth BS Info page STONEX Backsight ID Code Code Desc Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth Setup BS Info Stn Info 101 x dp backs ight SET F1 To set the station and orientation and exit the Setup application program 02a f PAGE F6 SET PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Backsight ID gt Output Backsight ID as entered in SETUP Station Setup lt Code gt Choicelist The code for the backsight point lt Code Desc gt Output A short description of the code Next step IF THEN the next page is to be accessed PAGE F6 changes to the Stn Info page the station and orientation is to be set SET F1 to set the station and orientation Setup R9 613 SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth Set Stn amp Ori Setup BS Info Stn Info Set Azimuth Station ID 100 Stn Info page Instrument Ht 1 587 m Code d o e Code Desc station Stn Easting 100 000 m Stn Northing 100 000 m SET F1 Stn Height 100 000 n To set the station and orientation and exit the Current Scale 1 000000000000 Setup application program 02a PAGE F6 SET PAGE To change to another page on this screen
115. and returns to the screen from where MANAGE Reflectors was accessed is to be created highlight any reflector and NEW F2 creates a new reflector Refer to 12 3 Creating a New Reflector is to be edited highlight the desired reflector EDIT F3 Refer to 12 4 Editing a Reflector S T O N E X Manage Reflectors R9 202 12 3 Creating a New Reflector Access Refer to 12 2 Accessing Reflector Management to access MANAGE Reflectors Create new reflector Step Description step by step 1 In MANAGE Reflectors press 2 NEW F2 The lt Type gt of the new reflector is taken from the previously highlighted reflector except for RL reflectors 3 MANAGE New Reflector lt Name gt A significant name for the new reflector lt Type gt The type of reflector to be defined can be lt Type Prism gt lt Type Tape gt or lt Type Undefined gt lt Add Constant gt The additive constant is always in mm Ce An additive constant of 0 0 mm has been defined for circular standard prisms All entered or selected additive constant values are differences to this 0 0 mm prism system Ce The additive constants of prisms are often given in the true zero prism system Usethe following formula to convert the additive constantto the prism system This Stonex constant needs to be entered into the Stonex instrument Formula True zero constant 34 4 mm Stonex constant It is highly r
116. application program MANAGE New Job or MANAGE Edit Job CONT F1 ode Group Activated To close the screen and return to the screen from Default YES where this screen was accessed road YES NEW F2 To create a new code group EDIT F3 Available for System RAM codelists To edit the highlighted code group DEL F4 Available for System RAM codelists To delete 02a the highlighted code group CONT NEW EDIT DEL USE NONE sr rs To activate and deactivate the highlighted code group Codes belonging to a deactivated code group are not displayed in MANAGE Codes vegetation Manage Codelists R9 148 STONEX NONE F6 or ALL F6 To deactivate or activate all code groups Description of columns Column Description Code Group The name of the code group Activated Use code group or not The options are Yes and No The codes belonging to a deactivated code group cannot be selected from the choicelist for code selec tion USE F5 changes between the options Next step IF a code group THEN is to be created NEW F2 In MANAGE New Code Group type in a unique name for lt Group gt STORE F1 stores the new code group typed in and returns to MANAGE Code Groups is to be edited highlight the code group and EDIT F3 In MANAGE Edit Code Group type in the changes for Group STORE F1 stores the changes and returns to MANAGE Code Groups
117. both entries is used as the basis for the range The standard ASCII numer ical range is used Points with alphanumeric point ID s falling within the range are selected Example From Pt ID a9 To Pt ID c200 gt Selected are point ID s a b c aa bb cc a1 b2 c3 c4 c5 a610 Not selected are point ID s d100 e 200 300 tzz Next step Step Description 1 CONT F1 adds all points within the range to the list in COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale and returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed COGO R9 549 COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Shift page STONEX Step Description Rotate amp Scale Shift page 2 PAGE F6 accesses COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Shift page Refer to COGO Shift Shift Rotate amp Scale Points Shift Rotate Scale Enter AE AN AH d Hethod Easting 1 500 n Northing 1 750 n A Hoight NNEEENENID 02a t CALC INV LAST SURVY PAGE COGO CALC F1 To perform the shift rotation and scale calcula tion and to continue with the subsequent screen Calculated COGO points are not yet stored INV F2 To calculate the amout of shift in Easting Northing and height from two existing points Available if A Easting gt lt A Northing gt or lt A Height gt is highlighted LAST F4 To select the value for the shift from previous COGO inverse calculations Available if
118. codes Input field for attributes for point codes Select automation type Input field for maximum number of distance measurements in the averaging EDM mode Output field for the azimuth Output field for point ID of backsight point if Quickset method was used in Setup application program Output field for free codes Input field for free codes Output field for the description of codes Output field for the description of free codes Output field for the type of code for example point code line code or area code R9 243 STONEX Field Option EDM Mode EDM Type Easting Height Height Diff Horiz Dist Hz Angle Instrument Ht Line Space Full Line Space Half Linework Longitudinal Tilt No of Dists Northing Config Survey Settings Description Select EDM measurement mode Select EDM type Output field for Easting coordinate of measured point Output field for the height coordinate of the measured point Output field for the height difference between station and reflector Output field for horizontal distance Output field for the horizontal angle Output field for the instrument height Insert full line space Insert half line space Choicelist with option for flagging a line area Refer to 15 3 Coding amp Linework Settings Output field for the longitudinal tilt of the vertical axis Output field for number of averaged distances measured with EDM mod
119. indi vidual reflector height can by typed in lt Hz gt Output The current horizontal angle lt V gt Output The current vertical angle lt Horiz Dist gt Output The horizontal distance after DIST F2 was pressed No distance is displayed when accessing the screen and after REC F3 or ALL F1 lt Ht Diff gt Output The height difference between station and measured point after DIST F2 Displays when accessing the screen and after REC F3 or ALL F1 COGO R9 574 Next step IF the task is to THEN change to another page on this PAGE F6 screen stop surveying the area and to store DONE F4 and then STORE F1 COGO Define How to the area Divide Area is accessed Refer to 32 11 3 Dividing an Area return to COGO Choose Area to be ESC Divided STONEX COGO R9 575 32 11 3 Dividing an Area Access COGO Define How to Divide Area Input page STONEX Refer to 32 11 2 Choosing an Area to be Divided to access COGO Define How to Divide Area After each change of parameters in this screen the values in the output fields are recalculated and updated Define How to Divide Area CALC F1 Input Ma To perform the area division and to continue Divide By Defined Line A with the subsequent screen Calculated COGO Using Parallel Line points are not yet stored Sub Area Grid 39 89 t INV F2
120. it with the adjustment screws Turn the instrument by 200 gon 180 Repeat the adjustment procedure if the circular level does not stay centered S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 400 STONEX Step Description Tribrach If it extends beyond the circle use the supplied allen key to centre it with the adjustment screws After the adjustments all adjusting screws should have the same tightening tension and no adjusting screw shall be loose Tools Check amp Adjust R9 401 27 10 Adjusting the Circular Level of the Prism Pole Adjusting the circular level step by step Step Description 1 Suspend a plumb line 2 Using a pole bipod align the prism pole parallel to the plumb line 3 Check the position of the circular level on the prism pole 4 a If the circular level is centered no adjustment is necessary b Ifthe circular level is not centered use an allen key to centre it with the adjustment screws Ce After the adjustments all adjusting screws should have the same tightening tension and no adjusting screw shall be loose S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 402 27 11 Inspecting the Laser Plummet of the Instrument se The laser plummet is located in the vertical axis of the instrument Under normal conditions of use the laser plummet does not need adjusting If an adjustment is nece
121. keys Stakeout R9 675 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Point ID gt Choicelist The point ID of the point to be staked Accesses STAKEOUT Data Job Name where points are shown according to sort and filter settings and staked points are indicated by Ps lt Reflector Ht gt or lt hr gt User input The default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set is suggested lt A HZ gt Output The difference of the horizontal angle from the point to be staked to the current position Ce bor lt Orientate From Station and lt Orien tate To Station the value is calculated and displayed permanently For other orientation methods the distance must be measured before the value can be displayed A DISTANCE or lt A D gt Output The difference of the horizontal distance from the point to be staked to the current position along the line defined by current position and station lt CUT gt Output The negative height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be staked The value for lt Height Offset gt configured in STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page is taken into account Move down S T O N E X Stakeout R9 676 STONEX Field Option Description lt FILL gt Output The positive height difference from the height of the current position to the heigh
122. lt A Easting gt lt A Northing gt or lt A Height gt is highlighted SURVY F5 To measure a point for the COGO calculation Available for lt Method Use 2 Points gt if lt From gt or lt To gt is highlighted PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT CONF F2 To configure the COGO application program Accesses COGO Configuration Refer to 32 3 Configuring COGO R9 550 STONEX SHIFT MODIF F4 To mathematically modify the values Available if lt A Easting gt lt A Northing gt or lt A Height gt is highlighted Description of fields Field Option Description lt Method gt The method by which the shift in A Easting A Northing and A Height will be determined Enter Defines the shift using coordinate differences AE AN AH Enter Defines the shift using an azimuth a distance and a Bng Dst Ht height difference Use 2 Points Computes the shift from the coordinate differences between two known points From Choicelist Available for Method Use 2 Points The point ID of the first known point for calculating the shift lt To gt Choicelist Available for lt Method Use 2 Points gt The point ID of the second known point for calculating the shift lt Azimuth gt User input Available for lt Method Enter Bng Dst Ht gt The azimuth defines the direction of the shift lt HDist XX gt User input Available for lt Method Enter Bng Dst Ht gt The amoun
123. lt From gt Choicelist The point ID of the known point for the COGO calcula tion lt Backsight gt Choicelist The point ID of a point used as backsight lt Angle Right gt User input The angle between lt Backsight gt and the new COGO point to be calculated from the point selected as lt From gt A positive value is for clockwise angles A negative value is for counterclockwise angles lt Azimuth gt Output The direction from the known point to the COGO point calculated from lt Angle Right gt lt HDist XX gt User input The horizontal distance between the known point and the COGO point lt Offset gt User input The offset of the COGO point from the line of direction A positive offsetis to the right a negative offset is to the left Next step The work flow is very similar to a COGO traverse calculation with azimuth bearing Refer to 32 5 2 Traverse with Azimuth Bearing COGO R9 497 Description STONEX 32 6 32 6 1 COGO Calculation Intersections Method Intersection with Bearing Bearing The COGO intersection calculation bearing bearing calculates the intersection point of two lines A line is defined by a point and a direction Elements that must be known are e the coordinates of two points e the direction from these known points to the COGO point e offsets if required and configured The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job e may be measured duri
124. lt Method E N Htor E N Resection Helmert gt Ori Ht Ori Available for lt Method Ori amp Ht Transfr gt Ht or Ori Instrument Ht Output The current instrument height lt Stn Easting gt Output For lt Method Ori amp Ht Transfr gt Easting is displayed either from fixpoint job or system as selected For lt Method Resection gt and lt Method Resection Helmert gt the calculated Easting is displayed lt Stn Northing gt Output For lt Method Ori amp Ht Transfr gt Northing is displayed either from fixpoint job or system as selected For lt Method Resection gt and lt Method Resection Helmert gt the calculated Northing is displayed lt Stn Height gt Output The calculated Height is displayed lt New Azimuth gt Output New oriented azimuth with running angle as telescope moves Setup R9 633 Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Sigma page SETUP Description of fields Results 2 TEC si Field Option Description igma page lt oEasting gt Output Available for lt Method Resection gt and lt Method Resection Helmert gt Standard deviation of the calcu lated station Easting lt oNorthing gt Output Available for lt Method Resection gt and lt Method Resection Helmert gt Standard deviation of the calcu lated station Northing lt o Height gt Output Standard deviation of the calculated station Height lt A Height gt Output Delta h
125. negative to the left of the arc Available for lt Task Calc Offset Point gt lt Offset Point gt Choicelist The offset point Available for lt Task Calc Base Point gt Next step IF THEN Task Calc Arc Center CALC F1 accesses COGO Center of Arc Results Refer to para graph COGO XX Results Result page Task Calc Offset Point CALC F1 accesses COGO Offset Point Results Refer to para graph COGO XX Results Result page Task Calc Base Point CALC F1 accesses COGO Base Point Results Refer to para graph COGO XX Results Result page Task Segmentation CALC F1 accesses COGO Define Segmentation Refer to 32 8 4 Arc Calculation Segmentation STONEX COGO R9 535 COGO XX Results Result page STONEX Refer to paragraph 32 7 1 Line Calculation Base Point for information on softkeys Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID gt User input The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for Survey Pts in CONFIGURE ID Templates Arc Radius Output Computed radius of arc Arc Length Output Computed length of arc Offs Pt Brng gt Output Available for Task Calc Offset Point Bearing of offset point from base point to offset point Offset Point Output Available for Task Calc Base Point Point ID of offset point AArcDist XX O
126. not be valid Where there are differences between the instruments they are clearly described S T O N E X Introduction R93 Table of Contents In this manual Chapter Page 1 Instrument Protection with PIN 16 2 USER Key 21 3 Quick Settings SHIFT USER 23 3 1 Overview 23 3 2 QUICK SET Change Settings to 24 3 3 Quick Setting Functions 27 3 3 1 Orientation With Compass 27 3 3 2 Positioning Hz V 30 3 3 3 Move by Joystick 32 3 3 4 Check Recorded Point Backsight Point 34 3 3 5 Robotic 37 3 4 Working examples 38 3 4 1 Working Example 1 iLock 38 3 4 2 Working Example 2 Robotic 39 3 4 3 Working Example 3 Loss of Robotic 40 4 User Interface 42 4 1 Keyboard 42 4 2 Screen 44 4 3 Operating Principles 46 4 4 Icons 48 4 5 Symbols 54 S T O N E X Table of Contents R9 4 5 Main Menu 55 5 1 Main Menu Functions 55 5 2 Survey 57 5 3 Programs 58 5 4 Manage 59 5 5 Convert 61 5 6 Config 62 5 7 Tools 63 6 Manage Jobs 64 6 1 Overview 64 6 2 Accessing Job Management 65 6 3 Creating a New Job 67 6 4 Editing a Job 71 6 5 Managing Job Codes 74 7 Manage Data 78 7 4 Overview 78 7 2 Accessing Data Management 79 7 3 Point Management 84 7 3 1 Terminology 84 7 3 2 Creating a New Point 92 7 3 3 Editing a Point 95 7 3 4 Mean Page 99 7 4 Line Area Management 105 7 4 1 Overview 105 7 4 2 Creating a New Line Area 106 7 4 3 Editing a Line Area 110 7 4 4 Working Example
127. page on the screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Method gt 2 Points or Pt Brg Dist The method for calculating the inverse result lt Start Point gt Choicelist The point ID defining the start of the line lt End Point gt Choicelist The point ID defining the end of the line lt Azimuth gt Output The direction from the first point to the second point lt HDist XX gt Output The horizontal distance between the two points lt Offset Point gt Choicelist The point ID defining an offset to the line Storing the results St D ipti sen by stop ep escription 1 Press CALC F1 to calculate the inverse result and move to the results screen 2 Press STORE F1 to store the inverse result to the active job There are no points stored to the database only the inverse result 3 Inverse results can be exported from the job using a format file The format file is created with Format Manager in Stonex Tools STONEX COGO R9 485 32 4 4 Starting step by step Calculating STONEX Inverse Between a Known Point and an Arc Pt Arc Step Description 1 COGO Henu 1 Inverse 2 Traverse 3 Intersections 2 COGO Inverse 1 Inverse Pt Pt 2 Inverse Pt Line 3 Inverse Pt Are Inverse Pt Are Input CALC F1 Input Map To calculate the result Hethod INV F2 Start Point 200 To cal
128. page on this screen ALine Grid 117 479 m SHIFT INDIV F5 and SHIFT RUN F5 AOffset Grid 78 732 vs To change between entering an individual point 02a t ID different to the defined ID tem plate and the STORE emer eese peni STAKE PAGE running point ID according to the ID template Refer to 15 1 ID Templates COGO R9 523 COGO XX Point Results Code page STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description Point ID gt User input The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for Survey Pts gt in CONFIGURE ID Templates Offset Point Output Point ID of offset point Available for Task Calc Base Point lt ALine XX gt Output Horizontal distance from start point to base point Available for lt Task Calc Base Point gt lt AOffset XX gt Output Offset from base point to offset point Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line Available for lt Task Calc Base Point gt lt Line Length gt Output Length of line from start point to end point lt Line Brng gt Output Bearing of line from start point to end point lt Offs Pt Brng gt Output Bearing of offset point from base point to offset point Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Code page The functionality of the Code page is similar to COGO Traverse Result Code page Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Plot page COGO R9 524
129. return to COGO Point ID 0004 Choose Area to be Divided once both points are stored RSLT1 F3 or RSLT2 F3 Easting 20 000 m To view the first and second result Northing 78 921 n STAKE F5 Height O Oon m To access the Stakeout application program and stake out the calculated COGO point PAGE F6 02a t To change to another page on this screen STORE RSLT2 STAKE PAGE suirr INDIV F5 and SHIFT RUN F5 To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template Refer to 15 1 ID Templates COGO R9 582 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Point ID gt User input The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for lt Survey Pts gt in CONFIGURE ID Templates lt Height gt User input A height value to be stored with the calculated point can be typed in Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Code page COGO All codes of the job can be selected Type in a code if required Area Division Results Code page Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Plot page COGO The points defining the area and the points of the new border are shown in black Area Division Results Plot page Next step STORE F1 stores the results and accesses COGO Choose Area to be Divided For lt Write Logfile Yes gt in COGO Configuration Logfile page the result is written to
130. set to those of the selected job An active filter for an object is indicated in MANAGE Data Job Name by Y located on the right hand side of the page name Manage Data R9 118 Access step by step MANAGE Sorts amp Filters Points page STONEX Step Description 1 Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management to access MANAGE Data Job Name 2 In MANAGE Data Job Name on the Points Lines or Areas page SHIFT FILT F5 to access MANAGE Sorts amp Filters 3 MANAGE Sorts amp Filters This screen consists of three pages one for each type of object The page for an object is displayed when the equivalent page is displayed in MANAGE Data Job Name The available fields on this screen depend on the selected setting for lt Filter gt Sorts amp Filters CONT F1 Points Lines Areas To close the screen and return to the screen from Sort Ascend Point O4 where this screen was accessed The selected sort and filter settings are applied Filter k Class dl CODES F4 Available for lt Filter Point Code gt To select the CTRL line codes to be used ADJ STAKE F5 REF To filter points for the Stakeout application AVGE program Refer to 7 6 3 Stakeout Filter PAGE F6 E mn En Be To change to another page on this screen Manage Data R9 119 Description of fields STONEX No Filter Highest Class Range of Pt ID s Pt ID Wildcard Time Cla
131. step 10 10 Is Class AVGE gt e Ifyes continue with step 13 e Ifno continue with step 15 11 The edited point is Class MEAS and no offset point Manage Data R9 97 STONEX Step Description PAGE F6 changes to the Annots page Refer to chapter 12 MANAGE Edit Point Point ID Annots page The comments to be stored with the point can be edited Continue with step 15 13 The edited point is lt Class AVGE gt PAGE F6 changes to the Mean page 14 MANAGE Edit Point Point ID Mean page All points of lt Class MEAS gt of the same point ID are listed sorted by time The settings in the Use column can be edited All functionality and keys are explained in a separate section 7 3 4 15 STORE F1 stores the changes and returns to MANAGE Data Job Name Ce An edited point retains the creation value for lt Time gt Ce Changing coordinates of a point which has been previously used in other application programs for example COGO does not update the application results It may happen that a point with the same point ID exists in the job If the codes and or attribute values of the new and the existing point do not match a screen opens where they can be corrected Manage Data R9 98 7 3 4 Description Averaging STONEX Mean Page e In order to check measurements the same point can be measured more than once These m
132. step by step SURVEY Auto Points Offset General page STONEX Configuring Offset Points Step Description 1 Refer to 35 2 Surveying Points to access SURVEY Survey Job Name 2 PAGE F6 until the Auto page is active 3 OFST1 F4 or OFST2 F5 to access SURVEY Auto Points Offset Auto Points Offset 1 General Code Store Offset1 Horiz Offset 1 000 n CONT F1 Height Offset 0 000 n To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed Identifier 081 OFST2 F2 and OFST1 F2 Pref ix Suffix Suffix To switch between configuring offset point type one and two 02a PAGE F6 CONT OFST2 PAGE To change to another page on this screen Survey Auto Points R9 707 Description of fields Field Option Description Store Offset1 gt and Yes Activates logging of offset points lt Store Offset2 gt Ce Al other fields in the screen are active and can be edited with this setting No Deactivates logging of offset points and all fields in this screen lt Horiz Offset gt User input The horizontal offset between 1000 m and 1000 mat which the offset point is collected Height Offset User input The height offset between 100 m and 100 m from the related auto point lt Identifier gt User input The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the auto point This ID is then used a
133. subsequent point in lt Stakeout Job gt is suggested for staking out Stakeout R9 679 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Point ID gt Output The point ID of the point to be staked lt Store ID gt User input The unique number which is used to store the staked point Allows a different point ID to be typed in if needed lt A EASTING gt Output The difference of the Easting coordinate between the the point to be staked and the current position lt A NORTHING gt Output The difference of the Northing coordinate between the point to be staked and the current position lt A HZ gt Output The difference of the horizontal angle to the point to be staked and the current position lt A DISTANCE gt Output The difference of the horizontal distance to the point to be staked and the current position lt FORWARD gt Output The horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked along the line defined by station and reflector lt BACK gt Output The horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked in the reverse direction of the line defined by station and reflector lt RIGHT gt Output Horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked orthogonal to the right of the line defined by station and reflector Stakeout R9 680 STONEX Field Option Descript
134. the last used The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to paragraph Access to access FREECODE Select Free Code 9 3 2 FREECODE Select Free Code All free codes from the job codelist which belong to the active code 8 6 groups are available for selection Free codes marked with amp have attributes attached Coding R9 160 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Highlight the desired code ATRIB F3 to access FREECODE Enter Attributes FREECODE Enter Attributes lt Free Code gt The name of the selected code for which attribute values are to be typed in lt Code Desc gt The detailed description of the selected code If configured for the selected code input fields for attribute values are available Type in the attribute values Attribute values for attributes of type e normal can be typed in e fixed cannot be edited NEW A F2 to add a new attribute of type normal and of value type text NAME F3 or VALUE F3 Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in To highlight lt Attribute n gt or the field for the attribute value Attributes of type mandatory or fixed and of value type real or integer online help must be created in Stonex Tools in Stonex Tools Ce Up to twe
135. the point to be staked is displayed as orthometric height The value for lt Height Offset gt configured in STAKEOUT Config uration Heights page is not taken into account Changing the value for lt D Ht gt changes the values displayed for lt CUT gt and lt FILL gt Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Map page Refer to paragraph STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Map page Stakeout R9 671 STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Map page Stake out in orthogonal from station mode step by step STONEX The Map page provides an interactive display of the data Refer to 30 MapView Interactive Display Feature for information on the functionality and softkeys available Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Set up and orient the instrument 33 Ce Automation Robotic and lt EDM Mode Tracking are configured 16 1 in CONFIGURE EDM amp iLock Settings Start the Stakeout application program 34 2 STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin 34 2 Check the settings CONF F2 to access STAKEOUT Configuration General page STAKEOUT Configuration General page 34 3 lt Orientate From Station gt lt Stake Mode Orthogonal gt Ce This step by step instruction uses typical settings in all other fields on
136. to access COGO Modify Value On this screen numbers can be typed in for the multiplication division addition and subtraction with the original azimuth distance or offset value The standard rules of mathematical opera tions apply Modify Value Azimuth 25 0000 o Hultiply 0 000 Divide De Add 50 0000 Subtract 2c CONT F1 To accept the modified value and to return to the Azimuth 50 0000 g screen from where this screen was accessed The modified value is copied into the field which was 02a ft initially highlighted in COGO XX Input Input sw j d jd d page COGO R9 590 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Azimuth gt Output The name of the field and the value which was high lt HDist XX gt or lighted before accessing COGO Modify Value lt Offset gt lt Multiply gt User input The number to multiply by e Minimum 3000 e Maximum 3000 e performs a multiplication by 1 lt Divide gt User input The number to divide by e Minimum 3000 e Maximum 3000 e performs a division by 1 lt Add gt User input The number to be added e For azimuths Minimum 0 Maximum Full circle For distances and offsets Minimum 0 m Maximum 30000000 m e performs an addition of 0 000 STONEX COGO R9 591 lt HDist XX gt or lt Offset gt Field Option Description lt Subtract gt User input The number to be s
137. to be configured Auto Points Offset for the second point Example for offset point The offset point ID is a combination of the auto point ID and an identifier as prefix or suffix ID s The right most part of the auto point ID is incremented within the point ID The auto point ID is truncated from the left if the length of the auto point ID plus identifier prefix or suffix is greater than 16 characters Auto point ID Identifier Prefix Suffix Offset point ID Auto1234 OS1 Prefix OS1Auto1234 Auto1235 OS1Auto1235 Auto1234 OS1 Suffix Auto12340S1 Auto1235 Auto12350S1 Ce Refer to 15 1 ID Templates for more information on point ID s S T O N E X Survey Auto Points R9 711 36 4 3 Working Example Pick up points along the centreline to the right and to the left of a road Points are to be picked up automatically every 5 m while walking along the centreline The points to the right and to the left ofthe road areto be picked up automatically with those of the centreline The auto point ID s are CL0001 CL0002 The offset point ID s are OSCL0001 OSCL0002 for the right side of the road and CL00010S CL00020S for the left side The offset to the right and to the left is 3 m The height difference is 0 3 m to the right and 0 3 m to the left Description Application Goal Diagram e a b C a Leftside of the road b Centreline c Rightside ofthe roa
138. transferred between Compact Flash card and internal memory Next step IF all XX THEN are to be transferred ALL F3 transfers all objects in list are not to be trans ferred CONT F1 transfers selected object Tools Transfer Objects R9 340 23 23 1 Description Access TOOLS Upload Application Programs STONEX Tools Upload System Files Application Programs Application program uploads are possible from the CompactFlash card to the application programs memory These files are stored in the SYSTEM directory of the memory device and use the extension a Select Main Menu Tools V Upload System Files Application Programs Upload Application Programs X From CF Card To Instrument Jh CONT F1 To upload an application program and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed OTA DEL F4 CONT DEL To delete an application program Tools Upload System Files R9 341 Description of fields Field Option Description lt From gt Output Upload from CompactFlash card lt To gt Output Upload to application program memory lt Program gt Choicelist List of program files stored on the CompactFlash card lt Version gt Output Version of the program file chosen Next step CONT F1 uploads the selected application program S T O N E X Tools VUpload System Files R9
139. turbulences The best conditions can be found usually early in the morning and with overcast sky Before starting to work the instrument has to become acclimatised to the ambient tempera ture Approximately two minutes per C temperature difference from storage to working environment but at least 15 min should be taken into account S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 373 27 2 Details on Instrument Errors General Instrument errors occur ifthe standing axis the tilting axis and the line of sight are not precisely perpendicular to each other Hz collimation error c a Tilting axis b Line perpendicular to tilting axis c Hzcollimation error c also called line of sight error d Line of sight The Hz collimation error c is also called line of sight error It is caused by the deviation between the optical line of sight which means the direction in which the crosshairs points and the line perpendicular to the tilting axis This error affects all Hz readings and increases with steep sightings S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 374 Tilting axis error a b a Axis perpendicular to the vertical axis b Mechanical vertical axis of the instrument also called standing axis c Tilting axis error d Tilting axis The tilting axis error a is caused by the deviation between the mechanical tilting axis and the line perpendicular to the vertical axis This error
140. zontal angle difference between the backsight point and the measured point This has no effect on the set orientation STONEX Setup R9 600 SETUP Configuration Parameters page STONEX Field Option No Description Does not set a value for lt AR gt If the display mask is configured to display lt AR gt in the Survey application program the value is identical to the azimuth C amp If Set Angle Right Yes and more than one backsight point is used the behaviour is as for Set Angle Right No Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Parameters page Configuration Hz Acc Ori Pos Acc Target Ht Acc Target Local Resection Beneral Parameters Checks Logfi le Resection and Ori amp Ht Accuracies MATER o CONT F1 0 015 m To accept changes and return to the screen from 0 015 m where this screen was accessed PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen Define Northing Axis SHIFT ABOUT F5 To display information about the program name 02a the version number the date of the version the CONT PAGE copyright and the article number Setup R9 601 Description of fields Field Option Description When lt Method Resections gt or lt Method Ori amp Ht Transfer gt the following fields apply lt Hz Acc Ori gt User input For Resection or Orientation and Height Transfer Limit for the standa
141. 0 Y 45 0000 X 0 7071 02a f ct x EA 2 HEAN SDEV CLR SIN cos TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN DHS DEC PI D gt R R gt D POLAR RECT SORT XA2 1 X Y X LOG 104x LN e x Y X STO RCL X lt gt LASTX CLEAR HELP CONF DONE QUIT S T O N E X Tools Calculator R9 358 Description of softkeys STONEX First level Lr x Vy to access the Second level pit mise La Y to access the Third level F1 To add X and lt Y gt F2 To subtract lt X gt from lt Y gt F3 To multiply X by lt Y gt F4 To divide lt Y gt by lt X gt F5 To change between positive and negative alge braic sign for lt X gt CLR X F6 To clear lt X gt r F1 To add lt X gt to XX and lt Y gt to lt ZY gt 2 F2 To subtract lt X gt from XX and lt Y gt from XY MEAN F3 To calculate the mean XX SDEV F4 To calculate the standard deviation for EX CLR F6 To clear XX and XX Tools V Calculator R9 359 STONEX SIN cos TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN Vy to access the Fourth level cons 2pe Pr p R R D V to access the Fifth level SIN F1 To calculate sine of lt X gt COS F2 To calculate cosine of lt X gt TAN F3 To calculate tangent of lt X gt ASIN F4 To calculate arcsine of lt X
142. 02a SET jRossT INFO SURVY PAGE STONEX Setup SET F1 To set data selected in Set and to store all setup data and exit the application program ROBST F3 or LSQRS F3 To display the results for the robust or the least squares calculation method INFO F4 To display additional information about the accuracy of the measured target points and to delete inconsistent measurements in the SETUP Additional Information screen DONE F5 Applicable to Add Points Later To temporarily exit the Setup program The station setup will be incomplete but can be continued and completed at a later time SURVY F5 Applicable to Meas All Now To access SETUP Measure Target and to measure more target points PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT 3 PAR F2 or SHIFT 4 PAR F2 Switches between a 3 parameter and 4 param eter helmert calculation The results are immedi ately updated SHIFT OTHER F5 Available if two solutions were calculated Changes between these solutions R9 632 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Station ID gt User input Station ID of the current station set up lt No of Points gt Output Number of points used in calculation lt Set gt Choicelist The selected options are set and stored in the system All other values are taken from the current system setup E N Ht Ori Available for lt Method Resection gt and
143. 18 Arrow orientate to Stakeout ENEE 654 ASCII Export format esee tuii 205 Import IO 214 ASCII file Directory for import export to from job 729 Atmospheric ppm Attribute Add for Free COC i M Thematical code Description een Ee Type UM NEW EES Attribute mismatch seen Attribute value R9 732 fug c arden 134 Attributes ul adc AUTO e E E TE D eeneg Bel eet Coordinate type Logging Offset points BDO REES ee Auto Points access Automatic Prism Search senes 266 AUTOMATION e 425 MERTEN 100 Average EDM Topert stata tet ipee rac 420 MEIH EE 99 Iri 690 CONN GUT Cts usus E eS aa RUE du 68 Include exclude coordinate triplet 102 Limit exceeded ENNEN 104 Mde 100 Inc CC 99 DeSCrIDEOT usi EEE errores 99 Offset points Staked points EE STONEX PACIENTE 85 Azimuth bearing fields EEN 284 B Backsight Point check BASE eene tte tente ttes Battery Icon Battery status Iit Bearing azimuth fields Bearing Bearing intersection method sssri 498 Bearing Distance intersection method 504 Reeg 294 HZ SeCLOE mamana edd arene dole
144. 2 lt AArcDist XX gt Ce Arc management is not available for COGO arc calculations COGO arc calculation The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more base point step by step information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Arc Calculations Input Input page Ce COGO Arc Calculations Input Input page SHIFT CONF F2 to configure the COGO application program 32 3 2 COGO Arc Calculations Input Input page 32 8 1 Task Calc Base Point 3 CALC F1 calculates the results STONEX COGO R9 539 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter 4 COGO Base Point Results Result page 32 8 1 STORE F1 stores the results COGO R9 540 32 8 3 Description Le COGO arc calculation offset point step by step STONEX Arc Calculation Offset Point The COGO arc calculation offset point calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of arc and offset values in relation to an arc Elements that must be known are e coordinates of three points e offsets OR e coordinates of two points e radius to the two points e offsets The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered Arc management is not available for COGO arc calculations The fo
145. 34 4 1 Elements of the Graphical Display in the Stakeout for information on elements of the graphic Find Target Stake Map hr FORW t 18 651 LEFT 5 000 n CONT F1 FILL 0 000 m Exits SETUP Find Target and returns to SETUP Measure Target Ht 100 000 m DIST F2 01a t To measure and display distances Updates all CONT DIST PAGE output fields in the screen Setup R9 643 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Point ID gt Output The point ID of the target point to be measured lt Reflector Ht gt Output The default reflector height as defined in the active lt hr gt configuration set is suggested Go FORWARD gt Output The horizontal distance from the current reflector posi lt FORW gt or tion to the target point along the line from the station to lt Go BACWARD gt the current reflector position Field is lt Go lt BACK gt FORWARD gt when the reflector has to be moved towards the instrument and lt Go BACKWARD gt when the reflector has to be moved away from the instru ment Shows before the first distance measure ment with DIST F2 lt Go RIGHT gt Output Horizontal distance from the current reflector position lt RGHT gt or to the target point orthogonal to the line from the lt Go LEFT gt station to the current reflector position Field is lt Go lt LEFT gt RIGHT gt when the target point is to the right of t
146. 4 Increment point ID sisirin Incrementation Instrument Check and adjust Errors details Firmware upload Settings configuration R9 740 Ie E 88 Turn on and turn off sees 46 Instrument ID eneen 275 Recall ECHT 275 Interface Eam DC T ECC PC 42 later Te 322 334 TUPI On OF Off iet ceci ttc eben 310 Intersection Be aring Bearin Bearing DIStatniCe ugesi ge COGO calculation method Manage ljENET III 64 I sjemee 3i e 136 Job files directory EEN 729 Joystick move By ninnisin 32 NST CK de ER 24 STONEX K Key illumination Keyboard tiers aiat Locking and unlocking ss 47 Keyboard illumination een 296 nij 42 Keys Alphanumeric overture EE 42 Keys ATOW 42 Keys Combinations ee 43 Keys PUMCtON E 42 Known backsight point ENEE 617 L Language Delete Config ration eegen 293 gre 343 SJ 293 ee RE 343 Language files directory sse 730 Laser plummet eener geiert lij C et SATUS P EET Turn on or off Level status Licence file directory ee R9 741 Limit exceeded Absolute coordinate difference sss 103 Limit exceeded MER 104 Limits exceeded Length Management ENEE ENEE 105 Orientate to Sta Gl 655 Eu ee TE 166 Line code
147. 5 Text Lights page 2 Align instrument line of sight and prism where both flashing SureBeam lights can be seen simultaneously CONT F1 to lock onto the prism Ifthe instrument has locked onto the prism the SureBeam is turned off automatically Ce Ifthe SureBeam was turned on in the CONFIGURE Lights Display Beeps Text Lights page it has to be turned off by setting lt SureBeam Off Ce The SureBeam is turned off automatically once the instrument has locked onto a prism S T O N E X Functions R9 429 29 5 Description Laser plummet Visible red laser pointer L Screen key illumination STONEX Illumination There are several different illumination types built into the instrument that all fulfill different functions Some are to support measurements for example the visible red laser pointer Others such as the screen illumination are for more convenient work with the instrument These different types of illumination are described below The laser plummet allows setting up the instrument over a marked point The laser beam is emitted from the bottom of the instrument pointing to the ground When the instrument is levelled and the laser beam points exactly at the ground point the instrumentis set up correctly The laser plummet can be turned on and off It is turned on automatically when opening the STATUS Level and Laser Plummet screen and turned off when leaving th
148. 5 1 Begin CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name 3 PAGE F6 until the SCode page is visible S T O N E X Coding R9 173 Step Description Refer to chapter 4 With the focus on Code Block 1 press enter to access SURVEY Manage Code Blocks panel 5 NEW F2 to create a new code block Ce Code blocks can only be created or deleted in SURVEY Manage Code Blocks panel 6 CONT F1 to return to SURVEY Survey Job Name SCode page Assigning codes to a The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more Code Block step by step information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to paragraph Creating a Code Block step by step to access SURVEY Survey Job Name SCode page 2 Move the focus on a code box CODES F4 to select a code to be assigned to the highlighted code block Ce To create a new code to be assigned refer to Creating a New Code 8 5 2 S T O N E X Coding R9 174 Copying a Code Block to a new job step by step STONEX The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter Ce Code blocks are stored in the job 1 Refer to paragraph Accessing Job Management to access MANAGE 6 2 Edit Job Job Name Codelist page
149. 504 Diagram COGO intersection calcu lation with bearing distance step by step STONEX Known P1 First known point P2 Second known point P4 and P3 Unknown P3 First COGO point P4 Second COGO point a Direction from P1 to P3 and P4 r Radius as defined by the distance from P2 to The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter The procedure of a COGO intersection calculation with bearing distance is similar to a COGO intersection calculation with bearing bearing Follow the steps 1 to 5 in paragraph COGO intersection calculation with bearing bearing step by step The differences are e Method Brng Dist is to be selected in COGO Intersection Input Input page e For the second known point HDist XX is used instead of lt Azimuth gt The keys and advice mentioned are still valid 32 6 1 CALC F1 to calculate the COGO points COGO R9 505 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Two results are calculated COGO Brng Dist Results Result1 page lt Point ID gt The identifier for the first result of the COGO point depending on the point ID template configured for lt Survey Pts gt in CONFIGURE ID Templates The point ID can be changed The calculated coordinates are displayed Type ina point ID 15 1 STAKE F5
150. 69 ADD ictu mine diim n n tpe iind ient UNA DII Rc ER 546 Add point to line itti rct re Doer 111 ADDI eer 547 Additive Constant E 203 Adjust Circular level of instrument and tribrach 400 Circular level of prism pole Adjustment Combined I t i c and iLock Compensator I t Electronig lt a E XM Mechanical miian TTilting axis a iecit rerit eise Adjustment errors view current ENEE 399 Anple iuuat etse EE 600 Angle display format EEN 282 zn 299 R9 731 ig M 337 Application memory EEN 728 Application program Activate COGO rdc m MH lr fsgjsie bee cn 463 Loadable irr rtr tenen etit rec 463 Loadable and non loadable ss 463 Maximum number open Menu Access Noncsloadable etie Een ki kei et Survey AUtO POMS uin cete cnc eode ceni ee iim esce oci tite General Remote point Upload C Application program files directory ee 730 Application programs General informati n ENEE EEN 463 Application programs memory fog rif 337 Create 106 STONEX EG esee mente nen techs e ges tiet 110 ICON EE 51 Quick Coding etie eene 166 Area code LS Area management Area display format Areas Sorting and filter EeEeEen 1
151. 9 564 STONEX Divide by Using Elements required Swing line Rotation point Size of new area in percentage Rotation point of the swing line Area Parallel line Size of new area Two points defining the line Perpendicular line e Size of new area Two points defining the line Swing line Rotation point le Size of new area Rotation point of the swing line The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered COGO R9 565 Diagram methods The diagrams show the area division methods Some diagrams apply to several area division Area division method lt Divide gt lt Using gt lt Shift gt 1 By Defined Line Parallel Line By Distance 2 By Percentage Parallel Line 3 By Area Parallel Line P3 d PO Point A gt of defined line P1 Point B gt of defined line P2 Firstnew COGO point P2 P3 Second new COGO point PO d HDist XX STONEX COGO R9 566 Area division method __ lt Divide gt lt Using gt lt Shift gt 1 By Defined Line Perpendic Line By Distance 2 By Percentage Perpendic Line 3 By Area Perpendic Line P2 P3 PO Point A gt of defined line P1 Point B gt of defined line P2 Firstnew COGO point d P3 Second new COGO point PO d HDist XX
152. 9 Main Menu Convert Export Data from Job R9 213 14 14 1 Description Import formats STONEX Convert Import Data to Job Overview This screen lists all the importers loaded The data to import are stored on the CompactFlash card Data can be imported to a job on the CompactFlash card Format Characteristic Description ASCII Import variables Point ID grid coordinates thematical codes No free codes no attributes Format definition Free format Use and order of variables and delimiter can be defined during import Units As currently configured on the instrument Height Orthometric Specialities Local heights but no coordi _ Points are imported without coordinates but nates in file with local height and code if available Coordinates but no heights in Points are imported without height but with file coordinates and code if available Neither coordinates nor No import heights in file Convert Import Data to Job R9 214 STONEX Format Characteristic Description No point ID s in file No import GSI8 Import variables Point ID WI 11 local coordinates WI 81 WI 82 GSI16 WI 83 thematical codes WI 71 No free codes no attributes Refer to 19 1 GSI Output for information on GSI Format Format definition Fixed format Easting and Northing can be switched during import Units As defined in the GSI file Heights Orthometric Specialities Loc
153. AGE Jobs Device Refer to 6 2 Accessing Job Management for further options to access this screen 2 In MANAGE Jobs Device highlight a job to be edited EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Job Job Name SHIFT LOG F5 to access MANAGE Data Log Job Name Access by user defined menu Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key MANAGE In the column Data Record all points lines and areas as well as free codes stored within the Data Log Job Name active job are displayed They are always sorted by time with the most recent record at the top For lines and areas the value for Start Time gt is relevant S T O N E X Manage Data R9 116 STONEX Data Log construction Data Record Record Type Point 500 Point 500 Point 1 Point line003 Line line002 Line line001 Line 02a CONT NEW EDIT DEL HORE Next step CONT F1 To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed NEW F2 To insert a free code below this means timewise before the currently highlighted object or record The functionality of inserting a free code is identical to the functionality of entering a free code during a survey Refer to 9 3 Free Coding EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted object or free code Refer to 7 3 3 Editing a Point 7 4 3 Editing a Line Area The functionality of editing a free code is identical to the functionality of entering
154. Angle 90 00 00 CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed CS PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen Config General Settings R9 296 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description Warning Beeps gt Off Soft or Controls the beep for acoustic warning signals for the Loud R9 instrument lt Key Beeps gt Off Soft or Controls the beep upon Key presses for the R9 instru Loud ment lt Hz Sectr Beep gt On or Off Turns the Hz sector beep on and off The instrument beeps when within 5 gon 4 30 of the defined sector there is a long and consistent beep within 0 5 gon 27 and no beep within 0 005 gon 16 lt Sector Angle gt User input Input field for sector angle for which a beep should sound Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Text page Config General Settings R9 297 CONFIGURE Lights Display Beeps Text Lights Display Beeps Lights Display Beeps Text Text Key Rpt Delay 0 2sec Text page Alpha Hode lt MENEZTTTXTTEESTH Deflt aNum ABCDEFGHI JKLHNO CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed 02a PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Key Rpt Delay gt User input Key repeat del
155. Ce Codelist If codes had been copied from a System RAM codelist the name ofthe codelist is displayed If codes have been typed in then the name of the active job is displayed 2 SHIFT EXPRT F2 copies codes and code blocks from the job to an existing or new codelist Ce Tocreate a new codelist refer to Creating Editing a Codelist 8 4 Ce Copying code blocks to an existing codelist overwrites the code blocks of the existing codelist 3 STORE F1 to save the currently active job and return to MANAGE Job Device 4 Create a new job and assign the related codelist to the job Ce SmartCodes from the codelist are now available within the new job Ce To create a new job refer to Creating a New Job 6 3 Coding R9 175 9 5 4 Using SmartCodes Measuring points using The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more Code Blocks step by information on screens step SE Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to paragraph Creating a Code Block step by step to access 9 5 4 SURVEY Survey Job Name SCode page 2 Move the focus on a code box Ce _ When String Attrib gt is active you can type in an attribute value below the code name of the highlighted code box Ce _ F4 or F5 to increase or decrease the value Applies only if the value is numeric 3 ALL F1 to measure and store the point with the highlighted code Ce When Meas
156. Change Settings to Step Description 1 QUICK SET Change Settings to 2 Hz V F2 to access QUICK SET Positioning Hz V Absolute page 3 To position with absolute Hz V angles continue with step 4 e To position with relative Hz V angles continue with step 6 4 QUICK SET Positioning Hz V Absolute page Hz Angle Oriented horizontal direction for the instrument to turn to lt V Angle gt Vertical direction for the instrument to turn to Continue with step 8 PAGE F6 to access QUICK SET Positioning Hz V Relative page QUICK SET Positioning Hz V Relative page Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 30 STONEX Step Description lt AHz gt Angular difference for the horizontal angle to turn to lt AV gt Angular difference for the vertical angle to turn to CONT F1 The instrument turns to the reflector For lt Automation iLock gt an iLock measurement is performed If no prism was found the instrument turns to the position typed in for lt Hz Angle gt and lt V Angle gt or lt AHz gt and lt AV gt For lt Automation Robotic gt the instrument locks on the prism and the Robotic icon is displayed If no prism was found the instrument turns to the position typed in for lt Hz Angle gt and lt V Angle gt or lt AHz gt and lt AV gt Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 31 3 3 3 Description Access QUICK SET Move by Joystick STONEX
157. Confirmation j Auto Power Down Behaviour Hode Remain On dl af CONT F1 CONT PAGE To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu Config General Settings R9 301 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Start Screen gt Choicelist Determines the first screen which is shown after turning on the instrument lt Power Down gt Sets the behaviour of the instrument shut down With Confirmation Instrument shut down must be confirmed Directly The instrument is shut down immediately without confirmation lt Mode gt Turn Off The instrument turns off if no events have occurred after the time set in lt After Time gt Remain On The instrument does not power down automat ically lt After Time gt User input Available unless lt Mode Remain On gt is selected Minutes after which the instrument should turn off Next step PAGE F6 changes to the PIN Code page S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 302 CONFIGURE Start Up amp Power Down PIN Code page STONEX The appearance of the screen varies with the setting for lt Use PIN gt when this screen is accessed lt Use PIN No gt lt Use PIN Yes gt No PIN code has been set before A PIN code has been set before e The PIN code protection can be activated ev The PIN code must be typed in order to change settings on this page e Thena PIN code can be typed in e Then the PIN code pr
158. D s Suffix Adds the setting for lt Identifier gt at the end of the original point ID s Next step IF THEN the used parameters are to be viewed PAGE F6 accesses COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Store Summary page the calculated COGO PAGE F6 accesses COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Store Plot page Orig points are to be inal points are displayed in grey calculated COGO points are displayed viewed graphically in black the calculated COGO STORE F1 accesses COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Results Result points are to be page Refer to paragraph COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Results Result stored page Description of fields Field Option Description No of New Pts gt Output Number of new points created No of Skipped Pts Output Number of points which were skipped either due to not being able to convert coordinates or points with identical point ID s already existed in Store Job gt COGO R9 556 Next step IF THEN the stored COGO points PAGE F6 accesses COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Results Plot page are to be viewed graphi Original points are displayed in grey calculated COGO points are cally displayed in black more points are to be CONT F1 returns to COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale shifted rotated and or scaled COGO is to be ended SHIFT QUIT F6 STONEX COGO R9 557 Description
159. D and the area ID may or may not have a code attached This is either a point code a line code or an area code depending on the type of object Refer to 9 Coding for information on coding STONEX Manage Data R9 78 7 2 Access MANAGE Data Job Name Points page STONEX Accessing Data Management Select Main Menu Manage Data OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR From a choicelist in some screens for example in application programs OR Tap the line area icon The objects listed on the pages belong to the currently active job The objects listed and their order depend on the active sort and filter settings An active filter for a page is indicated by Y to the right of the name of the page Refer to 7 6 Point Sorting and Filters for information about sort and filter settings Data construction CONT F1 To close the screen and return to the screen from 3D ca where this screen was accessed 0 000 NEW F2 To create a point EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted point DEL F4 To delete the highlighted point MORE F5 02a t To display information about the codes if stored CONT NEW EDIT DEL HORE PAGE with any point the time and the date of when the point was stored the 3D coordinate quality the class and the flag for Linework Manage Data R9 79 PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT LOG F4 To view points l
160. DEVICE TRANSFER OBJECTS CODELISTS CONFIGURATION SETS FORMAT FILES SYSTEM RAM CONTENTS UPLOAD SYSTEM FILES APPLICATION PROGRAMS SYSTEM LANGUAGES INSTRUMENT FIRMWARE CALCULATOR FILE VIEWER LICENCE KEYS CHECK amp ADJUST COMBINED 1 t i c iLock S T O N E X Menu Tree R9 726 TILTING AXIS a COMPENSATOR 1 t CURRENT VALUES END CHECK amp ADJUST S T O N E X Menu Tree R9 727 Appendix B Types of memory avail able STONEX Memory Types CompactFlash card e Jobs Points e Codes e TPS raw observations e ASCII output files e Logfiles e ASCII files to be imported CompactFlash card The information is managed in the job database and in the measurement database Application programs memory 8 MB System RAM 1 MB e System language e Codelists e Font files e Configuration sets Application programs e Format files e Language files e ID templates e Font files e Sort and filter settings Memory Types R9 728 Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device Description On the memory device files are stored in certain directories Directory structure 7 CODE e Codelists various files CONFIG e TPS configuration files xfg CONVERT e Format files frt DATA e ASCII files for import export to from job
161. Data Job Name can be selected Available for lt Method 3 Points gt The second point of the arc lt End Point gt Choicelist The end point of the arc All points from COGO Data Job Name can be selected Available for Method 3 Points and Method 2 Points Radius gt Point 1 gt Choicelist A point on the first tangent Available for Method 2 Tgnts Radius gt Method 2 Tgnts Arc Lngt gt and Method 2 Tgnts Chrd Lngt gt PI Point Choicelist The point of intersection ofthe two tangents Available for Method 2 Tgnts Radius gt Method 2 Tgnts Arc Lngt gt and Method 2 Tgnts Chrd Lngt gt lt Point 2 gt Choicelist A point on the second tangent Available for lt Method 2 Tgnts Radius gt lt Method 2 Tgnts Arc Lngt gt and lt Method 2 Tgnts Chrd Lngt gt lt Radius gt User input The radius of the arc Available for lt Method 2 Points Radius gt and Method 2 Tgnts Radius gt lt Arc Length gt User input The length of the arc Available for lt Method 2 Tgnts Arc Lngt gt COGO R9 534 Field Option Description lt Chord Length gt User input The length of the chord Available for lt Method 2 Tgnts Chrd Lngt gt lt AArcDist XX gt User input Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to base point Available for lt Task Calc Offset Point gt lt AOffset XX gt User input Offset from base point to offset point Positive to the right and
162. Description of fields Field Option Description lt Task gt Calc Base Calculates the base point the station and offset of a Point point in relation to a line Calc Offset Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of Point station and offset values in relation to a line Segmentation Calculates the coordinates of new points on a line either equally spaced or with defined segments lt Method gt The method by which the line will be defined 2 Points Uses two known points to define the line Pt Brg Dist _ Defines the line using a known point a distance and an azimuth of the line lt Start Point gt Choicelist The start point of the line All points from COGO Data Job Name can be selected STONEX COGO R9 521 COGO Line Calculations Input Map page STONEX Field Option Description lt End Point gt Choicelist Available for lt Method 2 Points gt The end point of the line All points from COGO Data Job Name can be selected lt Azimuth gt User input Available for lt Method Pt Brg Dist gt The azimuth of the line lt HDist XX gt User input Available for lt Method Pt Brg Dist gt The horizontal distance from the start point to the end point of the line lt ALine XX gt User input Available for lt Task Calc Offset Point gt Horizontal distance from start point to base point lt Offset Point gt Choicelist Available for lt Task Calc Offset Point gt The offset poin
163. E Job Codes STONEX Manage Jobs R9 74 MANAGE Job Codes CONT F1 To return to MANAGE Edit Job Job Name Codelist page NEW F2 To create a new code Refer to 8 5 2 Creating a New Code EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted code Accesses MANAGE Edit Code where new attributes can be added to at a code and line styles can be changed Refer to CONT NEW EDIT DEL DATA INTL paragraph MANAGE Edit Code DEL F4 To delete an existing code MORE F5 To display information about the code group the code type the code description and the quick codes if available SHIFT GROUP F4 To access MANAGE Code Groups To view create activate and deactivate code groups Refer to 8 6 Managing Code Groups SHIFT SORT F5 To access MANAGE Sort Codes To sort codes by code name code description quick code or last used S T O N E X Manage Jobs R9 75 MANAGE Edit Code STONEX Next step IF THEN the job codes do not CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to the screen from where need to be changed MANAGE Job Codes was accessed anew job codeis to be NEW F2 Refer to 8 5 2 Creating a New Code created an existing job code is highlight the job code and EDIT F3 Refer to paragraph MANAGE to be edited Edit Code Edit Code X STORE F1 Code c1 To store the code including any newly created Code Desc centre line attributes and to return to the screen
164. EX Arc management is not available for COGO arc calculations Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Arc Calculations Input The softkeys are similar to line calculation Refer to 32 7 1 Line Calculation Base Point for information on softkeys Description of fields Field Option Description lt Task gt Calc Arc Calculates the coordinates of the centre of the arc Center Calc Offset Calculates the coordinates of a new point after input of Point station and offset values in relation to an arc Calc Base Calculates the base point the station and offset of a Point point in relation to an arc Segmentation Calculates the coordinates of new points on an arc either equally spaced in a defined interval or ina defined angle lt Method gt The method by which the arc will be defined 3 Points Uses three known points to define the arc 2 Defines the arc using two known points and a radius of Points Radius the arc 2 Defines the arc using two tangents and a radius of the Tgnts Radius arc COGO R9 533 STONEX Field Option Description 2 Tgnts Chrd Defines the arc using two tangents and the chord of the Lngt arc lt Start Point gt Choicelist The start point of the arc All points from COGO Data Job Name can be selected Available for lt Method 3 Points gt and lt Method 2 Points Radius gt lt Second Point gt Choicelist All points from COGO
165. F4 Aim at the remote point to be measured SURVEY Survey Remote Point Remote Pt page STORE F1 to measure and store the angle measurements and calculated coordi nates for the remote point 6 BASE F4 to return to SURVEY Survey Job Name and measure a new base point Survey Remote Point R9 723 AppendixA Menu Tree Menu tree MAIN MENU SURVEY PROGRAMS MANAGE JOBS DATA CODELISTS CONFIGURATION SETS REFLECTORS CONVERT EXPORT DATA FROM JOB EXPORT ASCII EXPORT DXF IMPORT DATA TO JOB IMPORT ASCII GSI IMPORT DXF CONFIG S T O N E X Menu Tree R9 724 SURVEY SETTINGS D TEMPLATES DISPLAY SETTINGS CODING amp LINEWORK SETTINGS OFFSETS TARGET CHECK INSTRUMENT SETTINGS EDM amp iLock SETTINGS SEARCH WINDOWS AUTOMATIC PRISM SEARCH TPS CORRECTIONS COMPENSATOR INSTRUMENT ID TELESCOPE ACCESSORIES GENERAL SETTINGS UNITS amp FORMATS WIZARD MODE USER MENU LANGUAGE LIGHTS DISPLAY BEEPS TEXT START UP amp POWER DOWN S T O N E X Menu Tree R9 725 INTERFACES GSI OUTPUT GEOCOM MODE EXPORT JOB TOOLS FORMAT MEMORY
166. ID Yes dr CONT F1 Point Code No 4 To confirm the selections and to return to the Point Height No 4 screen from where this screen was accessed Point CQ No SYMBL F3 To view all point symbols and their descriptions 02a f PAGE F6 CONT SYHBL PAGE To change to another page on this screen MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 436 Displayable point infor mation XX MapView Configuration Lines amp Areas page STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Show Points gt Yes or No Determines if points are displayed in MapView lt Point ID gt Yes or No Available for Show Points Yes Determines if the ID of a point is displayed lt Point Code gt Yes or No Available for lt Show Points Yes gt Determines if the code of a point is displayed lt Point Height gt Yes or No Available for lt Show Points Yes gt Determines if the height of a point is displayed lt Point CQ gt Yes or No Available for lt Show Points Yes gt Determines if the coordinate quality of a point is displayed 200 a Point ID gt Tree b lt Point Code gt 435 000 c lt Point Height gt 0 000 d lt Point CQ gt Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Lines amp Areas page Refer to paragraph XX MapView Configuration Lines amp Areas page Description of fields Field Option Description lt Show Lines gt Yes or No Dete
167. IF F4 when lt Azimuth gt or lt Offset gt is highlighted To add subtract multiply and divide values 4 COGO Intersection Input Input page The procedure to input the second known point and the azimuth is identical to the procedure for the first known point Repeat steps 2 and 3 CALC F1 to calculate the result COGO Brng Brng Results Result page Point ID gt The identifier for the COGO point depending on the point 15 1 ID template configured for Survey Pts in CONFIGURE ID Templates The point ID can be changed The calculated coordinates are displayed Type in a point ID COGO R9 501 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter STAKE F5 to access the Stakeout application program and stake out the calculated COGO point After staking and storing the COGO point COGO Brng Brng Results Result page is displayed 34 4 SHIFT INDIV F5 for an individual point ID independent of the ID template SHIFT RUN F5 changes back to the next ID from the config ured ID template PAGE F6 changes to the Code page COGO Brng Brng Results Code page lt Code gt lt Point Code gt The thematical code All codes of the job can be selected Type in a code if required 9 and 7 3 2 PAGE F6 changes to the Plot page 10 COGO Brng Brng Results Plot page Arrows point from the known points to the calculated COGO point 30 6 SHIFT QUIT F6 does not store the COGO po
168. Key Touch equivalent SHIFT CENTR F4 Tap on centre touch icon Refer to 30 4 3 Toolbar MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 457 30 7 2 Description Data displayed L Access step by step STONEX MapView in Staking Out Survey Mode When staking out a point in Stakeout application program the Map page is available The MapView survey mode is provided for this operation with some differences e With the RC9 active points can be selected using the touch screen as points to be staked e An arrow indicating the direction from the current position to the point to be staked is provided e A box provides information such as the distance to the stakeout point and the CUT FILL value so the point to be staked can be found For Stakeout application program e From lt Job gt and Stakeout Job gt all point symbols are shown in green point ID s in black and displayable lines and areas in a colour defined in MANAGE New Line or MANAGE Edit Line e Ifthe survey is to be orientated to a reference line arc the line is displayed in black The STAKEOUT XX Stakeout Map page is used as the example below The functions described are the same for all Map pages available when staking out Example access for MapView in survey mode Stakeout Step Description 1 Select Main Menu Programs Stakeout OR Press ON Highlight Stakeout CONT F1 OR MapView Interactive Displ
169. NFIGURE Coding amp Linework e A display mask with an input field for point codes must be configured Access A thematical code is typed in the field lt Code gt in a display mask of an application program OR lt Code gt lt Point Code gt in MANAGE New Point Code page in data management The procedure is similar for lines and areas OR lt Point Code gt in MANAGE Edit Point Point ID Code page in data management The procedure is similar for lines and areas OR in the field lt Auto Pt Code gt in SURVEY Survey Job Name Auto page if configured S T O N E X Coding R9 157 Thematical coding without codelist step by step STONEX Step Description Thematical coding in the Survey application program is explained in this step by step instruction A typical configuration set with a display mask for coding called Code is used SURVEY Survey Job Name Code page lt Point ID gt The identifier for the point for which codes and attribute values are to be typed in lt Point Code gt The name for the code lt Attribute n gt The attribute values for the code Type in a code and attribute values Up to eight attributes can be added This is configured in the display mask ALL F1 to measure angles and distance OR PAGE F6 to change to another page on this screen Coding R9 158 9 3 9 3 1 L Requirements Access FREECODE Select Free Code S
170. Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Display page This page contains the screen display settings for the R9 instrument Lights Display Beeps Text Lights Display Beeps Text nn Touch Screen Screen Beep Screen Illum On for 1 dE CONT F1 Key Illum Offs To accept changes and return to the screen from Contrast 50 where this screen was accessed Heating Off gt CALIB F5 To calibrate the touch screen at PAGE F6 CONT CALI B PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Touch Screen gt On or Off Turns touch screen on and off lt Screen Beep gt Off Soft or Controls the beep upon touching the touch screen Loud Screen Illum gt Always On On Controls the screen illumination to be on or on for the for 1 min On specified time after the last key was pressed for 2 min On for 5 min Config General Settings R9 295 CONFIGURE Lights Display Beeps Text Beeps page STONEX Field Option Description Key Illum Off Sameas Controls the keyboard illumination Screen or Always On Contrast From 096 to To adjust the screen brightness 100 96 lt Heating gt Off or Auto Turns screen heating on and off matic Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Beeps page Warning Beeps Key Beeps ERT T Hz Sectr Beep 0f f j Sector
171. O point and returns to COGO Inter section Input Input page 7 Are more COGO intersection calculations to be done e Ifyes repeat steps 1 to 7 32 6 1 Method in COGO Intersection Input Input page can be 32 6 3 or changed Refer to the relevant chapters for other COGO intersection 32 6 4 calculation method than Method Brng Dist e Ifno continue with step 8 COGO R9 507 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter 8 SHIFT QUIT F6 exit COGO calculation COGO R9 508 32 6 3 Description Diagram STONEX Intersection with Distance Distance The COGO intersection calculation distance distance calculates the intersection point of two circles The circles are defined by the known point as the centre point and the distance from the known point to the COGO point as the radius Elements that must be known are e the coordinates of two points e the distance from the known points to the COGO point The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job e may be manually occupied during the COGO calculation e may be entered Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used A Known P1 First known point N P2 Second known point r1 Radius as defined by the distance from P1 to P3 or P4 P4 r2 Radius as defined by the distance from P2 to SE P3 or P4 P3 Unknown P3 First COGO point P4 Second COGO point COGO R9 509
172. Points Offset is used in the following description The computation of offset points depends on the number of auto points in one chain One auto point No offset points are computed or stored Two auto points The configured offsets are applied perpendicular to the line between two auto points Survey Auto Points R9 704 STONEX P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 di d2 Three or more auto points The first offset points are computed perpendicular to the line between the first and the second auto point The last offset point is computed perpendicular to the line between the last auto point and the one before All other offset points are computed on a bearing The bearing is half of the angle between the last and the next measured auto point First auto point Second auto point First offset point for P1 Second offset point for P1 First offset point for P2 Second offset point for P2 Horizontal offset to the left Horizontal offset to the right Survey Auto Points R9 705 P1 First auto point P2 Second auto point P3 First offset point for P1 P4 Second offset point for P1 P5 Third auto point P6 First offset point for P2 P7 Second offset point for P2 P8 Fourth auto point P9 First offset point for P5 P10 Second offset point for P5 d1 Horizontal offset to the left d2 Horizontal offset to the right Q1 Angle between P1 and P5 Q2 Angle between P2 and P8 S T O N E X Survey Auto Points R9 706 36 4 2 Access
173. Points page is shown regardless of the number of points being displayed lt Rotate 180 gt Yes or No Available for Datum View Local To rotate the map by 180 The north arrow is not rotated and still orien tated towards the top of the screen lt Toolbar gt On or Off Determines if the toolbar of touch icons are displayed Refer to 30 4 3 Toolbar lt Curr Pos Info gt Determines if a certain information related to the current position is displayed in the lower left corner of the map only visible in survey mode lt None gt No information is displayed in the map Point ID Point ID of the current position Code Code of the current position Attrib 01 User defined attribute Attrib 02 User defined attribute Attrib 03 User defined attribute Attrib 04 User defined attribute S T O N E X MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 439 STONEX Field Option Attrib 05 Quality 3D Description User defined attribute Current 3D coordinate quality of the computed posi tion The following fields are relevant for Su rvey Mode lt Show Path gt Yes or No Displays the path of the reflector as a dashed line lt Center To gt Choicelist To centre the map on the reflector or the instrument Reflector To centre the map on the reflector For EDM mode standard fast or average the map will centre onto the last measured point For EDM mode tracking or synchrotrack the map will centre onto the curr
174. S 297 KEY 297 EEN eene 295 Eig 297 Bluetooth p 51 C TS ME e 347 Calculator operating mode ees 347 EE M PM 42 Change Face quick set EEN 25 Check R9 733 Backsight POiNt iarisnsiissnnsiianai a 34 Recorded point ee 34 Check amp Adjust Menu EEN 379 Check and adjust instrument ENEE 371 CHK uu 24 Circular level adjustment of instrument and tribrach 400 Circular level adjustment of prism pole ML Classification of points hierarchy Clear To Send ditte te i obige ehe Code Edit de A Thematical WV DC quamet dde Code and attribute mismatch Code filter for lines and areas Code group En Activate deactivate Manage NN Code mismatch Een STONEX Menag e 144 Codelist Description suene itunes eeh 135 a E 135 m R 136 System RAM eer 136 el niiina aeaiia aiiin A 130 Codelists directOLy ssis 729 Codes Manage IS 74 Point line area codes ENEE 141 Sort Codelist management eee 142 Data management COUN unteren PAULO eu cucine iie tnit rie te tiat ecc riter e inet COGO POINTS sees Free Dirett el OU E Using codelist Offset points Staked points T
175. SCII nennen 205 Format files directory ENEE 729 te Free code Len soe mitur Delete Free coding Record codes Select codes With codelist With direct input ENEE 163 ole alle E 419 Functions main MENU EEN 55 G General settings eiecit tat ie eee adt eee botte tuus 280 GeoCOM mode ENEE 330 Geometric DDID centena cerent tne recreare 270 GGO Creation ale 134 Grade display format EEN 282 Graphic elements in Stakeout application 663 Grid distance in COGO eene 475 GROUP Bang c Re 142 Coding R9 739 GSI Output een Word information GSI files directory ENEE H Height offset stakeout EEN 660 Height type Point to be staked enee 647 Hz collimation error c eene 374 I I 48 p 78 ID template Access configuration ENEE 228 Ir M 230 eler Edit ID templates Identification number STONEX IFACE IDE TW qur A E 210 Illumination REENEN 430 KeybOAEG Lenceria tri Er ete aii 296 Nude 295 iLock Measurement eese eeenen entente ttntnn tata NEEN 423 QUICK Set 24 Search m 424 MEG lO RM 424 Import In custom ASCII format In gl Brei suene eite d endis Ilium Include coordinate triplet in averaging seess 102 Increase point D ni 230 Increasing NE SE SW NW enee 28
176. STONEX Stonex R9 Technical Reference Manual Version 1 0 Purchase L Product identification Symbols Trademarks STONEX Introduction Congratulations on the purchase of a R9 instrument To use the product in a permitted manner please refer to the detailed safety directions in the User Manual The type and the serial number of your product are indicated on the type plate Enter the type and serial number in your manual and always refer to this information when you need to contact your agency or Stonex authorized service workshop Type Serial No The symbols used in this manual have the following meanings Type Description Ce Important paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they enable the product to be used in a technically correct and efficient manner e Stonex and the Stonex logo are trademarks of Stonex Limited e CompactFlash and CF are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation e Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners I nz i Introduction R9 2 Validity of this manual This manual applies to Stonex field software running on R9 instruments Due to the different instruments and equipment some parts of the manual may
177. Sets the temperature lt Atm Pressure gt or User input Sets the atmospheric pressure or the elevation above lt Elev above MSL gt mean sea level dependent on selection Rel Humidity or Userinput Sets the relative air humidity or the wet bulb tempera Temp Wet bulb gt ture dependent on selection Atmospheric Userinputor The atmospheric ppm is either set or calculated from ppm gt Output the above values S T O N E X Config Instrument Settings R9 269 CONFIGURE TPS Corrections GeomPPM page STONEX Next step PAGE F6 changes to the GeomPPM page The geometric distance correction geometric ppm is derived from the map projection distortion map projection ppm the height above reference datum correction height ppm and an individual correction individual ppm e The calculation of the map projection ppm follows the formula for the Transversal Mercator Projection The individual factors are the scale factor of the line of projection central meridian Gauss Kr ger 1 0 UTM 0 9996 etc and the offset from the line of projection e The calculation ofthe height ppm is derived from the height of the instrument station above the reference datum Normally this is the height above mean sea level MSL PS Corrections AtmosPPM GeomPPM Refraction Cale Scale Scale at C H 1 000000000000 Offset to C H 0 000 m Hap Proj ppm 0 0 CONT F1 Ht above Ref 0 000 m To accept chang
178. T F3 edits the highlighted point 7 3 3 REMOV F4 removes the highlighted point from the line The point itself is not deleted MORE F5 displays information about the point codes if stored with the line the time and the date of when the line was stored the 3D coor dinate quality the class and the flag for Linework 7 3 1 PAGE F6 changes to the Code page MANAGE Edit Line Line ID Code page Manage Data R9 111 STONEX Step Description The line code can be edited All line codes can be selected For lt Line Code lt None gt gt the line style can be changed The description of the code is shown as an output field The attributes are shown as output input or choicelist fields depending on their definition Refer to chapter NEW A F2 allows additional attributes to be created for this line code NAME F3 or VALUE F3 Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in To highlight lt Attribute n gt or the field for the attribute value The name of lt Attribute n gt can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in LAST F4 recalls the last used attribute values which were stored with this line code DEFLT F5 recalls the default attribute values for the selected code 10 STORE F1 stores the changes and returns to MANAGE Data Job Name Lines page An edited line retains the creation value for l
179. TONEX Free Coding Free Coding Using a Codelist In this chapter free coding using a codelist is explained for points Refer to 7 4 Line Area Management for information on coding lines areas e The job codelist contains free codes The user defined menu is configured to display the option Select Free Code Press USER and select Select Free Code to access the screen FREECODE Select Free Code Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key STORE F1 To store the free code and any associated attribute values and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed NEW F2 To create a new code Refer to 8 5 2 Creating a New Code ATRIB F3 02a t To type in attribute values and or add new STORE NEW ATRIB HORE attributes for the selected free code Coding R9 159 Free coding using a codelist step by step STONEX LAST F4 Available ifa free code has been previously used in the active job To select from a list of last used free codes The free codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list MORE F5 To display information about the code descrip tion the code group and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in the job SHIFT GROUP F4 To view create delete activate and deactivate code groups Refer to 8 6 Managing Code Groups SHIFT SORT F5 To sort codes by code name code description quick code or
180. TONEX Performing Linework The Survey application program is used here to explain Linework e A display mask with a choicelist for Linework must be configured e The Linework flags are defined in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Settings Linework Step1 Placing Linework in a display mask Step2 Defining the Linework flags Define ALLE Hask 3 Coding amp Linework Name Coding Linework Visible Begin Line Fixed Lines 3pt Curve PC 1st Line ReOpen Last Line JPND 2nd Line End Line END 3rd Line Cont Line Area CONT 4th Line Start Spline SPL 5th Line Line Space Full End Spline ENDSPLN 6th Line Line Space WE Cont Spline CONT SPL 0233 conT CLEAR went cont PAGE Linework R9 183 Performing Linework The most important keys are explained Survey active job ALL F1 Survey Code Map To measure and store distances and angles Point ID 0001 STOP F1 Code EBIT dd Available if EDM Mode Tracking and Code Type Point DIST F2 was pressed Stops the distance meas Linework urements F1 changes back to ALL DIST F2 To measure and display distances Available unless lt EDM Mode Tracking gt and or lt Log azar Auto Pts Yes gt after the tracking or logging is a started LALL DIsT REC SETAZ PAGE nc r3 To record data If lt EDM Mode Tracking and or Log Auto Pts Yes records measured point and continues tracking Description of field
181. URE Define Display Mask n Available for lt Display Mask gt being high General Checks Heights Logfile Orientate From Station Stake Hode Orthogonal ar Visual Guides Arrows amp Graphics dr Hessage Line 0f f gt lighted on General page Refer to 15 2 Display Settings Display Hask 2 PAGE F6 Closest Point No To change to another page on this screen Q2at SHIFT ABOUT F5 CONT DHASK JL PAGE To display information about the program name the version number the date of the version the copyright and the article number Stakeout R9 653 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Orientate gt Stakeout From Station To Station From North To North To Arrow To Last Point To Point Stake The reference direction to be used to stakeout points The stakeout elements and the graphical display shown in the Stakeout application program are based on this selection The direction of the orientation is from the instrument to the point to be staked The direction of the orientation is from the point to be staked to the instrument The direction of the orientation is from the North direc tion to the point to be staked The direction of the orientation is from the point to be staked to the North direction The direction of the orientation is from the current position to the point to be staked The graphical display shows an arr
182. Unless lt Display Mask None gt in SURVEY Configuration Remote Pt page this screen contains an additional user defined display mask REMOT F4 in SURVEY Survey Job Name after one point is measured Survey Remote Point Remote Pt Point ID AHt BaseRem 1 248 m Hz 55 0000 g V 37 0002 g STORE F1 Slope Dist 118 998 n Stores the remote point Stays in the SURVEY Horiz Dist 65 333 m Survey Remote Point screen Easting 49 680 ul BASE F4 2att Returns to SURVEY Survey Job Name The Q STORE BASE distance measurement is cleared Survey Remote Point R9 718 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Point ID gt User input Displays the point ID for the remote point The point ID in SURVEY Survey Remote Point is always identical to the point ID in SURVEY Survey Job Name lt AHt BasRem gt Output The elevation difference between the base point and the remote point lt Hz gt Output The current horizontal angle lt V gt Output The current vertical angle lt Slope Dist gt Output The current slope distance to the remote point calcu lated from the horizontal distance to the base point and the current vertical angle lt Horiz Dist gt Output The horizontal distance measured to the base point lt Easting gt Output Calculated Easting coordinate for the remote point lt Northing gt Output Calculated Northing coord
183. a free code during a survey Refer to 9 3 Free Coding DEL F4 To delete the highlighted object or free code MORE F5 To display information about the type of data recorded the time and the date of when it was stored or for lines and areas when they were created and the codes if stored with any object CONT F1 returns to the screen from where MANAGE Data Log Job Name was accessed Manage Data R9 117 7 6 7 6 1 Description STONEX Point Sorting and Filters Sorting and Filters for Points Lines and Areas The sort settings define the order of the objects in the active job The filter settings define the objects to be viewed Three types of filters are available Point filter An active point filter shows selected points in MANAGE Data Job Name Points page Line filter An active line filter shows selected lines in MANAGE Data Job Name Lines X page Area filter An active area filter shows selected areas in MANAGE Data Job Name Areas X page The sort and filter settings are stored in the job They are remembered after turning off the instrument and are copied to a new job When a job becomes active then the sort and filter settings of this job are saved in the SystemRAM If the CompactFlash card is formatted then these last used sort and filter settings are used for the job Default Changing the active job does influence the sort settings for the objects The filter settings are
184. active job To select from a list of last used codes The codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list MORE F5 To display information about the code descrip tion the code group the code type and the quick code if codes with quick codes exist in the job SHIFT GROUP F4 To view create delete activate and deactivate code groups Refer to 8 6 Managing Code Groups SHIFT SORT F5 To sort codes by code name code description quick code or the last used STONEX Coding R9 154 Thematical coding with codelist step by step STONEX The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to paragraph Access to access XX Select Point Code 2 MANAGE Select Point Code All point codes from the job codelist which belong to the active code 8 6 groups are available for selection Point codes marked with B have attributes attached Highlight the desired code ATRIB F3 to access XX Enter Attributes XX Enter Attributes Point Code gt The name ofthe selected code for which attribute values are to be typed in Code Desc gt The detailed description of the selected code If configured for the selected code input fields for attribute values are available Type in the attribute values Attribute values for attributes of type e normal can
185. affects Hz angles The affection is 0 in the horizon and increases with steep sights To determine this error itis necessary to point to a target located significantly below or above the horizontal plane To avoid influences from the Hz collimation error c this has to be deter mined prior to the tilting axis error S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 375 Vertical index error i a Mechanical vertical axis of the instrument also called standing axis b Axis perpendicular to the vertical axis c V 90 reading in a specific face d Vertical index error A vertical index error i exists if the 0 mark ofthe vertical circle reading doesn t coincide with the mechanical vertical axis of the instrument also called standing axis The V index error i is a constant error that affects all vertical angle readings Compensator index errors l t a Mechanical vertical axis ofthe instrument also called standing axis b Plumb line c Longitudinal component l of the compensator index error d Transversal component t of the compensator index error S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 376 iLock collimation errors STONEX The compensator index errors l t occur if the vertical axis of the instrument and the plumb line are parallel but the zero points of the compensator and the circular level do not coincide The calibration procedure electronically adjusts the zero point of the comp
186. age lt Number of Segments gt Describes the number of resulting segments for the line including the remaining segment if it applies COGO R9 530 STONEX Step Description Last Segment Lgth gt Available for Method Segment Length The length of the remaining segment Refer to chapter STAKE F5 to access the Stakeout application program and stake out the calculated COGO point SHIFT QUIT F6 or ESC return to COGO Segmentation Results Result page PAGE F1 to access COGO Segmentation Results Plot page The known points defining the line and those created on the line are shown in black 30 6 CONT F1 returns to COGO Line Calculations Input COGO R9 531 32 8 32 8 1 Description Diagram STONEX COGO Calculation Arc Calculations Method Arc Calculation Arc Centre The COGO arc calculation arc centre calculates the coordinates of the centre of the arc Elements that must be known are coordinates of three points OR e coordinates of two points e radius to the two points The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered PO Instrument station P1 Start Point P2 End Point P3 Arc Centre d1 lt Arc Radius gt d2 lt Arc Length gt COGO R9 532 L Access COGO Arc Calculations Input Input page STON
187. airs are automatically positioned to the reflector when for example ALL F1 or DIST F2 is pressed No Aim search is started e Ce The displayed values are always related to the centre of the prism after ALL F1 or DIST F2 is pressed For ALL F1 these values are displayed only shortly after the key press The crosshairs of the telescope may not fully coincide with the centre of the prism when viewed through the telescope The remaining iLock offsets for the horizontal and vertical angles are measured by the iLock sensor and applied to the measured and displayed angles S T O N E X Functions R9 423 iLock search iLock window Dynamic iLock window STONEX p If the reflector is not in the field of view when ALL F1 or DIST F2 is pressed an iLock search is started For the iLock search the Aim window is scanned line by line starting at the oe al current telescope position If the e prism was not found RETRY F5 can be L P pressed to search for the reflector in an increased area e prism was found The iLock measurement is performed to position the telescope to the centre of the prism The iLock window is a relative window based on the current telescope position The horizontal and vertical extent can be defined Pressing ALL F1 DIST F2 or R GO F5 starts an iLock search in the iLock window For Search with iLock gt after loss o
188. al heights but no coordi _ Points are imported without coordinates but nates in file with local height and code if available Coordinates but no heights in Points are imported without height but with file coordinates and code if available Neither coordinates nor No import heights in file No point ID s in file No import DXF Import variables Block point line arc polyline Local coordi Format definition Units Heights Convert Import Data to Job nates No free codes no attributes Fixed format X Y Z Not predefined Z value imported as orthometric R9 215 Format Characteristic Description Specialities Neither coordinates nor No import heights in file Checks Points are always imported with the class CTRL and a coordinate quality of Refer to 7 3 1 Terminology While importing points to a job checks are performed against point ID class and coding of points already existing in the job Case 1 Point already exists in database with class CTRL Overwrite existing point _No e Point not imported p Point imported coordinates and code information overwritten Case 2 Point already exists in database with a class other than CTRL Add point to database E Point not imported P S T O N E X Convert Import Data to Job R9 216 Is a code attached to the point Point imported p
189. and EDIT F3 Refer to 8 5 3 Editing a Code code groups are to be accessed SHIFT GROUP F4 Refer to 8 6 Managing Code Groups Manage Codelists R9 143 8 5 2 Create a new code step by step STONEX Creating a New Code The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter Refer to 8 5 1 Accessing MANAGE Codes to access MANAGE Codes NEW F2 to access MANAGE New Code MANAGE New Code lt Code gt A unique name for the new code The name may be up to 16 characters long and may include spaces Input required Code Desc gt A detailed description of the code Input optional Group The code group to which the code is to be assigned All code groups from MANAGE Code Groups can be selected Code Type gt This field contains a choicelist where the code type Thematical code Point Line Area or Free code Free can be selected The selected option will define how the code will be used Selecting a code type allows a code to remain unique Code can have the same value but with a different Code Type within the same codelist Linework Available for Code Type Point only This field contains a choicelist to allow a new line or new area to be opened whenever the point code is newly selected This functionality is also available wh
190. and areas are shown on separate pages Selected sort and filter settings apply Ce SHIFT LOG F5 accesses MANAGE Data Log Job Name To view edit 7 5 and delete points lines and areas stored with the job Points lines and areas are sorted by time in one list PAGE F6 changes to the Codelist page 5 Are codes stored in the job e Ifno continue with step 6 Manage Jobs R9 71 STONEX Step Description e Ifyes continue with step 8 Refer to chapter No codes are stored in the job MANAGE Edit Job Job Name Codelist page lt Codelist lt None gt gt This default setting can be changed Choosing a codelist copies the codes to the job All codelists from Main Menu Manage Codelists can be selected PAGE F6 changes to the Avge page Continue with step 10 Codes are stored in the job MANAGE Edit Job Job Name Codelist page lt Codelist gt If codes had been copied from a System RAM codelist the name of the codelist is displayed If codes have been typed in then the name of the active job is displayed IMPRT F2 adds additional codes from a new codelist to the job The name of this codelist is copied to the job co SHIFT EXPRT F2 copies codes from the job to an existing or new codelist CODES F4 views codes currently stored in the job 6 5 PAGE F6 changes to the Avge page 10 MANAGE Edit Job Job Name Avge page The functionality on this page
191. ansferred from the CompactFlash card to the System RAM Refer to 22 Tools Transfer Objects Manage Codelists R9 137 8 3 Access MANAGE Codelists STONEX Accessing Codelist Management Select Main Menu Manage Codelists OR From a choicelist in some screens for example MANAGE New Job Codelist page Listed are all codelists stored in the System RAM CONT F1 To return to the screen from where this screen was accessed If this screen was accessed from a E choicelist the codes from the highlighted road survey 17 11 05 codelist are copied to the active job NEW F2 To create a codelist Refer to 8 4 Creating Editing a Codelist EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted codelist Refer to 8 4 02a t TONS i Codelist CONT NEW EDIT DEL HORE pr ra To delete the highlighted codelist MORE F5 To display information aboutthe creator and the date of when the codelist was created Manage Codelists R9 138 Next step IF a codelist THEN is to be selected highlight the desired codelist CONT F1 copies the codes of the codelist to the active job closes the screen and returns to the screen from where MANAGE Codelists was accessed is to be created NEW F2 Refer to 8 4 Creating Editing a Codelist is to be edited highlight the codelist and EDIT F3 Refer to 8 4 Creating Editing a Codelist S T O N E X Manage Codelists R9 139
192. are remembered allowing the point to be staked out 8 STAKEOUT XX Stakeout Stakeout R9 665 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Check the reflector height 9 Continue with step 9 from paragraph Stake out in orthogonal from station mode step by step Stakeout R9 666 34 4 3 Description Orthogonal from and to station Le Access STONEX Staking Out in Orthogonal Mode Points can be staked out using orthogonal values to guide to the point to be staked Values are relative to the line defined by station and current position The stakeout elements are a hori zontal distance forwards backwards a horizontal distance right left and a cut fill The values are calculated between the current position and the point to be staked The values are calculated either from the station to the point or from the point to the station depending on the setting of lt Stake Mode gt PO P1 P2 di d2 d3 Station Current position Point to be staked Go FORWARD gt 4 t or Go BACK gt 1 4 Go RIGHT gt gt or Go LEFT gt lt CUT gt or lt FILL gt lt Stake Mode Ortho from Stn gt is configured in STAKEOUT Configuration General page Refer to 34 3 Configuring Stakeout Refer to 34 2 Accessing Stakeout to access STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Stakeout R9 667 STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Stake page STONEX The pages shown are those from a ty
193. ast used settings are automatically recalled One port can only connect to one device at a time One port may be used by more than one interface at a time S T O N E X Interfaces Ports Devices R9 307 REES IF more information THEN is required on interfaces Refer to 18 2 Interfaces ports Refer to 18 3 Ports devices Refer to 18 4 Devices EDIT F3 Refer to 19 Config Interfaces Editing The Interface interface parameters CTRL F4 Refer to 20 Config Interfaces Controlling The Device device parameters S T O N E X Interfaces Ports Devices R9 308 18 2 18 2 1 Description Available interfaces STONEX Interfaces Overview of Interfaces The instrument has various interfaces configured to be used with a port and a device The configuration varies depending on the individual application Interfaces Interface Port GSI Output GeoCOHM Mode 1 Export Job at CONT EDIT CTRL USE Interfaces Ports Devices R9 309 18 2 2 Access CONFIGURE Interfaces STONEX Accessing CONFIGURE Interfaces Select Main Menu Config Interfaces OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key The screen gives an overview of all interfaces with the currently assigned port and device Interfaces X CONT F1 Interface To return to the screen from where this screen was acces
194. asurement data displayed e information related to some types of measurement data e the order in which coordinates are displayed Access Select Main Menu Config General Settings V Units amp Formats OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Manage ment S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 280 CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Units page Units amp Formats Distance Unit Distance Dec Angle Unit 400 gon 4 Angle Dec 4 Decimals dr Grade Unit h v4 CONT F1 Area Unit To accept changes and return to the screen from Volume Unit m du where this screen was accessed Q2aft PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Distance Unit gt The units shown for all distance and coordinate related fields Metre m Metres m Int Ft fi International feet fi storage in US feet Int Ft Inch fi International feet fi inches and 1 8 inches 0 00 0 8 fi storage in US feet US Ft ft US feet ft US Ft Inch ft US feet inches and 1 8 inches 0 00 0 8 fi ft S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 281 Field Option Description lt Distance Dec gt From The number of decimal places shown for all distance 0 Decimalto and coordinate related fie
195. asurements in the daily work it is important To check and adjust the instrument from time to time To take high precision measurements during the check and adjust procedures To measure targets in two faces Some of the instrument errors are eliminated by averaging the angles from both faces To follow the four advices below CE During the manufacturing process the instrument errors are carefully determined and set to zero As mentioned above these errors can change and it is highly recommended to redeter mine them in the following situations Before the first use Before every high precision survey After rough or long transportations After long working periods After long storage periods If the temperature difference between current environment and the temperature at the last calibration is more than 20 C Ce oi Before determining the instrument errors the instrument has to be levelled up using the electronic level SHIFT F12 to access STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet Refer to 28 7 STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet The tribrach the tripod and the underground should be very stable and secure from vibrations or other disturbances STONEX Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 372 Ce E The instrument should be protected from direct sunlight in order to avoid thermal A warming in general and especially on one side of the instrument housing It is also recommended to avoid strong heat shimmer and air
196. ately two 27 1 minutes per C difference compared to the storage place 1 TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 395 STONEX Step Description Select the option Compensator I t Refer to chapter TOOLS Compensator Adjustment MEAS F1 to measure the first face No target has to be aimed at Motorised instruments change to the other face and 180 release a measurement automatically If one or more errors are bigger than the predefined limits the proce dure has to be repeated All measurements of the current run are rejected and are not averaged with the results from previous runs TOOLS Comp Adjustment Accuracy lt No of Meas gt Shows the number of runs executed One run consists of a measurement in face I and face II lt o l Comp and o t Comp gt show the standard deviations of the determined adjustment errors The standard deviations can be calcu lated from the second run onwards It is recommended to measure at least two runs Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 396 Step Description Refer to chapter MEAS F5 if more runs have to be added Continue with step 2 OR CONT F1 to accept the measurements and to access TOOLS Comp Adjustment Results No more runs can be added later TOOLS Comp Adjustment Results Comp Adjustment Results CONT F1 To accept and record the new determined
197. ation about the point code the 3D coordinate quality and class the time the point was stored and the date the point was stored CONT F1 returns to MANAGE Data Job Name Map page with the focus on the selected point MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 450 Selecting a point using the touch screen step by step STONEX Step Description Display 8 DONE F2 exits the focus tool Bez pret NM Ska A N NN an at CONT Focus EDIT Z00M Z00M PAGE Step Description Display 1 Refer to 30 5 1 MapView in Map Mode to access MANAGE Data Job Name Map page If no point field is highlighted on the previous page when the Map page is accessed then any point that is selected will be assigned to the first point field on the previous page the second point to the second point field etc If a point field is highlighted when the Map page is accessed then the point selected will be assigned to that field Tap on the point to be selected Points Lines 0 Areas 0 Map Le Ne i By m N 02a t CONT Focus EDIT zoot zoon PAGE When there are multiple points within the same area and the precise selection is unclear tapping on the point will access XX Select Point Have multiple points been selected MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 451 STONEX Step Description e Ifyes continue with st
198. ault ENEE 195 Turn into user defined default sss 195 Us r defined E 193 Wizard Convert Coordinate R9 735 Quality 25 ere 89 Coordinate triplet sssini iii 84 E A 89 Create Area Code Codelist Device ID template Line Point Reflector CTRL RCS Mode ugeet eege 334 RS232 dua eimi itd tete eee 336 CTR class inue tel Sh eL Ma e dee 84 CISen 318 CURN T pesana 180 D NEU 78 Data EE EIERE eco rnc tem Lote ee ER nca 78 EE 79 Data Das a 728 Deactivate Code filter iie scent peris acres 126 Code group 126 STONEX Default reflectors s eisissicciissecossicsasecstoacesssssccsastcunsestseseniezerceseeesesessaie 200 Default recall Aim window settings ENEE 264 rns 695 Configuration Set ENEE 195 DEVICES AE On E Instrument ID Define display mask Delete Application program sesenta 341 CODE Code group Cod list enne Configuration Set ENEE 194 Coordinate triplet EEN 102 Elle eec a tecti dd lt ad cus 366 Format file Check and adjust iniiis 383 COGO enceinte Data Export Data export et E KE EE From Data Log ID template EE Inverse COGO calculation R9 736 ANB WARE C 343 Configuration ENEE 293 Licence key aee neue E titres tripod 369 IHC 81 Logfile Check and adjust ENEE 383 605 COGO m
199. ay Feature R9 458 STAKEOUT XX Stakeout Map page STONEX Step Description Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Press STAKE F5 from another application program for example COGO 2 CONT F1 to access STAKEOUT XX Stakeout PAGE F6 until STAKEOUT XX Stakeout Map page is active The softkeys described below are specific to MapView in survey mode staking out Refer to 30 4 1 Softkeys for descriptions of the standard softkeys Orthogonal Stakeout Stake Map DIST 6 288 4 421 fei A EN d SE I 02a f SHIFT CENTR F4 ALL DIST REC ZOON Z00H PAGE To centre the screen around the reflector MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 459 Description of fields Field Option Description lt DIST gt Output Horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked lt CUT gt Output The negative height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be staked lt FILL gt Output The positive height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be staked S T O N E X MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 460 30 7 3 Description Selecting a line step by step STONEX Selecting Lines and Areas Selecting a line or area in the survey mode of MapView is possible using the touch screen The functionalit
200. ay is the time between the initial key press and when the key starts repeating For example in numeric mode press and hold 1 Behaviour on screen 1 delay 11111111111 In alpha mode the focus stays on one field and scrolls through the avail able characters S delay TU7STU 7 Time between the initial key press and when the key starts repeating Alphanumeric numeric CE or arrow keys in all general screens are delayed by the specified time S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 298 Field Option Description lt Alpha Mode gt Function Keys Alphanumeric input can either be through function or or Numeric numeric keys Keys lt Deflt aNum gt Up to 6 choices Available if Alpha Mode Function Keys Sets the set of extra characters available through aNUM or on F1 F6 whenever an entry is made The choices available depend on the character sets loaded on the instrument and the language configured to be used on the instrument Next step PAGE F6 changes to the next page S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 299 17 6 Start Up amp Power Down Description STONEX e The settings on this screen e define the instrument start up screen define the behaviour ofthe instrument when starting up and when powering down e define a PIN code which needs to be entered when starting up the instrument Start Up e The screen entered after turning on the in
201. b to another Device for information on how to export data via RS232 e The settings on this screen define the port and the device to which the data should be exported Select Main Menu Config Interfaces Highlight Export Job EDIT F3 OR Select Main Menu Convert Export Data from Job Set Export To RS232 gt IFACE F5 The availability of the fields depend on the setting for lt Device gt Export Job Interface Use Device Yes hE Port Port 1 4p Device RS232 CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed 02a f DEVCE F5 CONT DEVCE To create select edit or delete a device Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 332 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Use Device gt Yes or No Activates the interface lt Port gt Output Available if lt Use Interface Yes gt Port to be used lt Device gt Output The device currently assigned to the selected port within the active configuration set The device which is selected determines the availability of the next fields Next step CONT F1 returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Export Job Interface was accessed S T O N E X Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 333 20 20 1 Description Configure RH9 connec tion step by step STONEX Config Interfaces Controlling The Device Radios for
202. be known The points e may be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered manually STONEX COGO R9 481 32 4 2 Starting step by step Calculating STONEX Inverse Between Two Known Points Pt Pt Step Description 1 COGO Henu 1 Inverse 2 Traverse 3 Intersections o Inverse Pept 1 Inverse Pt Pt 2 Inverse Pt Line 3 Inverse Pt Are Inverse Input Inverse Map From PTT gt To 200 STORE F1 Azimuth 150 0000 gs To store the result HDist Grid 141 424 n SURVY F5 Height 0 000 n T kn int for the calculati Slope Dist e 441 424 n o measure a known point for the calculation SHIFT CONF F2 Grade 1 0 hv m To configure the program 02a t PAGE F6 STORE SURVY PAGE To change to another page on the screen COGO R9 482 Description of fields Field Option Description lt From gt or lt To gt Choicelist The point ID of the two known points To type in coor dinates for a known point open the choicelist Press NEW F2 to create a new point lt Azimuth gt Output The direction from the first point to the second point lt HDist XX gt Output The horizontal distance between the two points lt AHeight gt Output The height difference between the two points lt Slope Dist gt Output The slope distance between the two points
203. be typed in e fixed cannot be edited Ce NEW A F2 to add a new attribute of type normal and of value type text Coding R9 155 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter NAME F3 or VALUE F3 Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in To highlight lt Attribute n gt or the field for the attribute value Attributes of type mandatory or fixed and of value type real or integer online help must be created in Stonex Tools in Stonex Tools Ce Up to twenty attributes can be added Ce LAST F4 recalls the last used attribute values for the selected code Ce DEFLT F5 recalls the default attribute values for the selected code 6 CONT F1 returns to the screen from where XX Select Point Code was accessed Ce The point code and any associated attribute values are stored when the point is stored Ce Ifapointwith the same point ID exists in the job the codes the attribute 9 6 names and the attribute values of the new and the existing point must be identical Should they not be identical a screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected Coding R9 156 9 2 2 Thematical Coding without Codelist Ce Thematical coding without codelist for points is explained in this chapter Refer to 7 4 Line Area Management for information on coding lines areas Requirements e Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt in CO
204. below are specific to MapView in map mode Refer to 30 4 1 Softkeys for descriptions of the standard softkeys X FOCUS F2 or DONE F2 To activate the focus tool and select a point without using the touch screen Refer to 30 5 2 Selecting Points Lines and Areas EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted point s parameters Accesses MANAGE Edit Point Point ID SHIFT CENTR F4 To centre the screen around the point with the GE current focus or the focus tool if DONE F2 is a visible CONT Focus EDIT z00 z00n PAGE SHIFT FILTR F5 Available for FOCUS F2 To change the filter settings Accesses MANAGE Sorts amp Filters Touch screen functions Key Touch equivalent FOCUS F2 Tap on a point MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 448 30 5 2 Selecting Points Lines and Areas Description Select a point using the softkeys step by step STONEX Selecting a point line or area in the map mode of MapView is possible using both the softkeys and the touch screen The functionality of all screens and field are similar for the selecting of a point line or area The step by step instructions for selecting a point using the softkeys can be applied for lines and areas Step Description Display 1 Refer to 30 5 1 MapView in Map Mode to access MANAGE Data Job Name Map page L If no point field is highlighted on the previous page when the Map page is accessed the
205. but keeps it deactivated lt Digits gt 1 2 0r3 Available unless lt Quick Code Never gt Sets the mostly used number of digits for the quick code Quick codes with less digits can still be used While typing a quick code during a survey using ENTER after typing one or two digits of the quick code indicates the end of the input lt Rec Free Code gt After Point or Determines if a free code measured with a quick code is Before Point stored before or after the point This field is disabled when lt Quick Code Never gt lt Attributes gt Default Values Last Used Determines the attribute values displayed under certain circumstances This is applicable to both the storing and displaying of attribute values When available the default attribute values as stored in the job are displayed and stored When available the last used attribute values as stored in the job are displayed and stored Config Survey Settings R9 248 STONEX Field Option Description lt Mand Attribs gt Always The screen XX Enter Mandatory Attribute will always Prompt appear when codes having one or more attributes of attribute type mandatory are being stored Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed can only be created in Stonex Tools Only If No The screen XX Enter Mandatory Attribute will only Value appear when codes having one or more attributes of attribute type mandatory are bei
206. c procedure for transferring objects between the CompactFlash card and the System RAM Refer to Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device for information about file types and locations of files on the CompactFlash card Select Main Menu Tools Transfer Objects XX The available fields on the screen depend on the option selected in Main Menu Tools Transfer Objects 12 01 Gell 7 amp TOOLS STD uo ransfer Codelists x From CF Carai To System RAN dr Codelist codelist 0014 CONT F1 To transfer an object and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed ALL F3 Available for some transfer object options To transfer all objects Description of fields Field Option Description lt From gt Memory device to transfer object from CF card Transfer from CompactFlash card Tools Transfer Objects R9 339 STONEX Field Option Description System RAM Transfer from System RAM Available unless object to transfer is a job Internal Transfer from internal memory Memory lt To gt Output Memory device to transfer object to Memory device not selected in lt From gt lt Codelist gt Choicelist To select the codelist to be transferred lt Config Set gt Choicelist To select the configuration set to be transferred lt Format File gt Choicelist To select the format files to be transferred lt Job gt Choicelist To select the job to be
207. celist The active configuration set All configuration sets from Main Menu Manage Configuration Sets can be selected lt Reflector gt Choicelist The reflector currently set in the selected configura tion set All reflectors from Main Menu Manage Reflectors can be selected lt Add Constant gt Output The additive constant stored with the chosen reflector Stakeout R9 651 Next step IF the Stakeout THEN application program is to be accessed CONT F1 accepts the changes and accesses Stakeout application program Refer to 34 4 Staking Out CONF F2 Refer to 34 3 Configuring Stakeout is to be configured S T O N E X Stakeout R9 652 34 3 Access STAKEOUT Configuration General page STONEX Configuring Stakeout Select Main Menu Programs Stakeout In STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin press CONF F2 to access STAKEOUT Configuration OR Press ON Highlight Stakeout CONT F1 In STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin press CONF F2 to access STAKEOUT Configuration OR Press SHIFT CONF F2 in STAKEOUT XX Stakeout This screen consists of the General page the Checks page the Heights page and the Logfile page The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for all pages unless otherwise stated CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed DMASK F3 Accesses CONFIG
208. cks onto the prism and follows its move ments iLock offsets are continuously applied to the angle measurements When the instrument loses lock to the reflector a search is executed with iLock Refer to 16 Config Instrument Settings and to 3 Quick Settings SHIFT USER for more information If the speed of the reflector is too fast the target may be lost Make sure that the speed does not exceed the figure given in the technical data lt Automation Robotic gt The instrument is not yet locked onto the reflector and the iLock sensor is not active Pressing ALL F1 DIST F2 R GO F5 or CONT F1 in QUICK SET Orientation With Compass QUICK SET Positioning Hz V QUICK SET Move by Joystick or QUICK SET Check Recorded Pt Backsight Pt the iLock is used to find the reflector When the reflector is found the instrument locks onto the reflector The instrument follows the moving reflector The iLock sensor is active As long as the instrument is locked on iLock offsets are continuously applied to the angle meas urements If the instrument loses lock to the prism the instrument may search for the prism with iLock When the instrumentis locked onto a reflector lock may be lost if the movement of the reflector is too fast for the instrument to follow or the reflector is hidden behind an object After lock is lost the prediction is used to find the prism again Refer to paragraph Prediction for more information Functions
209. code The flags defined on this screen are linked to the options available for lt Linework gt in a display mask of an application program The selection for lt Linework gt in a display mask determines the flag stored with a point The availability of lt Linework gt in a display mask is configured in CONFIGURE Define Display Mask n Refer to 10 Linework for information on Linework Config Survey Settings R9 250 Coding amp Linework Coding Linework Begin Line 3pt Curve PC ReOpen Last Line JPND End Line END Cont Line Area CONT Start Spline SPL CONT F1 End Spline ENDSPLN To accept changes and return to the screen from Cont Spline CONT SPL where this screen was accessed 02a 7 PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description Begin Line gt User input Opens a new line when the next point is stored Any lines which are currently open are closed The point may or may not be stored with a point code lt 3pt Curve gt User input Stores the linework flag for a curve through the next three measured points and continues a line area lt ReOpen Last User input Opens the last used line again Line gt lt End Line gt User input Closes all open lines lt Cont Line Area gt User input Indicates a line area is open lt Start Spline gt User input Stores the linework flag for beginning a sp
210. creen Type Description RPN Reverse Polish Notation This operating mode was developed as a way of writing mathematical expres sions without using parenthesis and brackets Many scientific calculators for example Hewlett Packard calculators are implemented with this operating mode Values are entered and kept in a working stack Standard This operating mode is based on the principles of conventional pocket calcu lators There is no stacking of values S T O N E X Tools Calculator R9 347 24 2 Accessing the Calculator Access Select Main Menu Tools Calculator OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Press CALC in any screen when editing an input field for numeric characters such as lt Azimuth gt in COGO Traverse Input Refer to 24 4 4 Calling and Closing the Calculator from an Input Field for Numeric Characters S T O N E X Tools Calculator R9 348 24 3 Configuring the Calculator Access step by step Step Description 1 Refer to 24 2 Accessing the Calculator to access TOOLS XX Calculator 2 SHIFT CONF F2 to access TOOLS Calculator Configuration TOOLS Calculator Configuration Calculator Configuration Qperatng Mode Standard dy Angle Unit GRAD dl Display Dec PSSST CONT F1 02a To accept changes and return to the screen from CONT where this screen was accessed Description o
211. culate the inverse between two points Second Point 2044 LAST F4 End Point 202 To select the values for distance and offset from previous COGO Inverse calculations SURVY F5 Offset Point 101 4 To measure a known point for the calculation SHIFT CONF F2 Q2at To confi gure the program CALC INV _ LAST SURVY PAGE zuer woprr r4 To modify the original azimuth distance or offset value PAGE F6 To change to another page on the screen COGO R9 486 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Method gt 3 Points or 2 Points Radius or 2 Tgnts Radius or 2 Tgnts Arc Lngt or 2 Tgnts Chrd Lngt The method for calculating the inverse result lt Start Point gt Choicelist The point ID defining the start of the arc lt Second Point gt Choicelist The point ID defining a second point on the arc lt End Point gt Choicelist The point ID defining the end of the arc lt Arc Length gt User Input The arc length lt Azimuth gt Output The direction from the first point to the second point lt Chord Length gt User Input The chord length of the arc lt HDist XX gt Output The horizontal distance between the two points lt Offset Point gt Choicelist The point ID defining an offset to the arc lt PI Point gt Choicelist The point ID defining the intersection of the tangents lt Point 1 gt Choicelist The point ID with PI Poi
212. d lt EDM Mode Tracking gt is set and the slope distance is constantly updated lt Hz gt Output The current horizontal angle lt V gt Output The current vertical angle Next step IF THEN auto points are to be START F1 Then for Log By User Decides gt REC F3 whenever an logged auto point is to be stored Offset points areto be OFST1 F4 or OFST2 F5 Refer to 36 4 Offset Points of Auto Points configured S T O N E X Survey Auto Points R9 703 36 4 36 4 1 Description Computation of offset points STONEX Offset Points of Auto Points Overview Offset points can be created with auto points when auto points are stored to the database can be to the left or to the right of auto points are automatically computed with the logging of auto points if configured form a chain relative to the chain of auto points to which they are related Subsequently computed chains are independent from each other can be coded independently of auto points have the same time of when they were stored as the auto points to which they are related have the same coding functionality properties and averaging functionality as auto points Refer to 36 1 Overview Up to two offset points can be related to one auto point The screens for the configuration of offset points are identical except for the title Auto Points Offset 1 and Auto Points Offset 2 For simplicity the title Auto
213. d The average point has the higher priority A change in codes must be an overall change for the average point Example One of the measured coordinate triplets has a wrong point ID and should not be included in the average By editing the point ID the point is renamed and no longer contributes to the average DEL F4 To delete the highlighted coordinate triplet The average is recomputed MORE F5 To change between time and date of when the point was stored and the 3D coordinate quality S T O N E X Manage Data R9 102 STONEX PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT DIFFS F5 Available for lt Averaging Mode Absolute Diffs gt and Yes is set in the Use column for exactly two measurements To display the abso lute coordinate differences Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by 9 Description of columns Column Description Use The use of a measured coordinate triplet in the averaging Auto The coordinate triplet is included in the averaging computation if within the averaging limit defined in MANAGE New Job Avge page or in MANAGE Edit Job Job Name Avge page e Yes The coordinate triplet is always included in the averaging computation even if it would fall outside the averaging limit defined in MANAGE New Job Avge page or in MANAGE Edit Job Job Name Avge page e No The coordinate triplet is never included in the averaging computation The coordinate t
214. d d CL0001 e OSCL0001 f CL00010S S T O N E X Survey Auto Points R9 712 Field procedure step by step STONEX The default display mask for SURVEY Survey Job Name Auto page is used lt Distance Unit Metres m gt in CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Units page An ID template for the auto points is configured Refer to 15 1 6 Working Example for information on how to configure ID templates Step Description 1 Main Menu Survey 2 SURVEY Survey Begin Select a job a reflector and a configuration set with the settings mentioned above CONF F2 to access SURVEY Configuration SURVEY Configuration Auto Points page Log Auto Pts Yes Log By Distance Log Every 5 0000 CONT F1 to return to SURVEY Survey Begin CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name PAGE F6 until the Auto page is active OFST1 F4 to configure the offset points for the right side of the road Sio EM EA SURVEY Auto Points Offset 1 General page lt Store Offset1 Yes gt lt Horiz Offset 3 0000 gt lt Height Offset 0 3000 gt Survey Auto Points R9 713 Step Description lt Identifier OS gt lt Prefix Suffix Prefix gt 10 OFST2 F2 to configure the offset points for the left side of the road 11 SURVEY Auto Points Offset 2 General page lt Store Offset2 Yes gt lt Horiz Offset 3 0000 gt lt Height Offs
215. d d1 Stake out element d2 Stake out element d3 Stake out element Stakeout R9 646 Stakeout modes Le Point types Height type Height source Coding of staked points STONEX Points can be staked using different modes e Polar mode e Orthogonal mode The points to be staked must exist in a job on the active memory device or can be typed in It is possible to stake e Position only points e Height only points e Points with full sets of coordinates Height type of the point to be staked Orthometric Heights can be taken into account from the vertical component of a coordinate triplet Codes can be attached to staked points Refer to 9 Coding for information on coding The behaviour of the coding functionality depends on the e selected lt Stakeout Job gt as the job with the points to be staked e selected lt Job gt as the active job definition of a display mask with input fields for coding and attributes IF lt Stakeout Job gt and AND a display mask for THEN lt Job gt point codes and attributes are identical is used the point code and attributes attached to the point to be staked are suggested for the staked point They can be changed Stakeout R9 647 Properties of staked points STONEX IF lt Stakeout Job gt and AND a display mask for THEN lt Job gt point codes and attributes are identical is not used th
216. d by a resection calculation e For standard application programs the distance is corrected on account of atmospheric influences The geometrical correction and the projection distortions are set to 0 00 Heights are reduced with the standard refraction coefficient e Refer to R9 User Manual for information on calculations Access Select Main Menu Config Instrument Settings TPS Corrections OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management S T O N E X Config Mnstrument Settings R9 268 CONFIGURE The atmospheric distance corrections are derived from the dry air temperature air pressure or TPS Corrections elevation above mean sea level MSL and relative air humidity or wet bulb temperature AtmosPPM page PS Corrections CONT F1 AtmosPPM GeomPPM Refraction To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu Temperature i ER P lt gt E F3 Atm Pressure 1013 3 mbar To change lt Atm Pressure gt to lt Elev above Rel Humidity 60 0 MSL gt and back 9o T F4 To change Rel Humidity gt to Temp Wet bulb and back PPM 0 F5 To set Atmospheric ppm 0 0 02a PAGE ro CcoNT P E lt gt T PPH 0 PAGE To change to other page on screen Atmospheric ppm 0 0 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Temperature gt User input
217. d on Always On S Range On Short Range Mode is turned on R9 262 Field Option Description This mode is designed for survey work at close range from the instrument up to 60 80 m Under these conditions the instrument Robotic Mode is signifi cantly stabilised This mode has a considerable influence on the range restriction to 100 150 m for lt Automation iLock gt This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off S Range Short Range Mode is permanently turned on Always On lt Target View gt Choicelist Available only for lt Automation iLock gt Reduces the Aim field of view to the central area of interest Off The Aim field of view is not reduced On The Aim field of view is reduced This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off Always On The Aim field of view is permanently reduced Next step IF EDM THEN is not to be tested CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to R9 Main Menu is to be tested TEST F4 to test the EDM signal strength and frequency S T O N E X Config Mnstrument Settings R9 263 16 2 Search Windows Description The settings on this screen define the size of search windows for prisms to be searched in The prisms can be searched with iLock in the Aim window e Refer to 29 2 Prism Search Methods for additional information Access Select Main Menu Config Instrument
218. d the selections made in XX MapView Configuration S T O N E X MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 432 30 2 Accessing MapView Description The MapView interactive display feature is provided as a page within all application programs and data management It is accessed through the application program itself Depending on the application program and from where in the application program MapView is accessed different MapView modes are available Access step by step Example access for map mode Step Description 1 Select Main Menu Manage Data OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR From a choicelist in some screens for example in application programs PAGE F6 until MANAGE Data Job Name Map page is active STONEX MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 433 Example access for plot mode Step Description 1 Press ON Highlight COGO CONT F1 Refer to 31 2 Accessing the Programs Menu for information on the ON key OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key CONT F1 to access COGO COGO Menu COGO COGO Menu Highlight Intersections CONT F1 to access COGO Intersection Input COGO Intersection Input Choose a method and enter appropriate data CALC F1 to access COGO XX Results PAGE F6 until COGO XX Results Plot page is active STONEX MapView I
219. d to return to R9 Main Menu or to continue with the subsequent screen within the configuration set wizard LIST F6 To access CONFIGURE Quick Access Lists all screens within a configuration set Allows to 02a t access these individual screens and change coT JLtst settings Description of fields Field Option Description lt Wizard Mode gt View All All configuration screens are shown in the configura Screens tion set wizard Application program configuration screens are not included They can be configured within each application program S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 289 Field Option Description Reduced A reduced set of screens are shown in the configura tion set wizard Next step CONT F1 returns to R9 Main Menu or continues with the subsequent screen within the configuration set wizard S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 290 17 3 Description Access CONFIGURE User Menu User Menu page STONEX User Menu The settings on this screen assign a particular function screen or application program to the USER key Refer to 2 USER Key for more information on the USER key Select Main Menu Config General Settings VJUser Menu OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Manage ment Hot Keys amp U
220. dden on the SURVEY screen Mask 4 Never shown on the SURVEY screen Reserved for application programs The settings on this screen define the layout of the four display masks Access Select Main Menu Config Survey Settings Display Settings OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Manage ment S T O N E X Config A Survey Settings R9 240 CONFIGURE Display Display Settings Define Mask 100 Name Survey Use in Su rvey Yes CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed DMASK F3 02a t To configure the selected display mask Refer to CONT DHASK paragraph CONFIGURE Define Display Mask n Description of fields Field Option Description lt Define gt Mask Selected display mask 1 2 3 0r4 lt Use in Survey gt Output Indicates if the display mask is shown or hidden as a page in SURVEY Next step IF a display mask THEN is not to be edited CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE Display Settings was accessed S T O N E X Config A Survey Settings R9 241 CONFIGURE Define Display Mask n STONEX IF a display mask THEN is to be edited highlight the display mask and DMASK F3 Refer to paragraph CONFIGURE Defi
221. de has been previously used in the active job Accesses FREE CODE Last Used Free Codes To select from a list of last used free codes The free codes are sorted by time with the most recently used code at the top of the list In FREECODE Last Used Free Codes press ATRIB F3 to type in attribute values STORE F1 stores the free code any associated attribute values and time related information Coding R9 163 9 4 Requirements Activate quick coding Quick coding for points step by step STONEX Quick Coding e The job codelist contains quick codes for points lines and or areas e According to the requirements of the used CAD package set Rec Free Code Before Point or lt Rec Free Code After Point gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework The current setting for lt Quick Code gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework determines how quick coding is activated Quick coding can be activated at any time e For Quick Code On in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Quick coding is active and can be used e For Quick Code Off in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Tap the quick coding icon visible during Survey and other application programs where it is possible to measure a point with quick codes OR Access CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework and change the setting Refer to 15 3 Coding amp Linework Settings e For Quick Code N
222. defined number of unknown characters indicates a single unknown character lt Start Date gt User input Available for lt Filter Time gt The date of the first point to be displayed lt Start Time gt User input Available for lt Filter Time gt The time of the first point to be displayed lt End Date gt User input Available for lt Filter Time gt The date of the last point to be displayed lt End Time gt User input Available for lt Filter Time gt The time of the last point to be displayed Manage Data R9 121 Field Option Description lt CTRL gt lt ADJ gt Show or Hide Available for lt Filter Class gt Defined classes lt REF gt lt AVGE gt are shown or hidden lt MEAS gt lt EST gt lt NONE gt lt View gt Available for lt Filter Class gt Highest Triplet The coordinate triplets of the highest class are shown All Triplets All classes for one coordinate triplet are shown lt Point ID gt Choicelist Available for lt Filter Radius From Pt gt The point to which the radius is applied Opening the choicelist opens MANAGE Data Job Name Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management lt Radius gt User input Available for lt Filter Radius From Pt gt The radius of the circle within which the points are shown lt Line ID gt Choicelist Available for lt Filter Individual Line gt Opening the choicelist opens MANAGE Data
223. direction from the first to the second known point HDist XX The horizontal distance between the two known points COGO R9 588 STONEX Step Description Date and Time when the COGO inverse calculation was stored VIEW F3 to view all calculated values for the highlighted COGO inverse calculation This includes the height difference the slope distance the grade and the coordinate differences between the two known points DEL F4 to delete the highlighted COGO inverse calculation MORE F5 to display other information in the third column Highlight the COGO inverse calculation of which a resultis to be taken over into COGO XX Input Input page CONT F1 to return to COGO XX Input Input page The relevant result ofthe highlighted COGO inverse calculation is copied into the field which was initially highlighted in COGO XX Input Input page COGO R9 589 32 13 Description Access step by step COGO Modify Value STONEX Modifying Values for Azimuths Distances and Offsets The values for the azimuth the distance and the offset required within the COGO traverse and intersection calculation can be mathematically modified Step Description 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Traverse Input or COGO Intersec tion Input 2 COGO XX Input Input page Highlight lt Azimuth gt lt HDist XX gt or lt Offset gt 3 SHIFT MODIF F4
224. displayed If no prism was found during prediction a search is started depending on the setting of lt Search with gt in CONFIGURE Automatic Prism Search For Search with No Search No search is started e For Search with iLock gt An iLock search is started in a dynamic Aim window which is calculated depending on the velocity of the prism For Search with Last Point and Automation Robotic The instrument turns back to the last stored point If prism was not found with Search with gt The instrument telescope stays at the end position of prediction The SureBeam is activated Refer to 3 4 2 Working Example 2 Robotic for information on how to enable lock Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 41 4 User Interface 4 1 Keyboard Keys STONEX Key Description Alphanumeric keys To type letters and numbers CE Clears all entry at the beginning of user input Clears the last character during user input ESC e Leaves the current menu or dialog without storing changes made USER e Calls the user defined menu ON e Ifthe instrument is off to turn the instrument on e Ifthe instrument is on to access the Programs menu ENTER e Selects the highlighted line and leads to the next logical dialog menu e Starts the edit mode for edit fields e Opens a list box SHIFT e Changes between the first and the second level of function keys Arrow keys
225. duals for the averaged point Available for lt Averaging Mode Average gt and for more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point Refer to 7 3 4 Mean Page SHIFT ABS F2 To check the absolute difference between the measurements Available for lt Averaging Mode Absolute Diffs gt and for more than one meas ured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point Refer to 7 3 4 Mean Page SHIFT 2FRec F3 To aim manually at the target and only record the angle measurement Hz V in Face I and Face II The point stored is an average of the two measurements This hotkey is only available in the Survey program for lt EDM Type Reflector RL gt or lt EDM Type Reflctrless IR gt if Automation None S T O N E X Survey General R9 686 STONEX Description of fields SHIFT 2FAll F4 To take a measurement in Face I and Face II The point stored is an average of the two measure ments When using instruments fitted with iLock the point is automatically measured in both faces the resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face This hotkey is only available in the Survey program for lt EDM Type Reflector RL gt or EDM Type Reflctrless IR gt SHIFT INDIV F5 and SHIFT RUN F5 To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template Refer to 15 1 ID Templates
226. dure step by step STONEX Step Description CONFIGURE ID Templates lt Survey Pts Bolt 001 gt CONT F1 returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE ID Templates was accessed Step Description Refer to 35 2 Surveying Points to access SURVEY Survey Job Name SURVEY Survey Job Name lt Point ID Bolt 001 gt is shown automatically ALL F1 lt Point ID Bolt 002 gt is shown automatically Repeat step 3 until all points with the ID Bolt XXX are surveyed SURVEY Survey Job Name The next point ID s are RoadXXXX starting with Road0723 Type Road0723 Point ID Road0723 gt ALL F1 Point ID Road0724 gt is shown automatically Repeat step 6 until all points with the ID RoadXXXX are surveyed SURVEY Survey Job Name The next required point ID is BM98 It is valid for one point SHIFT INDIV F5 SURVEY Survey Job Name Type BM98 Indiv Pt ID BM98 gt Config Survey Settings R9 238 STONEX Step Description 10 ALL F1 The system changes back to the point ID s RoadXXXX Config Survey Settings R9 239 15 2 Display Settings Description Display settings define the parameters shown on a page on the SURVEY screen Four display masks are definable Mask 1 Always shown on the SURVEY screen Mask 2 Can be shown or hidden on the SURVEY screen Mask 3 Can be shown or hi
227. e TPS station coordi nates and setting the TPS orientation Setup methods e Set Azimuth Known Backsight Point Orientation amp Height Transfer Resection Resection Helmert Local Resection Each setup method requires different input data and a different number of target points All setup methods are described in 33 4 Setup Methods ae Type Station Target Class REF MEAS or NONE Sub class TPS TPS Source Setup setup method Setup setup method Instrument source TPS TPS STONEX Setup R9 594 33 2 Accessing Setup Access SETUP Station Setup Begin STONEX Select Main Menu Programs Setup OR Press ON Highlight Setup CONT F1 Refer to 31 2 Accessing the Programs Menu for details on the ON key OR Press USER configuring the User Menu to include the Setup program Refer to 2 USER Key for details on the USER key OR Press SETUP F3 in the Begin screen of another program other than Setup Station Setup Begin Job SCH Codelist None CONT F1 Config Set SURVEY 4 To accept changes and access the subsequent Reflector 380 Pri sm dl screen The chosen settings become active Add Constant 23 4mm CONF F2 To configure the Setup application program 01A Tt Accesses SETUP Configuration Refer to 33 3 CONT CONF Configuring Setup Setup R9 595 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description
228. e amount by which the points will be rotated output Next step PAGE F6 accesses COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Scale page Refer to COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Scale page COGO The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page Refer to paragraph COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Shift Rotate amp Scale Shift page for information on the keys Scale page Description of fields Field Option Description lt Method gt The method by which the scale factor will be deter mined User Entered The scale factor can be manually typed in Computed The scale factor will be calculated as lt New Dist gt divided by lt Existing Dist gt STONEX COGO R9 553 STONEX Field Option Description lt Existing Dist gt User input Available for lt Method Computed gt A known distance before scaling This value is used for calcu lating the scale factor lt New Dist gt User input Available for lt Method Computed gt A known distance after scaling This value is used for calculating the scale factor lt Scale gt Userinput or The scale factor used in the calculation output lt Scale From Pt gt No Scaling is performed by multiplying the original coor dinates of all points by lt Scale gt Yes lt Scale gt is applied to the coordinate difference of all points relative to lt Rotation Pt gt selected on the Rota tion page The coordinates of lt Rotation Pt gt will not
229. e averaging Output field for Northing coordinate of meas ured point R9 244 STONEX Field Option Offset Cross Offset Height Offset Length Offset Mode PPM Atmos PPM Geom PPM Total Point ID Reflector Reflector Height SD Last Rec Slope Dist Station East Station Height Station ID Config Survey Settings Description Input field for horizontal distance offset for measured point perpendicular to the line of sight Input field for height offset for measured point Input field for horizontal distance offset in the direction of line of sight Select offset mode Output field for atmospheric ppm value Output field for geometric ppm value Output field for the total ppm value Input field for the point number Select a reflector Input field for reflector height Output field for the last recorded distance Output field for measured slope distance Output field for current station Easting coordi nates Output field for current station height coordi nates Output field for current station ID R9 245 Field Option Description Station North Output field for current station Northing coordi nates Std Dev Output field of standard deviation in millimeters of averaged distances Transversal Tilt Output field for the transversal tilt of the vertical axis V Angle Output field for vertical angle V Display Select vertical angle display
230. e current horizontal angle lt V gt Output The current vertical angle lt Slope Dist gt Output The measured slope distance after DIST F2 was pressed lt AAzimuth gt Output Displays the difference between the calculated azimuth and the current horizontal angle If lt Method Resection gt displays until sufficient data for calculation is available lt AHoriz Dist gt Output The difference between the calculated and the meas ured horizontal distance lt AHeight gt Output The difference between the given and the measured height of the target point Setup R9 624 Next steps IF THEN more target points are to be measured ALL F1 to measure and store distances and angles or REC F3 to store the current measurement sufficient target points were meas ured CALC F5 to access SETUP Results Refer to 33 5 Setup Results for more information A maximum of ten target points can be measured and used for the calculation When the maximum number of points was measured the SETUP Results screen is accessed automatically after ALL F1 In the SETUP Additional Information screen measured target points can be deleted and the SETUP Measure Target screen can be reaccessed to measure new target points STONEX Setup R9 625 33 4 5 Resection Resection Helmert Requirements The coordinates of the station point are unknown The coordinates and orie
231. e measurements of the current run are then rejected and not averaged with the results from previous runs TOOLS T Axis Adjustment Accuracy lt No of Meas gt Shows the number of runs executed One run consists of a measurement in face I and face II Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 392 TOOLS T Axis Adjustment Result STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter lt o a T axis gt shows the standard deviation of the determined tilting axis error The standard deviation can be calculated from the second run onwards CE It is recommended to measure at least 2 runs 6 MEAS F5 if more runs have to be added Continue with step 2 OR CONT F1 to accept the measurements and to access TOOLS T Axis Adjustment Result No more runs can be added later Axis Adjustment Result New g Old g 0 0000 OMTIT CONT FL ee To accept and record the new determined tilting axis error Writes to or appends to an existing logfile if the logfile recording has been enabled Refer to 27 4 Configure Check amp Adjust REDO F2 To reject the result and to repeat the complete check and adjust procedure Refer to step 2 of 02a 2 paragraph Tilting axis adjustment step by conT REDO step Tools Check amp Adjust R9 393 Description of columns and fields Column Option Description New g Shows the new determined and averaged ti
232. e previous code block started Coding R9 171 Field Option Description lt Direction gt The way of using the code boxes This influences in which order the code boxes will be applied Forward The code boxes are used in the same way as defined in SURVEY Survey Job name SCode page Backward The code boxes are used in the reverse way as defined in SURVEY Survey Job name SCode page lt No Elements gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 Number of code boxes shown in SURVEY Survey Job 7 8or9 name SCode page S T O N E X Coding R9 172 9 5 3 Code Block Requirements e Use SCodes Yes in SURVEY Configuration SCode page SURVEY Survey survey job ALL F1 Survey Job Name SCode SCode Auto Map To measure and store distances and angles page Code Block 414p CODES F3 To select a code from MANAGE Select Code panel PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT CONF F2 To activate deactivate configure SmartCodes SHIFT 2FACE F4 02a To take a measurement in Face I and Face II The ALL copss PAGE point stored is an average of the two measure ments Creating a Code Block The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more step by step information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to paragraph Accessing Survey to access SURVEY Survey 3
233. e screen The visible red laser pointer is used for reflectorless measurements The visible red laser pointer is arranged coaxially with the line of sight of the telescope and emitted through the objective If the instrument is well adjusted the visible red laser beam coincides with the line of sight The direction of the beam should be inspected before precise distance measurements are executed since an excessive deviation of the laser beam from the line of sight can cause inaccu rate results The screen and key illumination allows a more convenient working with the instrument when the lighting conditions are not ideal They can be turned on in the CONFIGURE Lights Displays Beeps Text Lights page To access this screen press SHIFT F11 in any application program Changes to the setting become effective instantly Refer to 17 5 Lights Display Beeps Text for more information on screen and key illumination settings Functions R9 430 30 30 1 Description MapView modes STONEX MapView Interactive Display Feature Overview MapView is an interactive display feature embedded in the firmware but used by all application programs as well as data management MapView provides a graphical display of the survey elements which allows for a better overall understanding of how the data being used and meas ured relates to each other Depending on the application program and where in the application program MapView i
234. e staked point is stored with the point code and attributes attached to the point to be staked are not identical is used lt Point Code lt None gt gt is suggested It can be changed and attributes can be entered After a point has been stored with a code different to Point Code lt None gt gt then the last used point code is suggested the next time are not identical is not used the staked point is stored with Point Code lt None gt gt It may happen that the codes and or attributes of the staked point and the point to be staked do not match In this case a screen opens where they can be corrected Refer to 9 6 Code and Attribute Mismatch for information on solving a code and or attribute mismatch The properties stored with staked points are e Class MEAS e Sub class Stakeout e Source Stakeout e Instrument source TPS EH Stakeout R9 648 Averaging of staked The principles for averaging are identical to those of the Survey application program Refer to points 7 3 4 Mean Page for information on averaging S T O N E X Stakeout R9 649 34 2 Access STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin STONEX Accessing Stakeout Select Main Menu Programs Stakeout OR Press ON Highlight Stakeout CONT F1 Refer to 31 2 Accessing the Programs Menu for information on the ON key OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Press STAKE F5 from another application prog
235. e values for shifts and or rotation and or scale are typed in manually Elements that must be known are e the coordinates of the points to be shifted rotated and or scaled They must be stored in the active job e the shift values They can be defined as the direction of Easting Northing and Height or as an azimuth and a grid distance or as shift from one point to another e the rotation value It can be defined by a point as rotation centre plus a rotation or by an existing and new azimuth e the scale It is only applied to the position Points with full coordinate triplets position only points and height only points can be used STONEX COGO R9 544 Diagram a Shift eb a Height b Easting Es b P1 Known point of P1 Shifted point P2 Known point P2 Shifted point N Se e ln a Rotation a Height p b Easting PO Rotation Pt gt P1 Known point P1 Rotated point P2 Known point P2 Rotated point STONEX COGO R9 545 Access COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Points page STONEX a Scale a Height b Easting P1 Rotation Pt gt can be held fixed all other points are then scaled from here P2 Known point P2 Scaled point P3 Known point P3 Scaled point P4 Known point P Scaled point P5 Known point P5 Scaled point Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Listed are points which have been selected for shifting rotating
236. easured points are assigned the class MEAS The various measured coordinate triplets for one point can be recorded using the same point ID If the averaging mode is activated an average is calculated when more than one measured coordinate triplet is available for the same point ID e Theaveraged pointis given the class AVGE It is checked if the deviations of each single point are within the limits configured in MANAGE New Job Avge page or in MANAGE Edit Job Job Name Avge page e After averaging the Mean page becomes available in MANAGE Edit Point Point ID and accessible from the Survey application program SURVEY Survey Job Name Survey page e Available functionality on the Mean page depends on the selected averaging mode Averaging Mode The averaging mode defines the checks which are performed when more than one set of meas ured coordinates are recorded for the same point The selected averaging mode also affects the behaviour of the instrument when editing a point and calculating averages Defining the averaging mode and configuring the limits The averaging mode and the limits are configured in MANAGE New Job Avge page or in MANAGE Edit Job Job Name Avge page Refer to 6 3 Creating a New Job and to 6 4 Editing a Job Manage Data R9 99 STONEX Description of averaging modes Averaging mode Description Average When more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the same point the avera
237. ecommended to check the additive constant for non Stonex prisms on a baseline by means of an appropriate procedure lt Creator gt A name of the creator or other comments can be entered 4 STORE F1 stores the new reflector and returns to MANAGE Reflectors S T O N E X Manage Reflectors R9 203 12 4 Editing a Reflector Access Refer to 12 2 Accessing Reflector Management to access MANAGE Reflectors Edit reflector The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more step by step information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 In MANAGE Reflectors highlight a reflector to be edited EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Reflector 3 MANAGE Edit Reflector The fields are identical with those for the creation of a new reflector All 12 3 fields can be edited except fields of Stonex default reflectors Make the required changes 4 STORE F1 stores the changes and returns to MANAGE Reflectors S T O N E X Manage Reflectors R9 204 13 13 1 Description Export format STONEX Convert Export Data from Job Overview This screen lists all the exporters loaded Data can be exported e toa file on the CompactFlash card e via RS232 to an external device Refer to 19 Config Interfaces Editing The Interface for information on how to configure the interface Format Characteri
238. econd COGO point 20 STORE F1 stores the second COGO point and returns to COGO Choose Area to be Divided COGO R9 586 STONEX Step Description 21 SHIFT QUIT F6 to exit the COGO application program COGO R9 587 32 12 Description Select a result from previous COGO inverse calculations step by step STONEX Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations Azimuths distances and offsets required within the COGO traverse and intersection calculations can be selected from previously calculated inverse results Step Description 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Traverse Input or COGO Intersec tion Input 2 COGO XX Input Input page Highlight lt Azimuth gt lt HDist XX gt or lt Offset gt LAST F4 to access COGO Last Inverse Calculations 4 COGO Last Inverse Calculations All previous COGO inverse calculations stored in the active job are displayed sorted by time with the most recent at the top This screen consists of three columns First column From The point ID of the first known point for the COGO inverse calculation Second column To The point ID of the second known point for the COGO inverse calculation Third column The information displayed can vary is displayed for unavailable information for example if a height only point is used Azimuth cannot be calculated Azimuth The
239. ed 3 EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Codelist 4 CODES F4 to access MANAGE Codes This screen is described below MANAGE Codes from currently active code groups are shown Codes The listed code groups belong to the selected System RAM codelist when this screen was accessed through Main Menu Manage Codelists OR to the job codelist when MANAGE Codes was accessed from an application program MANAGE New Job or MANAGE Edit Job S T O N E X Manage Codelists R9 141 The B indicates codes which have attributes attached X CONT F1 Code Description To closethe screen and return to the screen from top of bank where this screen was accessed toe of bank NEW F2 To create a new code Refer to 8 5 2 Creating a New Code EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted code Refer to 8 5 3 Editing a Code DEL F4 02a To delete the highlighted code CONT NEW EDIT DEL HORE somes 2727 To display information about the code descrip tion the quick codes if available the code groups and the code type SHIFT GROUP F4 To view create delete activate and deactivate code groups Refer to 8 6 Managing Code Groups SHIFT SORT F5 To sort codes by code name code description quick code or the last use S T O N E X Manage Codelists R9 142 STONEX Next step IF THEN a code is to be created NEW F2 Refer to 8 5 2 Creating a New Code a code is to be edited highlight the code
240. ed as ID for lines in default configuration sets e This ID is automatically incremented Config Survey Settings R9 225 Default ID Template Description No Template Used e The last point ID during a survey will be displayed This ID is auto matically incremented if it contains numerical characters If this ID is overwritten the auto increment starts from the new ID The auto matic incrementation can be turned off when editing this ID template Refer to 15 1 4 Editing an ID Template Time amp Date e The current local time and date is the ID Use Code amp String e Allows the line area ID assigned to a line area object to be based on the code related to the line area e Ifline area codes are being used then the line area code is used as part of the line area ID e If point codes are being used then the point code is used as part of the line area ID e Ifattributes strings are not being used then the numerical part of the line area ID is automatically incremented S T O N E X Config Survey Settings R9 226 a Default ID Template Availability Survey Points Auto Points Lines Areas 0001 Y d Y Area0001 Y Y Y Y Auto0001 Y Y Y Y Aux0001 Y Y Y v Line0001 Y Y v Y No Template Used Y Y Time amp Date Y Y Y v Use Code amp String Y Y Selecting the e Adefault ID template can be selected default ID templates e manually by s
241. ed for staking out is the point closest to the point which was staked If there are many points in lt Stakeout Job gt the search may take a few seconds No After staking and storing one point the next point suggested for staking out is the subsequent one in lt Stakeout Job gt lt Auto Position gt 2D Instrument positions horizontally to the point to be staked 3D Instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point to be staked Off Instrument does not position to the point to be staked lt Update Angle gt Yes Angles are updated with telescope movement after a distance was measured No Angles and stakeout values are updated after a distance measurement Then all values are frozen until the next distance is taken When lt Automation Robotic gt and locked to a target the values do not change lt Store Pt ID gt Same as Stake Pt Prefix The manually occupied staked points are stored with the same point ID s as the points to be staked Adds the setting for lt Prefix Suffix gt in front of the original point ID s S T O N E X Stakeout R9 657 Field Option Description Suffix Adds the setting for lt Prefix Suffix gt at the end of the original point ID s lt Prefix Suffix gt User input Available for lt Store Pt ID Prefix gt and lt Store Pt ID Suffix gt The identifier with up to four characters is added in front of or at the end of the ID of the manually occu
242. ed points with angles and distances e Calculated from some application programs Instrument source TPS or Stonex Tools Number of triplets Multiple With more than one measured coordinate triplet the average for the position and the height can be computed NONE Type Measured points with angles Instrument source Possible number of triplets TPS Unlimited Manage Data R9 85 Sub class The sub class describes certain classes in detail It indicates the status of the position when a coordinate triplet was measured and how the coordinates were determined Sub class Description COGO Indirect coordinate determination with application program COGO NONE Direction is available but no coordinates Height is available but no position coordinates TPS Measured with distances and angles Fixed Height Manually entered and fixed in height Fixed Position Manually entered and fixed in position Fixed Pos amp Ht Manually entered and fixed in position and height S T O N E X Manage Data R9 86 Source The source describes the application program or functionality that generated a coordinate triplet and the method with which it was created Source Originated from application program functionality ASCII File Convert Data Import ASCII GSI Data to Job Arc Base Pt COGO Arc Calculation Base Point Arc Centre
243. ed when a beep should be heard Stakeout R9 659 STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page STONEX Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Heights page Refer to paragraph STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page Description of fields Field Option Description Height Offset User input Allows a constant height offset to be applied to the height of the points lt Edit Height gt Yes The field lt D Ht gt for the design height is displayed in STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Stake page and STAKEOUT Polar Stakeout Stake page The design height is the height of the point to be staked The value for lt D Ht gt can be changed No The field lt Ht gt for the height of the current position is displayed in STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Stake page and STAKEOUT Polar Stakeout Stake page The value for lt Ht gt cannot be changed Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Logfile page page Refer to paragraph STAKEOUT Configuration Logfile Stakeout R9 660 STAKEOUT Configuration Logfile page STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Write Logfile gt Yes or No To generate a logfile when the application program is exited A logfile is a file to which data from an application program is written to Itis generated using the selected lt Format File gt lt File Name gt Choicelist Available for lt Write Logfile Yes gt T
244. efined digits Attribute Description The use of attributes allows additional information to be stored with the code Up to twenty attributes can be related to one code Attributes are not compulsory S T O N E X Manage Codelists R9 132 Structure of attributes Attributes Attribute type Normal Mandatory Fixed Attribute value type Text Real Integer Attribute value region Attribute value region None Choicelist None Choicelist Range S T O N E X Manage Codelists R9 133 Attribute types The attribute type defines the input requirements for the attribute Normal An input for the attribute is optional The attribute value can be typed in in the field New attributes with this attribute type can be created in Stonex Tools or on the instrument Mandatory An input for the attribute is compulsory The attribute value must be typed in the field New attributes with this attribute type can be created in Stonex Tools Fixed The attribute value is a predefined default which is displayed but cannot be changed in the field This attribute value is automatically attached to the code New attributes with this attribute type can be created in Stonex Tools Attribute value types The attribute value type defines which values are accepted as input Text Any input for the attribute is interpreted as text New attributes with this attribute value type ca
245. eflector Ht ELI n Available if EDM Mode Tracking and DIST F2 was pressed Stops the distance meas Hz 55 0002 g urements F1 changes back to ALL V 37 0004 g DIST F2 Horiz Dist 65 333 nm To measure and display distances Available Ht Diff 99 466 n unless lt EDM Mode Tracking and or Log zj Auto Pts Yes after the tracking or logging is Q2a tr started au DIST nec Lal PAGE REC F3 To record data If lt EDM Mode Tracking gt and or lt Log Auto Pts Yes gt records measured point and continues tracking REMOT F4 Available if lt Use Remote Pt Yes gt is set in the SURVEY Configuration Remote Pt page To access SURVEY Survey Remote Point SETAZ F5 To access the SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth screen to set the horizontal angle Refer to 33 4 2 Set Azimuth for information on the SURVEY Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth screen TEST F5 To access the SURVEY EDM Test Signal Frequency screen Available for lt EDM Mode Tracking gt and or lt Log Auto Pts Yes gt after the tracking or logging is started S T O N E X Survey General R9 685 SHIFT CONF F2 To configure auto points and remote point meas urements Accesses SURVEY Configuration When SHIFT AVGE F2 or SHIFT ABS F2 are active this key is not available Refer to 36 Survey Auto Points and to 37 Survey Remote Point for information on the fields and keys SHIFT AVGE F2 To check the resi
246. eight the difference between original and calcu lated height lt o Hz Orient gt Output Standard deviation of the calculated orientation lt Calc Scale gt Output Calculated scale factor from resection or orientation and height transfer lt Calc ppm gt Output Available for lt Use Scale Yes gt ppm from calculated scale ppm scale 1000000 1 lt Current Scale gt Output The geometric scale correction is displayed The correction displayed depends upon the options chosen in CONFIGURE TPS Corrections GoPPM page Refer to 16 4 TPS Corrections for details STO N EX Setup R9 634 Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Stn Code page SETUP The functionality of the Stn Code page is similar to MANAGE New Point Code page Refer to Results 7 3 2 Creating a New Point for more information on keys Stn Code page Description of fields Field Option Description lt Point Code gt Choicelist User input The thematical code for the point Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt All point codes from the job codelist can be selected The attributes are shown as output input or choicelist fields depending on their definition Available for lt Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt Codes can be typed in but not selected from a codelist A check is performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in the job If so the according attributes are shown lt Code Desc g
247. elected station and backsight point STO N EX Setup R9 618 STONEX Field Option Description lt AHoriz Dist gt Output The difference between the calculated horizontal distance from station to backsight point and the meas ured distance lt AHeight gt Output The difference between the coordinate height of the backsight point and the measured height of the back sight point If the backsight point is a 2D point this field shows lt Horiz Dist gt Output Displayed after a distance was measured with DIST F2 and after MORE F5 was pressed The measured horizontal distance to the backsight point Shows before DIST F2 lt Height gt Output Displayed after a distance was measured with DIST F2 and after MORE F5 was pressed The measured height of the backsight point Shows before DIST F2 Next step IF THEN the next page is to be accessed PAGE F6 changes to the BS Info page the station and orientation is to be set SET F1 to set the station and orientation Setup R9 619 SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Known BS Point Set Stn amp Ori Setup BS Info Stn Info Known BS Point Backsight ID 101 BS Info page Code None H Code Desc De BS Easting i 175 000 m SET F1 BS Northing 100 000 m To set the station and orientation and exit the BS Height 100 000 m Setup application program
248. electing it in the ID Template Library under Config Survey Settings MD Templates The ID template becomes active as soon as it is highlighted on the screen and when CONT F1 is pressed The currently active configuration set is automatically updated to include the selected ID template To ensure that all default ID templates appear in the ID Template Library press SHIFT DEFLT F5 e indirectly by selecting a configuration set which includes the ID template S T O N E X Config Survey Settings R9 227 15 1 2 Access CONFIGURE ID Templates STONEX Accessing ID Template Configuration Select Main Menu Config Survey Settings ID Templates OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Manage ment Survey Pts Auto Pts Auto0001 Auxil Pts Aux0001 j Lines Line0001 Areas Area0001 CONT F1 02a t To accept changes and return to the screen from CONT where this screen was accessed Config Survey Settings R9 228 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Survey Pts gt Choicelist Sets the ID templates for measured points lt Auto Pts gt Choicelist Sets the ID templates for auto points These points are automatically recorded at a specific rate lt Auxil Pts gt Choicelist Sets t
249. em Instrmnt Hem Programs Hem System De CONT F1 To exit STATUS Battery amp Memory 2a PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen STATUS R9 411 Description of fields Field Description lt Device Used gt The memory device in use lt Mem CF Card gt The total free memory for data storage on the CompactFlash card lt Mem Instrmnt gt The total free memory for data storage on the internal memory A grey field and grey indicate an unavailable internal memory lt Mem Programs gt The total free system memory used for application programs lt Mem System gt The total free system memory The system memory stores e instrument related files such as system settings e survey related files such as codelists and configuration sets Next step CONT F1 to exit STATUS Battery amp Memory STONEX STATUS R9 412 28 4 STATUS System Information Access Select STATUS System Information Refer to 28 1 STATUS Functions on how to access the STATUS menu OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key STATUS Shows the type of instrument the serial number the equipment number the ID of the instru System Information ment the currently active system language and the availability of additional instrument hard Instrument page ware options Next step PAGE F6 change
250. en column of the highlighted line area MORE F5 To display information about the codes if stored with any line area the start time the end time of when the last point was added to the line area the length of the line the perimeter and the area of the area PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT DEL F4 To delete the highlighted line area SHIFT FILT F5 To define sort and filter settings Refer to 7 6 Point Sorting and Filters Manage Data R9 81 Description of columns Column Description Line or Area The listed lines areas already stored in the active job Open The status of a line area e Yes The line area is open Measured points are assigned to the line area e No The line area is closed Measured points are not assigned to the line area CLOSE F4 and OPEN F4 change between the options S T O N E X Manage Data R9 82 STONEX Next step IF the line area THEN management is completed CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed is to be opened highlight the line area and OPEN F4 is to be closed highlight the line area and CLOSE F4 is to be created NEW F2 Refer to 7 4 2 Creating a New Line Area is to be edited highlight the line area and EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Line Line ID or MANAGE Edit Area Area ID Refer to 7 4 3 Editing a Line Area
251. en creating codelists with Stonex Tools Codelist Manage ment Manage Codelists R9 144 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter e None Select this option to disable the functionality All other code settings on the instrument are not affected when this option is set e Begin Line When a point code is newly selected a new line is opened and the point being stored is added to the line When the same point code remains selected a new line is not opened The point being stored is simply added to the current line e Begin Area The behaviour for opening a new area is the same as the behaviour for opening a new line as mentioned above Line Style gt Not available for Code Type Free The style in which lines and areas are represented in MapView and Stonex Tools NEW A F2 adds Attribute 1 gt as new input field for an attribute of attribute type normal and of value type text NAME F3 or VALUE F3 Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in To highlight Attribute 1 gt or the field for the attribute value The name of Attribute 1 gt can be edited and the attribute value to be used as the default attribute value can be typed in Attributes of attribute type mandatory or fixed and of value type real or integer must be created in Stonex Tools Up to twenty attributes can be created Is another attribute to be created e Ifyes
252. en from where CONFIGURE Offsets was accessed S T O N E X Config Survey Settings R9 255 15 5 Description Access Configuring the target check STONEX Target Check e tis possible to configure the instrument to monitor sequentially stored measurements and to notify the user if the coordinates lie within a defined range from each other e Ifconfigured when a point is being stored the X Y coordinates of the point being stored are compared to those of the last previously stored point If the difference is less than the defined position tolerance then a warning is shown It can now be decided whether to store the point or not e Ifconfigured then backsight target points and resection target points which were measured during the setup procedure are also checked in this manner Select Main Menu Config Survey Settings Target Check OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key arget Check Settings Target Check On j Pos Tolerance 0 015 02a CONT F1 CONT To accept the screen entries and continue Config Survey Settings R9 256 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Target Check gt On Target checking is activated Off Target checking is not activated Pos Tolerance gt User input The position tolerance The units are defined by Config General Settings Units amp Formats S T O N E X Confi
253. ensator The plane of the dual axis compensator of the R9 is defined by a longitudinal component in direction of the telescope and a transversal component perpendicular to the telescope The longitudinal compensator index error I has a similar effect as the vertical index error and affects all vertical angle readings The transversal compensator index error t is similar to the tilting axis error The effect of this error to the Hz angle readings is 0 at the horizon and increases with steep sightings a Centre of prism b Crosshairs c Vcomponent of iLock collimation error d Hz component of iLock collimation error The iLock collimation erroris the angular divergence between the line of sight which means the direction in which the crosshairs point and the iLock CCD camera axis which detects the centre ofthe prism Hz and V angles are corrected by the Hz and V components of the iLock calibration errors to measure exactly to the centre of the prism Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 377 S Note that even after adjustment of the iLock the crosshairs might not be positioned exactly on the centre of the prism after an iLock search This is a normal effect To speed up the iLock search the telescope is not positioned exactly on the centre of the prism The small rest devia tions the iLock offsets are measured individually for each measurement and corrected elec tronically This means that the Hz and V angles are c
254. ensor used for distance measurements There are three different lt EDM Type gt and five different lt EDM Mode gt the instrument can work in These terms are described below Refer to 16 1 EDM amp iLock Settings and to 3 Quick Settings SHIFT USER for more informa tion EDM types EDM Type Description IR lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt allows to measure the distance to a prism or reflector tape with the visible red laser The last used options for lt Reflector gt lt Add Constant gt lt Reflector Ht gt and lt EDM Mode gt are applied For lt Automation iLock gt or lt Automation Robotic gt lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt is automatically set Itis important to select the currently used lt Reflector gt from the list to gain correct results RL lt EDM Type Reflctrless RL gt allows to measure distances to objects without a reflector with the visible red laser The last used option for EDM Mode gt is applied Reflector Reflectorless gt and Reflector Ht 0 000 are set Automation None is set S T O N E X Functions R9 419 EDM modes STONEX EDM Type Description LO lt EDM Type Long Range LO gt allows to measure very long distances to prisms The last used option for lt EDM Mode gt and lt Reflector gt are applied Automation None is set EDM Mode Description Standard Pressing ALL F1 or DIST F2 a
255. ent reflector position These behaviours are true for all automation settings Total Station To centre the map on the instrument Next step CONT F1 confirms the selections and accessed returns to where XX MapView Configuration was MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 440 30 4 30 4 1 Description Standard softkeys STONEX MapView Components Softkeys Standard functionality is provided by a number of softkeys within MapView These softkeys are available regardless of the mode in which MapView was accessed and always perform the same functions The softkeys described below are standard on all MapView screens For descriptions of mode specific softkeys see appropriate chapters Softkey Description ZOOM F4 To zoom into the map Ce Pressing ESC stops the zooming process All keys become active again ZOOM F5 To zoom out of the map Ce Pressing ESC stops the zooming process All keys become active again PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT CONF F2 To configure MapView Accesses XX MapView Configuration Refer to 30 3 Configuring MapView SHIFT FIT F3 To fit all displayable data into the screen area Refer to 30 4 3 Toolbar for more information Touch screen functions Some softkey functionality can be replaced by touch screen functions MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 441 STONEX Softkey Touch equivalent
256. entered 5 times You must now enter the instrument PUK Code The instrument PUK Code can be found on the instrument delivery papers la OK F4 To continue with the subsequent screen Next step OK F4 to access R9 Enter Security PUK Code Enter Security PUK Code X PUK Code E Serial No 1 OK F4 To accept the PUK code and to continue with the subsequent screen 02a f SHIFT QUIT F6 es e e To turn off the instrument Instrument Protection with PIN R9 19 Description of fields Field Option Description PUK Code User input The PUK code as generated by Stonex The PUK code comes with the instrument Serial No Output The serial number of the instrument This is needed to obtain PUK from Stonex Next step IF the PUK code THEN entered is correct the old PIN code is cleared and the PIN protection is deactivated R9 Main Menu is displayed Refer to 5 Main Menu wrong R9 keeps asking for the correct PUK code SHIFT QUIT F6 to turn off the instrument S T O N E X Instrument Protection with PIN R9 20 Description User defined menu Functionality of the user defined menu Access R9 User Menu Job Name STONEX USER Key The USER key opens the user defined menu The user defined menu can be configured to contain the most used functions or application programs The user defined menu can not be accessed while in
257. ep Step Description 1 Go to the point to be measured 2 Select the appropriate Linework flag to be stored with the next point 3 ALL F1 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until all points are measured and stored 5 SHIFT QUIT F6 to exit the Survey application program 6 Use a format file to export the points including the linework flags Selecting e Selecting a line in MapView is possible with either the softkeys or the touch screen aline with MapView e Refer to 30 MapView Interactive Display Feature for further information STONEX Linework R9 187 10 3 Combining Linework and Coding Description e Linework and coding can be combined e This combination can be useful because coding assigning linework flags and opening closing lines areas can all be done with one point observation e Combining Linework and coding can only be configured if thematical point codes or if thematical point line and area codes are available for selection Thematical coding can be done with or without codelists Ce Linework and coding can also be combined using SmartCodes Refer to 9 5 4 Using Smart Codes Configuration options e The configuration for the types of codes available and the configuration for coding with without a codelist both have an influence on the following Therequired configuration of a display mask e The behaviour of the fields configured for the display mask e The behaviour of the software The possible co
258. ep 4 e Ifno continue with step 6 Display XX Select Point Point ID The ID ofthe points within range of the point selec WD tion Point Code The code ofthe points within range of the point selection Select the desired point DUE lat HORE MORE F5 to display information about the point code the 3D coordinate quality and class the time the point was stored and the date the point was stored 5 CONT F1 returns to MANAGE Data Job Name Map page with the focus on the selected point 6 A square is centred on the selected point and the point cues tee parameter text as defined in XX MapView Configuration Points page is highlighted D amp amp X CRIT a 02a 9 CONT FOCUS EDIT Z00N ZOOH PAGE MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 452 30 6 Description Access Le COGO XX Results Plot page STONEX Plot Mode MapView Screen Area The plot mode of MapView is available as the Plot page in an application program and can be used to view the results of the application program Results are shown in black all other infor mation that is displayable is shown in grey Refer to 30 2 Accessing MapView paragraph Example access for plot mode OR As a part of an application program for example COGO The COGO XX Results Plot page is used as the example below The functions described are the same for all Plot pa
259. er Down 300 18 Interfaces Ports Devices 305 18 1 Overall Concept 305 18 2 Interfaces 309 18 2 1 Overview of Interfaces 309 18 2 2 Accessing CONFIGURE Interfaces 310 18 3 Ports 312 18 4 Devices 313 18 4 1 Overview of Devices 313 18 4 2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices 314 18 43 Creating a New Device 317 18 4 4 Editing a Device 319 18 4 5 Device Radios for Remote Control 320 18 4 6 Device RS232 321 19 Config Mnterfaces Editing The Interface 322 19 1 GSI Output 322 19 2 GeoCOM Mode 330 19 3 Export Job 332 20 Config Mnterfaces Controlling The Device 334 20 1 Radios for Remote Control 334 S T O N E X Table of Contents R9 9 STONEX 20 2 RS232 336 21 Tools Format Memory Device 337 22 Tools Transfer Objects 339 23 X Tools Upload System Files 341 23 1 Application Programs 341 23 2 System Languages 343 23 3 Instrument Firmware 345 24 Tools Calculator 347 24 1 Overview 347 24 2 Accessing the Calculator 348 24 3 Configuring the Calculator 349 24 4 Using the Calculator 351 24 4 1 RPN Mode 351 24 4 2 Standard Mode 354 24 4 3 Description of Softkeys 358 24 4 4 Calling and Closing the Calculator from an Input Field for Numeric Characters 364 25 Tools File Viewer 366 26 Tools ALicence Keys 369 27 Tools Check amp Adjust 371 27 1 Overview 371 27 2 Details on Instrument Errors 374 27 3 Accessing Check amp Adjust Menu 379 27 4 Configure Check amp Adj
260. es MORE F5 displays the horizontal angle or the azimuth from the point to the instrument PAGE F6 changes to the Code page MANAGE Edit Point Point ID Code page The point code can be edited All point codes in the job can be selected The description of the code is shown as an output field The attributes are shown as output input or choicelist fields depending on their definition Manage Data 9 2 and 9 3 R9 96 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter The attribute values shown depend on lt Attributes gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework lt Attributes Last Used gt shows the last used attribute values which are stored for this point code in the active codelist lt Attributes Default Values gt shows the default attribute values for this point code if existing Ce NEW A F2 allows additional attributes to be created for this point code CS __ NAME F3 or VALUE F3 Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in To highlight Attribute n or the field for the attribute value The name of Attribute n can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in Ce LAST F4 recalls the last used attribute values which were stored with this point code Ce DEFLT F5 recalls the default attribute values for the selected code 9 Is Class MEAS and no offset point e Ifyes continue with step 11 e Ifno continue with
261. es Current 0 00 00 a T axis 0 00 00 iLock Hz 500 09 iLock V 0 00 00 af HELP HONE END QUIT Next step 11 CONT F1 To return to the TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu screen Refer to 27 3 Accessing Check amp Adjust Menu MORE F5 To display information about the date of the determination the standard deviation of the errors and the temperature during the determi nation CONT F1 returns to TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu screen Refer to 27 3 Accessing Check amp Adjust Menu Note that the temperature of the environment around the instrument may differ from the temperature shown on the screen as itis the internal temperature ofthe instrument Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 399 27 9 Adjusting the Circular Level of the Instrument and Tribrach Adjusting the circular level step by step Su 1 5 2 TB f Du m Step Description 1 Place and secure the instrument into the tribrach and onto a tripod 2 Using the tribrach footscrews level the instrument with the electronic level SHIFT F12 to access STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet 3 Check the position of the circular level on the instrument and tribrach D a If both circular levels are centered no adjustments are necessary b If one or both circular levels are not centered adjust as follows Instrument If it extends beyond the circle use the supplied allen key to centre
262. es Using A or V the various allocations can be accessed Refer to 24 4 3 Description of Softkeys 02a SIN cos TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN for information about the function keys XNA Description of fields Field Option Description First field on the Output The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calcu screen lator as configured in TOOLS Calculator Configura tion DEG Degrees Tools Calculator R9 351 Working example STONEX Field Option Description RAD Radians GRAD Gon lt ZY gt Output The result of the sum or difference of values in lt Y gt using 2 F1 and F2 IX Output The result of the sum or difference of values in X using F1 and F2 lt T gt Output Third stack After an operation the value from lt Z gt is written here lt Z gt Output Second stack After an operation the value from lt Y gt is written here Y Output First stack After an operation the value from X is written here X User input The value for the next operation Next step SHIFT DONE F4 returns to R9 Main Menu Task Calculate 3 5 7 6 Step Description 1 Type in 3 2 ENTER 3 Type in 5 Tools V Calculator R9 352 STONEX Step Description 4 ENTER S Y 3 gt X 5 gt 5 F1 Ce lt x 8 gt 6 Type in 7 7
263. es and or areas A line area can have e astyle for display in MapView e acode independent of the point code of the points comprising the line area Ce Points are assigned to a line area when the line area is open Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management for information on how to open a line area S T O N E X Manage Data R9 105 7 4 2 Creating a New Line Area Le Access Create line step by step STONEX The functionality of all screens and fields are similar for the creation of both lines and areas The step by step instructions for creating a new line can be applied for areas Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management to access MANAGE Data Job Name The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter MANAGE Data Job Name PAGE F6 until the Lines X page is active MANAGE Data Job Name Lines X page NEW F2 to access MANAGE New Line gp PB Ww Nh PR MANAGE New Line General page lt Line ID gt The name of the new line The configured ID template for lines is used The ID can be changed e To start a new sequence of line ID s overtype the line ID e For an individual name independent of the ID template SHIFT INDIV F5 SHIFT RUN F5 changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template lt Pts to Store gt The type of points which are
264. es and return to R9 Main Menu ppm above Ref 0 0 PPM 0 F5 Individual ppm 0 0 To set Geometric ppm 0 0 Geometric ppm 0 0 Only available when Calc Scale Manually gt 02a PAGE F6 CONT PPN 0 PAGE To change to other page on screen Config Instrument Settings R9 270 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Calc Scale gt Manually The geometric ppm value is manually calculated lt Scale at C M gt User input The scale at the central meridian lt Offset to C M gt User input The offset to the central meridian lt Map Proj ppm gt Output The map projection ppm value If this value cannot be calculated then is displayed and is also ignored in the calculation of the geometric ppm value lt Ht above Ref gt User input The height of the instrument station above the refer ence datum ppm above Ref gt Output The height ppm value calculated from Ht above Ref gt Individual ppm gt User input The individual ppm value Geometric ppm gt Output Geometric ppm Map Proj ppm ppm above Ref Individual ppm Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Refraction page Config Instrument Settings R9 271 CONFIGURE TPS Corrections Refraction page STONEX The refraction correction is taken into account during the calculation of the height difference Refer to R9 User Manual for information on re
265. esses Format Files where an existing format file can be selected or deleted Setup R9 605 Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen STO N EX Setup R9 606 33 4 Setup Methods 33 4 1 Setup Reminder Description e When activated the setup reminder function displays a screen which enables the user to check the current station setup details before proceeding with the survey When this screen appears three options are available to the user e 1 To keep the current station setup and proceed with the survey 2 To create a new station setup e 3 To check the backsight point e The setup reminder function is available to every application program except e Alignment Tool Kit e Setup Access When the setup reminder function is activated refer to 33 3 Configuring Setup the current station setup details are displayed whenever CONT F1 is pressed in a Begin screen in an application program STO N EX Setup R9 607 Setup Reminder screen Reminder for setup method Reminder for setup method Set Azimuth Ori amp Ht Transfer Known BS Point Resection nnne db ann zb d P T MA Mane en Information d Information d Coolstation ID 100 Cod Tnstrument Ht 1 587 m Backsight ID 101 Hethod Ori amp Ht Target Ht 1 567 m Creation Date 04 11 03 Con Hethod Set Azimuth Ref F1 Keep Current Setup Keep Current Add EZ New Setup Add F3 New Setup COGO Begin
266. et 0 3000 gt lt Identifier OS gt lt Prefix Suffix Suffix gt 12 CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to SURVEY Survey Job Name Auto page 13 SURVEY Survey Job Name Auto page START F1 starts logging of auto points and offset points 14 Walk along the centreline of the road as far as points need to be picked up OFST1 F4 to change the offset or the height difference between the auto points on the centreline and the right side of the road OFST2 F5 to change the offset or the height difference between the auto points on the centreline and the left side of the road 15 STOP F1 ends recording of auto points and offset points The stopping measuring auto points is indicated in the EDM icon STONEX Survey Auto Points R9 714 STONEX Step Description 16 After finishing the survey import the data into a CAD package If the offset point ID s or codes fulfill the requirements of the CAD package the offset points to the right and to the left of the road are automatically strung together Survey Auto Points R9 715 37 37 1 Description Diagram Le STONEX Survey Remote Point Overview Remote point is used to determine the 3D coordinates of inaccessible points for example on bridges The horizontal distance to a base point directly underneath or above the remote point is measured Then t
267. eters to be used in the 2D transformation Description of columns Column Description Source Pt The point ID of the points of origin for the calculation of the shifts and or rotation and or scale Target Pt The point ID of the target points for the calculation of the shifts and or rotation and or scale Match The type of match to be made between the points This information is used in the transformation calculation Position amp Height Position only Height only or None None removes matched common points from the transformation calcu lation but does not delete them from the list This can be used to help improve residuals STONEX R9 560 Next step IF THEN the transformation is to be computed CALC F1 The calculated shift rotation and scale values are displayed in COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale They cannot be edited The remaining functionality of the calculation is very similar to COGO calculation shift rotate amp scale manual Refer to 32 9 COGO Calculation Shift Rotate amp Scale Manual Method a pair of points is to be matched or edited NEW F2 or EDIT F3 Refer to paragraph Match points step by step parameters for the SHIFT PARAM F5 Refer to paragraph Fix parameters transformation are to be fixed Match points step by Before calculating a transformation it must be defined which points are to be matched
268. ever in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Access CONFIGURE Coding Settings and change the setting Refer to 15 3 Coding amp Line work Settings The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Coding R9 164 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Refer to paragraph Activate quick coding to activate quick coding A screen must be active where points can be measured ALL F1 must be visible For example SURVEY Survey Job Name Type in the one two or three digits of the quick code The current setting for Digits in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework determines by how many keystrokes quick coding is executed ENTER to execute quick coding already after one or two keystrokes Available for Digits 2 and Digits 3 in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework ESC clears digits from the entry What is the code type of the quick codes For point codes continue with the next row e For free codes continue with step 5 The point code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and initiates measurements Attribute values for attributes of type e normal cannot be typed in Depending on the setting for Attributes in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework the default or the last used attribute values are stored e fixed cannot be edited Coding R9 165 Step Descriptio
269. f fields Field Option Description lt Operatng Mode gt RPN The principle of for example Hewlett Packard calcula tors Refer to 24 1 Overview for more information Refer to 24 4 1 RPN Mode for a working example S T O N E X Tools Calculator R9 349 STONEX Field Option Description Standard The principle of conventional pocket calculators Refer to 24 1 Overview for more information Refer to 24 4 2 Standard Mode for a working example lt Angle Unit gt The unit used for trigonometric functions in the calcu lator The selection here is independent from the angle setting in CONFIGURE Units amp Formats DEG Degrees RAD Radians GRAD Gon lt Display Dec gt From 0 Deci The number of decimal places shown in TOOLS Calcu mals to 10 lator Decimals Next step CONT F1 confirms the selections made and returns to the screen from where TOOLS Calcu lator Configuration was accessed Tools Calculator R9 350 24 4 24 4 1 Requirements Access TOOLS RPN Calculator STONEX Using the Calculator RPN Mode lt Operatng Mode RPN gt in TOOLS Calculator Configuration Refer to 24 2 Accessing the Calculator to access TOOLS RPN Calculator Refer to paragraph Working example for information about the operating principle RPN Calculator DEG IY 0 0000 iX 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 45 0000 The function keys F1 F6 are allocated seven tim
270. f lock and prediction the prism is searched for with iLock in a dynamic iLock window This window covers a horizontal region from the position ofloss of lock to the current telescope position and the same extent on the other side The vertical dimen sion ofthe dynamic window is one third ofthe horizontal expansion Refer to 29 3 Robotic for information on Robotic Functions R9 424 Automation modes n Automation Description None Points are measured with Automation None iLock search and or iLock measurement are not performed iLock Automation iLock gt is set The iLock sensor is used for measure ments to static reflectors If needed an iLock measurement or iLock search is performed after pressing ALL F1 or DIST F2 The accuracy of iLock measurements depends on the set lt EDM Mode gt Robotic Automation Robotic is set The iLock sensor is used to follow moving prisms and to find prisms after loss of lock Depending on EDM Mode gt single or continuous measurements are performed pressing ALL F1 or DIST F2 S T O N E X Functions R9 425 29 3 Description L Enable Robotic Loss of lock STONEX Robotic Robotic enables instruments to follow a moving prism The iLock sensor is active When lt Auto mation Robotic gt and a distance measurement is initiated with DIST F2 or R GO F5 is pressed an iLock search is executed The instrument lo
271. f the arrow keys Press the stop key to stop the instrument movement Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 33 3 3 4 Description Access QUICK SET Check Recorded Pt Backsight Pt STONEX Check Recorded Point Backsight Point e The QUICK SET Check Recorded Pt Backsight Pt screen is to check if a measured point is identical to a point already stored in the job or if the instruments orientation to a backsight point is still correct Press SHIFT USER and CHKPT F4 OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key Check Recorded Pt Backsight Pt STORE F1 Point ID 4 du To exit QUICK SET Check Recorded Pt Back Reflector Ht EI sight Pt Reflector 360 Prism DIST F2 To measure a distance SETBS F3 Azimuth 0 00 01 To set the station and orientation of the instru AHoriz Dist m mentby taking a single measurementto a known AHeight BS m backsight point Refer to 33 4 3 Known Back sight Point 01A t MORE F5 STORE DIST SETBS MORE LAST To display additional information LAST F6 To recall Point ID gt of the last checked point Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 34 SHIFT POSIT F4 To position to the selected point For lt Automation iLock gt the instrument does an iLock search For lt Automation Robotic gt the instrument tries to lock on to a reflector Next step Refer to paragraph Check point step by step for in
272. faces Controlling The Device for more information Step Description 1 Main Menu Config Interfaces 2 Highlight the appropriate interface based on the type of device that needs to be configured EDIT F3 to access CONFIGURE XX DEVCE F5 to access CONFIGURE Devices Refer to paragraph CONFIGURE Devices Interfaces Ports Devices R9 314 CONFIGURE Devices STONEX This screen consists of two pages The functionality described below is always the same Devices x Giel orbe D RS232 RS232 RS232 GSI RS232 GeoCOH RS232 GSI RS232 GeoCOHN at CONT NEM EDIT DEL HORE PAGE CONT F1 To select the highlighted device and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed NEW F2 To create a new device Refer to 18 4 3 Creating a New Device EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted device Refer to 18 4 4 Editing a Device DEL F4 To delete the highlighted device MORE F5 To display information about the type of device and the creator of the device PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT DEFLT F5 To recall previously deleted default devices and to reset default devices to the default settings Interfaces Ports Devices R9 315 STONEX Description of columns Column Description Name Names of available devices Type Type of device defined when creating the device Creator The creato
273. fault settings User defined configura tion sets are not affected IF a configuration set THEN is to be selected select the desired configuration set CONT F1 to close the screen and to return to the screen from where MANAGE Configuration Sets was accessed is to be created highlight any configuration set and NEW F2 Refer to 11 3 Creatinga New Configuration Set is to be edited highlight the configuration set and EDIT F3 Refer to 11 4 Editing a Configuration Set S T O N E X Manage Configuration Sets R9 195 11 3 Creating a New Configuration Set Access Configuration step by step STONEX Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management to access MANAGE Configuration Sets The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter In MANAGE Configuration Sets highlight a configuration set A copy of this configuration set is taken for further configurations Example Select DEFAULT for the creation of a new configuration set 11 2 NEW F2 to access MANAGE New Configuration Set A copy of the highlighted configuration set is created MANAGE New Configuration Set lt Name gt A unique name for the new configuration set lt Description gt A detailed description of the configuration set since the name of a configuration set is u
274. fer to chapter COGO Intersection Input Input page The procedure for the third and fourth known point and the offset is identical to the procedure for the first and second known point Repeat steps 2 and 3 The remaining procedure is identical to a COGO intersection calculation with bearing bearing The screen is called COGO By Points Results On the Plot page two solid lines are displayed Follow the steps 5 to 13 in paragraph COGO intersection calculation with bearing bearing step by step 32 6 1 COGO R9 514 Description 32 6 5 STONEX Intersection with TPS Observation TPS Observation The COGO intersection calculation TPS observation TPS observation calculates the intersec tion point of two lines A line is defined by a TPS station and a TPS measurement from this station Elements that must be known are e the coordinates of two points e azimuths of the lines The coordinates of the known points e must be taken from the active job e must be TPS station points The azimuths of the lines e must be TPS measurements angle measurements from the known points e can be two angle measurements or an angle measurement and a distance measurement Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used COGO R9 515 Diagram COGO intersection calcu lation with TPS Obs TPS Obs step by step STONEX Known PO First known point TPS sta
275. ffset cross d3 Offset length d4 Offset length d5 Offset height d6 Offset height ome If configured in a display mask the offset values appear also in the display mask in Survey S T O N E X Config A Survey Settings R9 253 Access Select Main Menu Config Survey Settings Offsets OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Manage ment CONFIGURE Offsets ES Offsets Offset Mode WEG Offset Cross 0 000 m Offset Length 0 000 m Offset Height 0 000 n CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed 02a OFS 0 F5 CONT OFS 0 To set all offsets to 0 000 S T O N E X Config Survey Settings R9 254 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Offset Mode gt Reset after The offset values are reset to 0 000 after a point is REC measured with REC F3 or ALL F1 Permanent The offset values are applied to every measured point until reset or changed lt Offset Cross gt User input Sets cross offset of target point perpendicular to the line of sight lt Offset Length gt User input Sets length offset of target point in the direction of the line of sight lt Offset Height gt User input Sets height offset of target point Next step CONT F1 returns to the scre
276. fields apply Compute Ht gt Output text Defines the height being used Using Average Using an average of the two observations Use Upper Using the upper height Height Use Lower Using the lower height Height Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Residuals page Refer to paragraph COGO Configuration Residuals page COGO R9 476 COGO This page applies to COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Match Pts Configuration Description of fields Residuals page Field Option Description lt Easting gt User input The limit above which Easting residuals will be flagged as possible outliers lt Northing gt User input The limit above which Northing residuals will be flagged as possible outliers lt Height gt User input The limit above which Height residuals will be flagged as possible outliers lt Residual Distbtn gt The method by which the residuals of the control points will be distributed throughout the transforma tion area None No distribution is made Residuals remain with their associated points 1 Distance Distributes the residuals according to the distance between each control point and the newly transformed point Multiquad Distributes the residuals using a multiquadratic inter ratic polation approach Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Logfile page Refer to paragraph COGO Configuration Logfile page STONEX COGO R9 477 COGO Configuration
277. fined job is created and selected When a job becomes active then the sort and filter settings of this job are saved in the SystemRAM If the CompactFlash card is formatted then these last used sort and filter settings are used for the job Default S T O N E X Manage Jobs R9 64 6 2 Accessing Job Management Access MANAGE Jobs Device STONEX Select Main Menu Manage Jobs OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR From a choicelist in some screens for example the XX Begin screen of application programs Listed are all jobs stored on the CompactFlash card Jobs CF Card 19 09 44 CONT F1 To select the highlighted job and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed NEW F2 To create a job Refer to 6 3 Creating a New Job EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted job Refer to 6 4 Editing a Job Mat DEL F4 CONT NEW EDIT DEL DATA INTL To delete the highlighted job DATA F5 To view edit and delete points lines and areas stored with the job Points lines and areas are shown on separate pages Selected sort and filter settings apply Refer to 7 3 Point Management Manage Jobs R9 65 Next step IF ajob THEN is to be selected highlight the desired job CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to the screen from where MANAGE Jobs Device was accessed is to be created NEW F2 Refer to 6 3 Creating
278. formation on how to check a recorded point Check point step by step Step Description 1 QUICK SET Change Settings to 2 CHKPT F4 to access QUICK SET Check Recorded Pt Backsight Pt 3 QUICK SET Check Recorded Pt Backsight Pt lt Point ID gt Point ID to be checked lt Calculated Az gt Calculated azimuth between station and backsight point lt Current Az gt Current orientation lt AAz gt Difference between calculated azimuth and current orientation POSIT F5 to position to the point DIST F2 to measure a distance SETBS F3 to set the station and orientation of the instrument by taking a single measurement to a known backsight point STONEX Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 35 Step Description 6 CONT F1 to return to the screen QUICK SET Change Settings to was accessed from Ce If a stored point was checked the lt Point ID gt for that point is remembered and recalled when LAST F6 is pressed S T O N E X Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 36 3 3 5 Robotic R GO F5 When R GO F5 is pressed an iLock search is performed the instrument locks onto the reflector without a measurement lt Automation Robotic gt is set Ee R GO F5 can be used to lock onto a prism located on an unstable surface for example on a boat or near to the instrument R INT F5 When the instrument is locked onto the prism thi
279. fraction calculation PS Corrections AtmosPPM GeomPPM Refraction Refraction Correction Correction A Ongl Ref coeff k 0 13 CONT F1 To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu DEFLT F5 Sets Correction On and Ref coeff k 0 13 02a PAGE F6 CONT DEFLT PAGE To change to other page on screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Correction gt On or Off Refraction correction is applied to measurements lt Ref coeff k gt User input Available if lt Correction On gt Refraction coefficient to be used for calculation Next step CONT F1 returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE TPS Corrections was accessed Config Instrument Settings R9 272 16 5 Description Access CONFIGURE Compensator STONEX Compensator The compensator and the Hz correction can be deactivated if raw data is to be displayed and recorded Select Main Menu Config Instrument Settings Compensator OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management OR ICONS Compensator X Compensator TT Hz Correction On 02a CONT F1 CONT To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu Config Instrument Settings R9 273 STONEX Description of fields Field Op
280. from Group where MANAGE Edit Code was accessed Code Type NEW A F2 Linework To add a new attribute to a code Line Style NAME F3 or VALUE F3 Attribute 1 Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in To highlight Attribute n gt or the field for the attribute value The name 02a of Attribute n can be edited and an attribute STORE NEW A NAME value can be typed in The behaviour of this screen varies with the type of code to be edited The differences are explained in the table Manage Jobs R9 76 STONEX Type of code Description Point codes and e New attributes can be added with NEW A F2 Free codes Line codes e New attributes can be added with NEW A F2 and e The line style can be changed This new line style is stored to the Area codes code It can be decided whether or not to update the line style of all previously stored lines areas with this code in this job Manage Jobs R9 77 7 Manage Data 7 1 Overview Description e Datais a generic term for points lines and areas e Data management is the administration of data stored in the active job This includes viewing data with their related information editing data creating new data deleting existing data filtering existing data Objects e Objects are points lines and areas have a unique identification ID This is the point ID the line I
281. g Survey Settings R9 257 16 16 1 Description L Access CONFIGURE EDM amp iLock Settings Survey page Setup page STONEX Config Instrument Settings EDM amp iLock Settings e The settings on this screen define the active EDM Electronic Distance Measurement and iLock settings e Refer to 29 Functions for detailed information on EDM and iLock Descriptions apply in general to R9 instruments e Available options depend on the purchased model for example with or without iLock Select Main Menu Config Instrument Settings EDM amp iLock Settings OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Press SHIFT USER Refer to 3 Quick Settings SHIFT USER for information on the SHIFT USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management Description e This screen has two pages the Survey page and the Setup page e The Survey page and Setup page contain identical fields Config Instrument Settings R9 258 STONEX e The settings made in the Survey page are used by all applications and all measurements taken outside of the Setup application program e The settings made in the Setup page are only used inside the Setup application program e Any changes made to the EDM amp iLock Settings for example via Icons Quick Set Hotkeys while the Setup application program is active o
282. g Auto Pts Yes gt in SURVEY Configuration Auto Points page Access Step Dy Step Step Description 1 Refer to 35 1 Accessing Survey to access SURVEY Survey Begin 2 SURVEY Survey Begin Check the settings CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name 4 PAGE F6 until the Auto page is visible SURVEY The Auto page of a typical configuration set is explained Before logging of auto points has Survey Job Name started the page appears as shown below Auto page Survey active job Survey Offset Code Auto Map Auto Pt ID Auto0038 START F1 Reflector Ht 1 250 n4 To start logging of auto points and offset points if configured or for Log By User Decides gt to Hsd Auto Pts 34 start the chain to which the auto points should Code Auto None HI be assigned The first auto point is stored Code Desc aca lt EDM Mode Tracking gt becomes active For Slope Dist 119 000 m lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt instrument locks z 55 0002 gv onto reflector For EDM Type Long Range LO EDM Type Reflector IR is set and i ga STOP REC OFST4 OFST2 PAGE instrument locks onto the reflector S T O N E X Survey Auto Points R9 699 STOP F1 To end recording of auto points and offset points if configured or for lt Log By User Decides gt to end the chain to which the auto points are assigned REC F3 Available for STOP F1 To store an auto point at any time OFST1 F4 To configure record
283. g code instrument PIN Vstina vier is 300 Point R9 744 IVE AV ed BEMIS Teast sg sx age craa scrap edicts secu ceayoustaasearestats uM n aei 84 Orientate to EI UE Sorting and filter Point ID REIDEN Point sorting Point symbols MapView Points Quick coding ueteri te bie 164 Points to be staked manual enter EEN 665 Polar mode stakeout eee tenerent tnter ntntenn 675 Nee leet 30 Positive offset COGO ENNEN 490 Power down on essessssssssssssessesssssessesssscsnssussuesnsescsucsnsesessessesueensesseneeseeaees 300 PPM ene TE le 269 Geometric sessscssssssesseseesssesssssesesssssssesesessssesnsecansecesssusecesssuessesesss 270 STONEX Precise measurements ENEE tenente tenent ee e LE Prisi SeafCh vecccsiecessinveedacattcivee iecteuiviedeatssateesgecessinneeeteiveceevecteuttvecten Prism search after prediction Prism system RN E ger Projection distortion Properties COGO points Offset points Setup points Staked points Protection by PIN PUK isnin 16 300 PUK InStEUment sssini anneta r Sis 301 Q ERIT 284 Quick access to screens CONDE E a edu TEE Quick coding siiin Icon Line area R9 745 Ee ele TEE 151 Quick Settings Dur 24 IN ue ELOJ E 27 SHIFT USER steht Saar E RS 23 Quick Settings netu etra aada imitare 43 R par 37 Ero rnm 37 RINT eeh 37 tobpec c 320 Default
284. ge Azimuth The direction from the first known point to the COGO point lt Offset gt Available for Use Offsets Yes in COGO Configuration Parameters page The offset of the COGO point from the line of direc tion A positive offset is to the right a negative offset is to the left Type in the azimuth and the offset if required The values for the azimuth and the offset can be calculated from two existing points INV F2 when lt Azimuth gt or lt Offset gt is highlighted To perform a COGO inverse calculation Ce Upon pressing STORE F1 in COGO Inverse the result from the COGO inverse calculation is copied to the field which was high lighted when INV F2 was pressed C amp For Write Logfile Yes in COGO Configuration Logfile page the result ofthe COGO inverse calculation is written to the logfile 32 4 COGO R9 500 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Ce The values for the azimuth and the offset can be selected from previous 32 12 COGO inverse calculations LAST F4 when lt Azimuth gt or lt Offset gt is highlighted To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations Upon pressing CONT F1 in COGO Last Inverse Calculations the selected result is copied to the field which was highlighted when LAST F4 was pressed Ce The values for the azimuth and the offset can be mathematically modi 32 13 fied SHIFT MOD
285. ge for the position and the height is computed Depending on the selected averaging method the average will be computed weighted or arithmetic no weighting The class AVGE is assigned to the averaged point The horizontal and height distances from the measured points to the average are computed and displayed on the Mean page A check is performed that the differences for the position and height compo nents between the averaged point and the point being stored does not exceed the defined limits Absolute Diffs What is described above for Average applies for Absolute Diffs Additionally the absolute difference between two points selected from a list of measured points which are all stored with the same point ID are computed and checked for being within the defined limits Off Averaging functionality is turned off With more than one measured coordinate triplet recorded for the same point no average for the position and the height is computed Averaging with position only or height only points Position only points height only points and points with full coordinate triplets are handled in the averaging Manage Data R9 100 Access step by step The Mean page can be accessed if lt Averaging Mode Average gt or lt Averaging Mode Absolute Diffs gt is configured in MANAGE New Job Avge page or in MANAGE Edit Job Job Name Avge page AND more than one measured coordinate triplet is recorded for the sa
286. ges The softkeys described below are specific to MapView in plot mode Refer to 30 4 1 Softkeys for descriptions ofthe standard softkeys Traverse Results Result Code Plot CS em Pt Q BDXF 43 SHIFT FIT R F4 5 To fit the results in the screen area 02a f SHIFT RFRSH F5 STORE ZOOH ZOOH PAGE To refresh the screen MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 453 Touch screen functions Key Touch Equivalent SHIFT FIT R F4 Tap on fit results touch icon Refer to 30 4 3 Toolbar Example of results EAE F HE Application Displa Description displayedin MapView on PP BEAY Ip Plot page COGO Intersec ue d Intersecting lines tion Bearing bes 7 ar with known bear Bearing gt f ings from known ay points F 12 ee STORE zoot zoon PAGE COGO line calcu SERE Results x Points defining the lation Segmen 3 i line and those tation E created on the line DU ei SS o of af ud 02a CONT zoot zoon PAGE S T O N E X MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 454 STONEX Application Display Description COGO Shift Shift Rotate amp Scale Store x Original points in General Summary Plot Rotate amp Scale E grey calculated 4 a001 3 COGO points in St a black Bs Se 42 02a 8 STORE FOCUS EDIT Z00M zoon PAGE Setup Directions to resec Results Least Squares Stn Coords Si
287. ghlight the line F2 OPEN F4 to open the line Highlight the line G1 OPEN F4 to open the line Line F1 stays open 10 CONT F1 11 SURVEY Survey Job Name Measure P1 This point is automatically added to all three lines open at that time 35 1 Manage Data R9 114 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter 12 Press F7 13 MANAGE Data Job Name Lines X page Highlight the line F1 CLOSE F4 to close the line 14 Highlight the line F2 CLOSE F4 to close the line CS _ Line G1 stays open 15 CONT F1 16 SURVEY Survey Job Name 35 1 Measure points along gate G1 These points are automatically added to line G1 17 After finishing the survey import the data into a CAD package If the line codes required by the CAD package were used the lines are automatically connected and the point symbols are automatically set Manage Data R9 115 7 5 Data Log Description A list of all objects and free codes in the active job is displayed in order of time Access step by step Access within data management Step Description 1 Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management to access MANAGE Data Job Name 2 In MANAGE Data Job Name on the Points page SHIFT LOG F4 to access MANAGE Data Log Job Name Access within job management Step Description 1 Main Menu Manage Jobs to access MAN
288. ging lt Avge Limit Pos gt and lt Avge Limit Ht gt The acceptable difference for the position and height components For lt Averaging Mode Absolute Diffs gt lt Points to Use gt The type of points which will be taken into account for absolute differences From lt Easting gt to lt Cartesian Z gt The acceptable absolute differ ences for each coordinate component For lt Averaging Mode Off gt Manage Jobs Refer to chapter R9 69 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter No other fields are available 8 STORE F1 creates the new job and returns to MANAGE Jobs Device Manage Jobs R9 70 6 4 Editing a Job Access Edit job step by step STONEX Refer to 6 2 Accessing Job Management to access MANAGE Jobs Device The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 In MANAGE Jobs Device highlight a job to be edited EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Job Job Name General page 3 MANAGE Edit Job Job Name General page lt Name gt Rename the job lt Device gt Cannot be edited The remaining functionality on this page is identical with the creation of 6 3 a new job Ce DATA F5 accesses MANAGE Data Job Name To view edit and delete 7 2 points lines and areas stored with the job Points lines
289. gma Stn Code P1ot Ka E SE Krees _SET RosT zoor zoon PAGE tion points MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 455 Description Access L STONEX 30 7 30 7 1 Survey Mode MapView in Survey Mode The survey mode of MapView is available as the Map page in Survey and is used to display the position of the instrument station during a survey It can also be used to select lines and areas It is also used by the Stakeout application program to assist in the staking out measuring of points Refer to 30 7 2 MapView in Staking Out Survey Mode for more information about using MapView when staking out points Refer to 30 2 Accessing MapView paragraph Example access for survey mode The SURVEY Survey Job Name Map page is used as the example below The functions described are the same for all Map pages in survey mode MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 456 SURVEY Survey Job Name Map page STONEX The softkeys described below are specific to MapView in survey mode Refer to 30 4 1 Softkeys for descriptions of the standard iii IRI GUN cC RN active job Survey Offset Code Auto IRI GUN cC RN gr E SHIFT CENTR F4 To centre the screen around the point with the current focus or the focus tool if FOCUS F2 is mam active 2a tf SHIFT RFRSH F5 ALL DIST REC ZOOH ZOOH PAGE To refresh the screen Touch screen functions
290. h the currently assigned port and device Unavailable information is indicated by 1 Interfaces Interface Port GSI Output GeoCOH Hode 1 Export Job Maf CONT F1 CONT IFACE DEVCE To exit STATUS Interfaces STATUS R9 415 28 6 Description Access STATUS Bluetooth STONEX STATUS Bluetooth This screen shows e Bluetooth ports available and configured e the device attached and connected to each Bluetooth port e the ID address of each device Select STATUS Bluetooth Refer to 28 1 STATUS Functions on how to access the STATUS menu OR Tap the Bluetooth icon The way information is displayed indicates the configuration status of the Bluetooth port and the connection status of the device Device connected Information displayed Bluetooth port configured in black y Y in grey Y as Next step CONT F1 exits STATUS Bluetooth STATUS R9 416 28 7 Description Access L STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet Level page STONEX STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet The electronic level is shown and can be centred Select STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet Refer to 28 1 STATUS Functions on how to access the STATUS menu OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key The level moves linear with the inclination values lt Tilt L gt and lt Tilt T gt On the screen c
291. hat line and lt Go LEFT gt when the reflector is to the left of that line Shows before the first distance measure ment with DIST F2 lt FILL gt or CUT Output The height difference between the target point and the measured point Field is CUT when the measured point is higher than the target point and lt FILL gt if the measured point is lower than the target point Shows before the first distance measurement with DIST F2 or if the target point is a 2D point Setup R9 644 STONEX Field Option Description lt Height gt or lt Ht gt Output The measured height of the current position Shows before the first distance measurement with DIST F2 or if the target point is a 2D point Next step CONT F1 to return to the SETUP Measure Target screen Setup R9 645 34 34 1 Description Diagram STONEX Stakeout Overview The Stakeout application program is used to place marks in the field at predetermined points These predetermined points are the points to be staked The points to be staked may have been uploaded to a job on the instrument using Stonex Tools already exist in a job on the instrument have been uploaded from an ASCII file to a job on the instrument using Main Menu Convert Import ASCII GSI Data to Job be typed in PO Station 13 P1 Current position P2 Point to be stake
292. he ID templates for auxiliary points These points are used when trying to find a stake out point lt Lines gt Choicelist Sets the ID templates for lines lt Areas gt Choicelist Sets the ID templates for areas Next step IF an ID template THEN is to be selected select the desired ID template CONT F1 to close the screen and to return to the screen from where CONFIGURE ID Templates was accessed is to be created Refer to 15 1 3 Creating a New ID Template is to be edited Refer to 15 1 4 Editing an ID Template is to be deleted Refer to 15 1 5 Deleting an ID Template Config Survey Settings R9 229 15 1 3 Creating a New ID Template Create ID template step by step STONEX Step Description 1 Refer to 15 1 2 Accessing ID Template Configuration to access CONFIGURE ID Templates In CONFIGURE ID Templates highlight any field ENTER to access CONFIGURE ID Template Library Highlight an ID template A copy of this ID template is taken for further configura tions NEW F2 to access CONFIGURE New ID Template CONFIGURE New ID Template lt ID gt The name ofthe ID template and the format of the ID object Any characters including spaces are allowed Leading spaces are not accepted Increment ID s are incremented numerical or alphanumerical Increment By The amount by which the point ID is incremented Curso
293. he V Limit page elescope Accessories X Hz Limit V Linit Eyepiece Accessories V Begin 45 00 00 V End 135 00 00 CONT F1 VE adis 45 00 00 ao changes and return to R9 Main Menu V End 135 00 00 To define new vertical limits for telescope rota Use Limit aT tion af SHOW F5 CONT NEW SHOW PAGE To position the telescope to its rotation limits Description of fields Field Option Description lt V Begin gt Output User Vertical extent of the window in which the instrument V End gt input is allowed to turn the telescope The value of the current limit refers to the vertical reading of the present line of sight direction Config Instrument Settings R9 278 Field Option Description lt Use Limit gt None Telescope turns without any limitation from 0 to 400 gon Eyepiece The movement of the telescope is limited by the stored Eyepiece Accessories Limits Lens The movement of the telescope is limited by the stored Lens Accessories Limits Eyepce amp Lens The movement of the telescope is limited by the combi nation of both areas with the least vertical extend Next step CONT F1 returns to R9 Main Menu S T O N E X Config Mnstrument Settings R9 279 17 Config General Settings 17 1 Units amp Formats Description The settings on this screen define e the units for all types of me
294. he chosen reflector Next step CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name where measurements can be performed with ALL F1 or DIST F2 and or REC F3 Survey General R9 683 35 2 Description Access step by step SURVEY Survey Job Name Survey page STONEX Surveying Points The Survey application program is used for point measurement Coordinates for points can be measured and stored using ALL F1 DIST F2 and REC F3 The table describes the main access to SURVEY Survey Job Name Access is possible from other screens where individual point measurements are needed for example from COGO Inverse with SURVY F5 Step Description 1 Refer to 35 1 Accessing Survey to access SURVEY Survey Begin 2 SURVEY Survey Begin CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name The fields shown are those from a typical configuration set The screen described consists ofthe Survey page and the Map page The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for the Survey page Refer to 30 MapView Interactive Display Feature for information on the keys on the Map page The fields and functionality of this screen vary slightly when accessed from other application programs where individual point measurements are needed Survey General R9 684 active job ALL F1 Survey Offset L Code Map To measure and store distances and angles Point ID 0001 STOP F1 R
295. he functionality is identical to the point code filter Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Areas page Refer to paragraph MANAGE Sorts amp Filters Areas page Sorts amp Filters Points Lines Areas Sort Ascend Area ID CONT F1 To close the screen andreturn to the screen from Filter where this screen was accessed The selected sortand filter settings are applied and the lists in MANAGE DATA Job Name are updated CODES F4 Available for Filter Code Code Group To select the area codes to be used 02a t PAGE F6 CONT CODES PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields The functionality of setting the filters is identical to those on the Lines page Refer to paragraph MANAGE Sorts amp Filters Lines page Manage Data R9 124 Next step CONT F1 returns to the screen from where MANAGE Sorts amp Filters was accessed S T O N E X Manage Data R9 125 7 6 2 Point Line and Area Code Filter Ce For each object a code filter exists The point line and area code filters are independent from each other The functionality is identical For simplicity the point code filter is explained Access step by step Step Description 1 Refer to 7 6 1 Sorting and Filters for Points Lines and Areas to access MANAGE Sorts amp Filters Select lt Filter Point Code gt CODES F4 to access MANAGE Point Code Filter
296. he instrument is aimed at the remote point The coordinates of the remote point are calculated with the distance measured to the base point and the angles measured to the remote point PO P1 P2 di Instrument station Base point Remote point Horizontal distance to the base point Vertical angle between base point and remote point Vertical axis from P1 to P2 To ensure correct results the remote point and the reflector must be lined up vertically If it is not possible to maintain an exactly vertical line the acceptable Hz Dist Tol gt must be chosen The horizontal distance to the remote point and to the base point should coincide Survey Remote Point R9 716 Properties of remote The properties stored with auto points are points Class MEAS e Sub class TPS e Source Survey Rem Pt Instrument source TPS Averaging of remote An average can be calculated for remote points if a measured point of class MEAS already exists points with the same point ID The average flag for the point is AUTO S T O N E X Survey Remote Point R9 717 37 2 L Access SURVEY Survey Remote Point Remote Pt page STONEX Accessing Remote Point Remote point measurements are possible from the Survey application program when lt Use Remote Pt Yes gt is set in the SURVEY Configuration Remote Pt page and a valid distance measurement is available Refer to 37 3 Configuring Remote Point
297. he name of the file to which the data should be written A logfile is stored in the DATA directory of the active memory device The data is always appended to the file Opening the choicelist accesses XX Logfiles where a name for a new logfile can be created and an existing logfile can be selected or deleted lt Format File gt Choicelist Available for lt Write Logfile Yes gt A format file defines which and how data is written to a logfile Format files are created using Stonex Tools A format file must first be transferred from the CompactFlash card to the System RAM before it can be selected Refer to 22 Tools Transfer Objects for information on how to transfer a format file Opening the choicelist accesses XX Format Files where an existing format file can be selected or deleted Stakeout R9 661 Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen S T O N E X Stakeout R9 662 34 4 Staking Out 34 4 1 Elements of the Graphical Display in the Stakeout Description A graphical display provides a guide to find the point to be staked out The elements of the graphical display used within the Stakeout application program screens are explained in this chapter Some of the elements depend on the selection for Visual Guides gt in STAKEOUT Configuration General page Other elements are commonly displayed The Map page provides an interactive display of the data Refer to
298. he new point The configured point ID template is used The ID can be changed e To start a new sequence of point ID s overtype the point ID e For an individual name independent of the ID template SHIFT INDIV F5 SHIFT RUN F5 changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template Enter a point ID and the coordinates PAGE F6 changes to the Code page MANAGE New Point Code page The setting for lt Thematc Codes gt in CONFIGURE Coding Settings determines the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys Manage Data R9 92 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter e For lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt The codes from the job codelist are used lt Point Code gt All point codes of the job codelist can be selected The description of the code is shown as an output field The attributes are shown as output input or choicelist fields depending on their definition For lt Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt Codes for points can be typed in but not selected from a codelist lt Point Code gt The code to be stored with the point A check is performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in the job If so the according attributes are shown lt Attribute n gt Up to eight attribute values are available 6 Is lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt e Ifyes continue with the next row e Ifno continue with step 7 Ce NEW A F2 allows
299. he third decimal Last field on the User input The value for next operation or result from latest oper screen ation Next step SHIFT DONE F4 returns to R9 Main Menu Working example Task Calculate 3 5 7 6 S T O N E X Tools V Calculator R9 355 STONEX Step Description 1 Type in 3 2 ENTER 3 F1 4 Type in 5 5 ENTER Ce Last field on the screen displays 8 00000 6 A such that STO F1 is visible 7 STO F1 8 Y such that F1 is visible 9 Type in 7 10 ENTER 11 F1 12 Type in 6 13 ENTER Ce Last field on the screen displays 13 00000 Ce _ Remember 13 00000 14 A such that REC F2 is visible 15 REC F2 to recall 8 00000 16 ENTER 17 Y such that F4 is visible Tools V Calculator R9 356 STONEX Step Description 18 F4 19 Type in 13 20 ENTER Ce Last field on the screen displays 0 61538 Tools Calculator R9 357 24 4 3 Description of Softkeys Overview of softkeys The softkeys shown and described are those of lt Operatng Mode RPN gt Most of the softkeys are identical and their functionality is similar to that for lt Operatng Mode Standard gt The function keys F1 F6 are allocated seven times with softkeys Using A or V the various allo cations can be accessed DEG ry 0 0000 IX 0 0000 T 0 0000 Z 0 000
300. hematical With cpgdehet erger 153 Without codelist neen 157 Coding Settings ENEE 247 COGO eege EE EE EE 465 R9 734 Bee UE ele E 471 ATCA teen EE ee 473 Distance input output ENEE 475 jj p SM Intersections Inverse Line Calculations zuerst 470 Modify values ENEE 590 Shift Rotate amp Scale EEN 472 Shift Rotate amp Scale Match Pts sss 473 Re 469 COGO points COIN ances Senet DEA 466 Idque 466 Combined adjustment I t i c and Aim 384 CompactFlash card iarsna 48 COD eds niente at eee ULM sue 52 Compass orientate with ENEE Comp eltisatoE ei sacisetedia cedi a NL En Cede i en des Adjustment I t Configuration ICOn nnn Index errors I t Longitudinal error ENEE 371 Transversal error iiini 371 Moi 24 Computing Offset points 704 STONEX Survey settings ii 225 Configuration Atto he Check amp Odette eet e Mun E CompensatOE osin catu tatus e te en LN ELE ERE us General settings Instrument settings Interfaces MapVIeW Ee Offset auto points ENEE OPPS CES ioc etatem a hOubnnu Setup nn Stakeout Configuration files directory Configuration set Default sescenti eda uet ia e do Description Management eent Management access EENEG 194 Recall deleted def
301. his panel are stored within the currently active configuration set Configuration Auto Points Remote Pt Use SCodes Show Info Heasure Point pI Hethod Zig Zag dr CONT F1 Direction Forward 4 To accept changes and return to the screen from No Elements ER where this screen was accessed 02a t PAGE F6 P CONT AGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Use SCodes gt Yes Activates using of SmartCodes Ce Al other fields on the screen are active and can be edited Coding R9 169 STONEX Field Option Description No Deactivates using of SmartCodes and all fields on this screen lt Show Info gt Information shown in line 8 of SURVEY Survey Job name SCode page Not used No display mask element is shown Point ID The identifier for the measured points The configured point ID template is used C Refer to 35 2 Surveying Points 3D CQ The current 3D coordinate quality of the measured point 2D CQ The current 2D coordinate quality of the measured point 1D CQ The current height coordinate quality ofthe measured point Reflector Ht The height of the reflector that is being used Changing the reflector height here does not update the default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set Hz The current horizontal angle of the measured point V The current vertical ang
302. hlight Setup CONT F1 In SETUP Station Setup Begin press CONF F2 to access SETUP Configuration OR Press SHIFT CONF F2 in SETUP Station Setup Configuration General Parameters Checks Logfile Setup Reminder CONT F1 Two Faces No dy To accept changes and return to the screen from Use Scale No where this screen was accessed Auto Position bt PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen Display AR i No SHIFT ABOUT F5 x To display information about the program name 247 the version number the date of the version the CONT PAGE copyright and the article number Setup R9 598 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Setup Reminder gt Choicelist Yes No Current instrument setup details can be displayed to remind the user to either keep the current instrument setup or to create a new instrument setup Refer to 33 4 1 Setup Reminder for details Whenever CONT F1 is pressed in a Begin screen the current setup information is displayed Whenever CONT F1 is pressed in a Begin screen the current setup information is not displayed and the program continues as normal lt Two Faces gt Choicelist Yes No Defines if the instrument measures the second face automatically after storing the first After storing a measurement with ALL F1 or REC F3 motorised instruments change face automatically non motorised instr
303. hod 544 32 10 COGO Calculation Shift Rotate amp Scale Match Pts Method 558 32 11 Area Division 564 32 11 1 Overview 564 32 11 2 Choosing an Area to be Divided 571 32 11 3 Dividing an Area 576 32 11 4 Results of the Area Division 581 32 11 5 Working Example 584 32 12 Selecting a Result from Previous COGO Inverse Calculations 588 32 13 Modifying Values for Azimuths Distances and Offsets 590 S T O N E X Table of Contents R9 13 S T O N E X Table of Contents 33 Setup 594 33 1 Overview 594 33 2 Accessing Setup 595 33 3 Configuring Setup 598 33 4 Setup Methods 607 33 4 1 Setup Reminder 607 33 4 2 Set Azimuth 609 33 4 8 Known Backsight Point 617 33 4 4 Orientation and Height Transfer 622 33 4 5 Resection Resection Helmert 626 33 4 6 Local Resection 627 33 5 Setup Results 631 33 5 1 Least Square and Robust Calculation 631 33 5 2 Additional Information 637 33 5 3 Local Resection Calculation 640 33 6 Finding a Target Point 643 34 Stakeout 646 34 1 Overview 646 34 2 Accessing Stakeout 650 34 3 Configuring Stakeout 653 34 4 Staking Out 663 34 4 1 Elements of the Graphical Display in the Stakeout 663 34 4 2 Manual Entry of Points to be Staked 665 34 4 3 Staking Out in Orthogonal Mode 667 34 4 4 Staking Out in Polar Mode 675 34 4 5 Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded 679 RI 14 35 Survey General 682 35 1 Accessing Survey 682 35 2 Surveying Points 684 36 X Survey Auto Points 689 36 1 Over
304. hted format file from the System RAM 4 CONT F1 selects the highlighted format file and leads back to EXPORT Export ASCII from Job 5 FILT F4 to set the sort and filter settings for export Accesses EXPORT Sorts amp Filters 6 EXPORT Sorts amp Filters Points page 7 6 lt Sort gt The order in which points lines and areas are exported lt Filter gt Defines which points are exported 7 CONT F1 accepts the changes and returns to EXPORT Export ASCII from Job Convert Export Data from Job R9 208 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter CONT F1 exports the data Information message Are more data to be exported e Ifyes continue with step 10 e Ifno continue with step 11 10 YES F4 Repeat steps 1 to 9 11 NO F6 returns to the R9 Main Menu Convert Export Data from Job R9 209 13 4 Exporting Data from a Job to another Device General Data can be transferred to an external device via RS232 Access Refer to 13 2 Accessing the Data Export Functionality to access EXPORT Export ASCII from Job Export data step by step The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 EXPORT Export ASCII from Job 13 1 lt Export To RS232 gt Ce IFACE F5 accesses CONFIGURE Export Job Interface Choose the port and device to wh
305. ical coding is available in COGO XX Results after the COGO calculation Thematical coding of COGO points is identical to coding measured points Refer to 9 Coding for infor mation on coding e For the COGO calculation shift rotate amp scale the codes from the original points are taken over for the calculated COGO points Properties The properties stored with COGO points are of COGO points e Class Either MEAS or CTRL depending on the COGO calculation method e Sub class COGO Source Arc Base Pt Arc Centre Pt Arc Offset Pt Arc Segmt Pt COGO Area Divsn COGO Shift Rtn COGO Traverse Intsct Brg Brg Intsct Brg Dst Intsct Dst Dst Intsct 4 Pts Line Base Pt Line Offset Pt or Line Segmt Pt depending on the COGO calculation method used e Instrument source TPS STONEX COGO R9 466 32 2 Access Le COGO COGO Begin STONEX Accessing COGO Select Main Menu Programs COGO OR Press ON Highlight COGO CONT F1 Refer to 31 2 Accessing the Programs Menu for information on the ON key OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key The screens for each COGO calculation method can be accessed directly by pressing USER where COGO COGO Begin is not accessed The currently active configuration set and job are used COGO Begin Job Default s CONT F1 Codelist None To accept changes and access the subsequent screen The chosen settings become active
306. ich the data should be exported 2 FILT F4 to set the sort and filter settings for the export Accesses EXPORT Sorts amp Filters 3 EXPORT Sorts amp Filters Points page 7 6 lt Sort gt The order in which points lines and areas are exported lt Filter gt Defines which points are exported 4 CONT F1 accepts the changes and returns to EXPORT Export ASCII from Job CONT F1 exports the data Information message Are more data to be exported S T O N E X Convert Export Data from Job R9 210 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter e Ifyes continue with step 7 e Ifno continue with step 8 YES F4 Repeat the steps 1 to 6 NO F6 returns to the R9 Main Menu Convert Export Data from Job R9 211 13 5 Exporting Data in DXF Format General Data can be exported to a DXF file in the DATA directory of the CompactFlash card Access Refer to 13 2 Accessing the Data Export Functionality to access EXPORT Export DXF from Job Export data step by step Step Description 1 EXPORT Export DXF from Job lt Job gt All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected lt File name gt The name of the file to which the data should be exported The name is automatically suggested based on the job name to be exported and the extension dxf Select the job to be exported and enter an individual file name or accept the suggested name
307. ick Settings SHIFT USER R9 25 STONEX Next step IF THEN a Setting is to be type the selection number in front of the item or highlight the item and changed press ENTER the instrument is to be automatically turned to a specific position COMPS F1 Hz V F2 or JSTCK F3 to access the subsequent screen Refer to 3 3 Quick Setting Functions a point or the instru ment orientationis to be checked CHKPT F4 to access the QUICK SET Check Recorded Pt Backsight Pt screen Refer to 3 3 Quick Setting Functions prism is to be locked onto press R GO F5 to activate Robotic and start an iLock search Refer to 3 3 5 Robotic Robotic is to be inter rupted press R INT F5 to interrupt Robotic Refer to 3 3 5 Robotic Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 26 3 3 3 3 1 Description Access S Orientation with compass step by step STONEX Quick Setting Functions Orientation With Compass By using a conventional magnetic compass while remotely controlling the instrument it is possible to determine the general direction towards which the instrument should turn in order to perform a target search to locate the prism Press COMPS F1 in the QUICK SET Change Settings to screen Refer to 3 2 QUICK SET Change Settings to The instrument must be connected to a radio to be remote controlled with a controller The following table explains the mo
308. if the ID template is being used in a configuration set The ID template will be rebuilt when that configuration set becomes active YES F4 returns to the CONFIGURE ID Template Library CONT F1 returns to CONFIGURE ID Templates CONT F1 returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE ID Templates was accessed Config Survey Settings R9 236 15 1 6 Working Example Description Application Pick up points with many different point ID s e Most point ID s require an incrementing number behind a text Working technique Application program Survey Goal e The first point ID s for survey points are Bolt 001 Bolt 002 Adifferent point ID can be entered during the survey e The following point ID s will be based on the entered point ID e An individual point ID can be typed in for one point Requirement Application program Survey is selected Refer to 35 Survey General for more information on Survey Configuration of ID St D ipti template step by step EE Sena 1 Refer to 15 1 3 Creating a New ID Template Follow step 1 to 4 2 CONFIGURE New ID Template lt ID Bolt 001 gt lt Increment Numeric only gt lt Increment By 1 gt lt Cursor Posn 1 gt CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to CONFIGURE ID Template Library CONT F1 returns to CONFIGURE ID Templates S T O N E X Config A Survey Settings R9 237 Field proce
309. ighted Press NEW F2 to create a new point 3 COGO Intersection Input Input page COGO R9 512 STONEX Step Description lt Offset gt Available for lt Use Offsets Yes gt in COGO Configuration Parameters page The offset of the line in the direction lt 1st Point gt to lt 2nd Point gt A positive offset is to the right a negative offset is to the left Type in the offset if required Refer to chapter The value for the offset can be calculated from two existing points INV F2 when lt Offset gt is highlighted To perform a COGO inverse calculation Ce Upon pressing STORE F1 in COGO Inverse the result from the COGO inverse calculation is copied to the field which was high lighted when INV F2 was pressed Ce For Write Logfile Yes in COGO Configuration Logfile page the result ofthe COGO inverse calculation is written to the logfile 32 4 The value for the offset can be selected from previous COGO inverse calculations LAST F4 when lt Offset gt is highlighted To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations Upon pressing CONT F1 in COGO Last Inverse Calculations the selected result is copied to the field 32 12 The value for the offset can be mathematically modified SHIFT MODIF F4 when lt Offset gt is highlighted To add subtract multiply and divide values 32 13 COGO R9 513 STONEX Step Description Re
310. inate for the remote point lt Height gt Output Calculated height for the remote point Survey Remote Point R9 719 STONEX Next step IF THEN if a remote point is to STORE F1 be stored a new base point is to be measured BASE F4 to return to SURVEY Survey Job Name Survey Remote Point R9 720 37 3 Access SURVEY Configuration Remote Pt page STONEX Configuring Remote Point Select Main Menu Survey In SURVEY Survey Begin press CONF F2 to access SURVEY Configuration PAGE F6 until the Remote Pt page is active OR In SURVEY Survey Job Name press SHIFT CONF F2 to access SURVEY Configuration PAGE F6 until the Remote Pt page is active The settings on this screen activate the remote point function Configuration Remote Pt Use Remote Pt ETT AV Hz Dist Tol 0 2000 n CONT F1 Display Mask None To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed DMASK F3 Accesses CONFIGURE Define Display Mask n 02a t Available for Display Mask gt being high CONT PAGE lighted Refer to 15 2 Display Settings Survey Remote Point R9 721 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description Use Remote Pt gt Yes Activates the remote point function REMOT F4 is added to the function keys in SURVEY Survey Job Name No Deactivates the remote poi
311. ines areas and free codes stored with the job sorted by time Refer to 7 5 Data Log SHIFT FILT F5 To define sort and filter settings Refer to 7 6 Point Sorting and Filters Next step IF THEN a point is to be highlight the point and NEW F2 Refer to 7 3 2 Creating a New Point created a point is to be edited highlight the point and EDIT F3 Refer to 7 3 3 Editing a Point aline areaistobe PAGE F6 changes to the Lines X and Areas X page Refer to para managed graph MANAGE Data Job Name Lines X page MANAGE Data Job Name Areas X page MANAGE The explanations for the softkeys given below are valid for both pages Data Job Name The number in brackets next to the name of the page indicate the number of open lines areas Lines X page Example Lines 2 Areas 2 means that two lines areas are open MANAGE Data Job Name Areas X page S T O N E X Manage AData R9 80 STONEX Data construction s v Lines 1 Areas 0 Map v Start Time Open 07 30 56 Yes line002 30 line001 07 30 33 No 02a t CONT NEW EDIT CLOSE HORE PAGE CONT F1 To close the screen and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed NEW F2 To create a line area After storing the new line all existing lines and areas which are open are closed EDIT F3 To edit the highlighted line area CLOSE F4 and OPEN F4 To change between the options in the Op
312. ing Out step by step in Orthogonal Mode Followthe instructions in paragraph Stake outin orthogonal from station mode step by step using Stake Mode Polar The values are displayed as A HZ and A DISTANCE gt S T O N E X Stakeout R9 678 34 4 5 Description Access STAKEOUT Difference Limit Exceeded STONEX Stakeout Difference Limit Exceeded If configured a check is made on the horizontal and or vertical coordinate distance from the staked point to the point to be staked when storing a staked point Refer to 34 3 Configuring Stakeout for information on configuring the check and the limits The screen shown below is accessed automatically when the staked point is stored if either of the configured difference limits are exceeded The availability of the fields depends on the configured lt Stake Mode gt The limits that have been exceeded are shown in bold and indicated by a V Difference Limit Exceeded BACK F1 Point ID 0001 To return to STAKEOUT XX Stakeout without Store ID storing the point Staking out of the same point continues BACK jt 0 868 m STORE F3 LEFT if 5 211 n To accept the coordinate differences store the FILL 0 534 n point information and return to STAKEOUT XX Stakeout 2D Diff if 5 282 n SKIP F4 3D Diff 5 308 n To return to STAKEOUT XX Stakeout without Q2a tr storin i i i g the point According to filter and sort BACK STORE SKIP Si settings the
313. ing a measurement with ALL F1 or REC F3 motorised instruments change face automati cally The measurements of face I and face II are aver aged on the base of face I The averaged value is stored No automatic measurement in two faces lt Use Offsets gt Yes or No Activates the use of offsets in the COGO calculations Input fields for the offsets are available in COGO XX lt Store Pts As gt COGO MEAS or CTRL To store the cogo point with point class MEAS or with point class CTRL Points stored with point class MEAS can be stored with the same point ID The averaging functionality config ured under job management can then be used to calculate an average for these points R9 475 STONEX Field Option Description Points stored with point class CTRL can only be stored with a unique point ID A message is always displayed when a point is about to be stored with an already existing point ID The user can then decide to either keep the existing point or overwrite the existing point Est Pos Qlty gt User input The estimated value for the position quality assigned to all calculated COGO points which is used for the averaging calculation Est Ht Qlty gt User input The estimated value for the height quality assigned to all calculated heights which is used for the averaging calculation When the Intersections Method TPS Obs TPS Obs the following
314. ing data eols Menu 1 Format Hemor Device 2 Transfer Objects 3 Upload System Files 4 Calculator 6 Licence Keys 7 Check amp Adjust CONT F1 To select the highlighted option and to continue at ol II with the subsequent screen For Main Menu For Main Menu For Main Menu For Main Menu For Main Menu For Main Menu For Main Menu Tools Tools Tools Tools Tools Tools Tools Format Memory Device Transfer Objects Upload System Files ACalculator VFile Viewer Licence Keys ACheck amp Adjust Refer to chapter 21 Refer to chapter 22 Refer to chapter 23 Refer to chapter 24 Refer to chapter 25 Refer to chapter 26 Refer to chapter 27 Main Menu R9 63 6 Manage Jobs 6 1 Overview Description Jobs e structure surveying projects e contain all points lines areas and codes that are recorded and stored e canbe used in Stonex Tools e may be stored on the CompactFlash card Type of jobs e Data jobs Explained in this chapter e Road jobs Default job A job called Default is available on the instrument after formatting the memory device inserting a previously formatted CompactFlash card or deleting all jobs from MANAGE Jobs Device Active job The active job is the one data is stored to One job is always considered the active job After formatting the memory device the job Default is used until a user de
315. ing of the first type of offset points Refer to 36 4 Offset Points of Auto Points OFST2 F5 To configure recording of a second type of offset points Refer to 36 4 Offset Points of Auto Points PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT CONF F2 To configure auto points Refer to 36 2 Config uring Auto Points SHIFT QUIT F6 To exit the Survey application program Point information logged until pressing SHIFT QUIT F6 is saved in the database S T O N E X Survey Auto Points R9 700 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description Auto Pt ID gt User input Time and Date Available unless lt Auto Pts Time amp Date gt in CONFIGURE ID Templates The identifier for auto points The configured ID template for auto points is used The ID can be changed To start a new sequence of point ID s overtype the point ID Available for lt Auto Pts Time amp Date gt in CONFIGURE ID Templates The current local time and date is used as identifier for auto points lt Reflector Ht gt User input The default reflector height as defined in the active configuration set is suggested lt Msd Auto Pts gt Output Available after pressing START F1 and before pressing STOP F1 The number of auto points meas ured since START F1 has been pressed lt Code Auto gt The thematical code for the auto point L e Ifa point code is selected the
316. ing the electronic level e protected from direct sunlight e acclimatised to the ambient temperature approximately two minutes per C difference compared to the storage place e Refer to 27 1 Overview paragraph Precise measurements for more details 1 TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu Select the option Combined Lti c iLock 2 TOOLS Combined I iLock Adjust On Includes the determination of the iLock Hz and V adjustment values K It is recommended to use a clean Stonex a 360 prism 9 circular prism as target Do not use iLock Adjust Off iLock Hz and V adjustment value determination is not included A prism is not necessarily required to run the procedure Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 385 Step Description 3 Aim the telescope accurately at a target ata distance of about 100 m The target must be positioned within 9 10 gon of the hori zontal plane KE The procedure can be started in any telescope face KE The fine pointing has to be performed manually in both faces S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 386 STONEX Step Description 4 MEAS F1 to measure and to continue to the next screen Motorised instruments change automati d cally to the other face 5 TOOLS Combined II MEAS F1 to measure the same target in the other face and to calculate the instru ment errors If one or more errors are bigger
317. int and exits COGO calcu lation 11 STORE F1 to store the result and return to COGO Intersection Input Input page For Write Logfile Yes in COGO Configuration Logfile page the result is written to the logfile COGO R9 502 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter 12 Are more COGO intersection calculations to be made e Ifyes repeat steps 2 to 12 32 6 2 lt Method gt in COGO Intersection Input Input page can be 32 6 3 or changed Refer to the relevant chapters for the other COGO intersec 32 6 4 tion calculation methods e Ifno continue with step 13 13 SHIFT QUIT F6 to exit COGO calculation COGO R9 503 Description 32 6 2 STONEX Intersection with Bearing Distance The COGO intersection calculation bearing distance calculates the intersection point of a line and a circle The line is defined by a point and a direction The circle is defined by the centre point and the radius Elements that must be known are e the coordinates of two points e the direction from one known point to the COGO point e the distance from the second known point to the COGO point e offsets if required and configured The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used COGO R9
318. ints eee Mechanical adjustment Device directory structure DEAS Sensation cdidit iR DUE OS MALAE DOS M MOLy CY POS eer Edert Eege Eeer Eeer Menu Application programs DGS e ee E 464 Applications programs EE 58 User defined setenta tete 21 IMC TUNG Ee EE 724 R9 743 Mismatch el UI 180 COG ae 178 Mode Calculator ENNEN 347 MODIF eebe 496 Modify values in COGO eerte 590 Move by joystick ene 32 N Navigation Light ee Negative offset COGO New version upload eener EEN NONE elaeg rere actus teen ern eor tuper teca North orientate to Stak Gout ee eege 654 o Object Deleter ninni aaa ai a E 117 II t ale E 78 Offset Stakeout height ENEE 660 Type in COGO intersection COGO traverse Offset auto points EEN rupe Coding 704 STONEX COMP UCI D MG Configuration e essent tnter ttt nitent tenni Point Deiseanna aa a aa Point ID examples Properties Offsets OFST1 E Il Orientate el inaa AN 654 Orientate with compass ENEE 27 Orientation and height transfer EEN 622 Orthogonal mode stakeout sss 667 Overwrite Code for auto points eerte 689 Overwrite point during Import ENEE 216 P Pages G own 43 Pages Up iere 43 Personal Identification Number Instrument eee essen setenta tarta tutta tartara tta stata tassa Personal UnblocKin
319. ion lt LEFT gt Output Horizontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked orthogonal to the left of the line defined by station and reflector lt CUT gt Output The negative height difference from the height of the staked point to the height of the point to be staked lt FILL gt Output The positive height difference from the height of the staked point to the height of the point to be staked lt 2D Diff gt Output Displays the horizontal difference from the staked point to the point to be staked lt 3D Diff gt Output Displays the spatial difference from the staked point to the point to be staked Next step IF the exceeded difference limit THEN is not to be accepted BACK F1 to stake the same point again is to be accepted STORE F3 to store the point and to stake out the next point is not to be accepted but cannot be improved SKIP F4 to skip staking this point and to stake out the next point Stakeout R9 681 35 35 1 Access SURVEY Survey Begin STONEX Survey General Accessing Survey Select Main Menu Survey OR Select Main Menu Programs Survey OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Press ON Highlight Survey CONT F1 Refer to 31 2 Accessing the Programs Menu for details on the ON key Survey Begin CONT F1 Job RETE d To accept changes and access the subsequent
320. iption Coding of auto points STONEX Survey Auto Points Overview e Auto points is used to automatically measure and store points at a specific rate Additionally individual auto points can be stored outside the defined rate Auto points logged between starting and stopping logging of auto points form one chain A new chain is formed each time logging of auto points is started e Auto points can be collected in the Survey application program An Auto page is visible when logging of auto points is active e Upto two offset points related to one auto point can be logged The offset points can be both to the left or right and they can be coded independently of each other and ofthe auto points Refer to 36 4 Offset Points of Auto Points Coding of auto points is similar to coding of measured points Refer to 9 Coding for informa tion on coding The differences are e Thematical coding Always available e Free coding Always available e Quick coding Not available Codes of auto points overwrite the codes of points existing in the active job with the same point ID but with a different code as the auto point e Codes of auto points can be changed when no auto points are being logged e Upto three attributes can be stored with a code Survey Auto Points R9 689 Properties of auto points The properties stored with auto points are Class MEAS e Sub class TPS e Source Survey Auto or Survey Auto Of I
321. is acti vated and deactivated by pressing UPPER F5 or LOWER F5 insome screens SHIFT icon Shows the status of the SHIFT key either first or second level of softkeys is selected Can be used with touch screen and has the same functionality as the fixed key SHIFT Quick coding icon Shows the quick coding configuration Can be used with touch screen to turn quick coding on and off Softkeys Commands can be executed using F1 F6 keys The commands assigned to the softkeys are screen dependent Can be used directly with touch screen Scroll bar Scrolls the screen area up and down User Interface R9 45 4 3 Keyboard and touch screen Turn instrument on STONEX Operating Principles The user interface is operated either by the keyboard or by the touch screen with supplied stylus The workflow is the same for keyboard and touch screen entry the only difference lies in the way information is selected and entered Operation by keyboard Information is selected and entered using the keys Refer to 4 1 Keyboard for further details of the keys on the keyboard and their function Operation by touch screen Information is selected and entered on the screen using the supplied stylus Operation Description To select an item Tap on the item To start the edit mode in input fields Tap on the input field To highlight an item or parts of it for editing Drag the supp
322. is called R9 Programs The application programs menu contains all loaded application programs including Survey and Setup They are listed in the order in which they were loaded CONT F1 To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen For Main Menu Programs Survey Refer to chapter 35 For Main Menu Programs Setup Refer to chapter 33 For Main Menu Programs V COGO Refer to chapter 32 For Main Menu Programs Stakeout Refer to chapter 34 Main Menu R9 58 5 4 Access Description R9 Management STONEX Manage Select Main Menu Manage Manage is used to manage the following e jobs e data e codelists e configuration sets e reflectors Management functions include creating selecting editing and deleting Management 1 Jobs 2 Data 3 Codelists 4 Configuration Sets 5 Reflectors CONT F1 To select the highlighted option and to continue mf CONT with the subsequent screen Main Menu R9 59 Next step STONEX For Main Menu Manage For Main Menu Manage For Main Menu Manage For Main Menu Manage For Main Menu Manage AJobs Data Codelists Configuration Sets Reflectors Refer to chapter 6 Refer to chapter 7 Refer to chapter 8 Refer to chapter 11 Refer to chapter 12 Main Menu R9 60 5 5 Access Description R9 Convert Data Next step STONEX Convert
323. is identical with the creation of a new job Manage Jobs R9 72 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter DATA F5 accesses MANAGE Data Job Name To view edit and delete points lines and areas stored with the job Points lines and areas are shown on separate pages Selected sort and filter settings apply 7 2 SHIFT LOG F5 accesses MANAGE Data Log Job Name To view edit and delete points lines and areas stored with the job Points lines and areas are sorted by time in one list 11 STORE F1 stores the changes and returns to the screen from where MANAGE Edit Job Job Name was accessed Manage Jobs R9 73 6 5 Managing Job Codes Description To view edit group and sort all codes currently stored in the job The functionality of this screen is mainly the same as for MANAGE Codes For simplicity the functionality which is different from MANAGE Codes is explained here Refer to 8 5 Managing Codes for information on MANAGE Codes Access step by step Available for jobs which have a codelist attached Step Description 1 Refer to 6 2 Accessing Job Management to access MANAGE Jobs Device In MANAGE Jobs Device highlight a job to be edited EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Job Job Name In MANAGE Edit Job Job Name PAGE F6 until the Codelist page is active 2 3 4 5 CODES F4 to access MANAG
324. is to be added IF THEN all points from COGO ADD F2 Data Job Name are to be added one point from COGO ADD 1 F3 a range of points from COGO Data Job Name is to be added SHIFT RANGE F5 accesses COGO Select Points by Range Refer to paragraph COGO Select Points by Range all points are added PAGE F1 accesses COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Shift page Refer to paragraph COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Shift page Select Points by Range From Pt ID To Pt ID conr Leen 0001 CONT F1 To add the points within the selected range to thelist in COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Points page and to return to the screen from where this screen was accessed NEXT F3 To add the points within the selected range to thelist in COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Points page without quitting this screen Another range of point ID s can be selected 02a t COGO R9 548 STONEX Descripti on of fields Field Option Description lt From P tID gt and To Pt ID gt User input Numeric point ID s in both fields Points with numeric point ID s falling within the range are selected Example From Pt ID 1 gt To Pt ID 50 gt Selected are point ID s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 49 50 as well as 001 01 0000045 Not selected are point ID s 100 200 300 Alphanumeric point ID s in both fields The left most character of
325. isplayed at the top of the list if a directory has been accessed Second Date of the directory or file Third Time of the directory or file Next step IF THEN the screen is to be quit ESC to return to R9 Main Menu a directory is to accessed highlight the directory and DIR F2 a file is to be viewed highlight the file and VIEW F3 Refer to TOOLS View File File Name Tools File Viewer R9 367 TOOLS iew File construction gsi View File File Name 410001 0000000000001000 81 18 0 11000240000000000001001 81 18 0 11000340000000000001002 81 18 0 110004 0000000000001003 81 18 0 11000540000000000001004 81 18 0 11000640000000000001005 81 18 0 1100070000000000001008 81 18 0 11000840000000000001007 81 18 0 sl CONT F1 Q2at To return to the screen from where this screen cont was accessed Keys Keys Function A Moves up V Moves down gt Moves right lt j Moves left Next step CONT F1 returns to the screen from where TOOLS View File File Name was accessed S T O N E X Tools File Viewer R9 368 26 Description Access TOOLS Enter Licence Key STONEX Tools Licence Keys e A licence key can be used to activate application programs and protected options e A licence key file can be uploaded to the instrument To upload a licence key file the file should be located on the SYSTEM director
326. lds This is for data display 4 Decimals and does not apply to data export or storage The avail able options depend on the selected lt Distance Unit gt lt Angle Unit gt 400 gon 360 The units shown for all angular and coordinate related 360 dec or fields More angle settings can be defined on the Angle 6400 mil page lt Angle Dec gt The number of decimal places shown for all angular and coordinate related fields This is for data display and does not apply to data export or storage From Available for lt Angle Unit 400 gon gt or lt Angle Unit 2 Decimals to 360 dec 4 Decimals From Available for lt Angle Unit 6400 mil gt 1 Decimal to 3 Decimals 0 1 1 5 Available for Angle Unit 360 5 10 60 Grade Unit The input and output format for grades h v Horizontal by vertical distance v h Vertical by horizontal distance v h 100 Percentage of vertical by horizontal distance Elev Angle Elevation angle STONEX Config General Settings R9 282 STONEX Field Option Description lt Area Unit gt m2 Int Acres Ai US Acres A Hectares ha fi or ft The units shown for all area related fields Volume Unit gt mi fi ft or yd The units shown for all volume related fields Temp Unit gt Celsius C or The units shown for all temperature related fields Fahrenheit F lt
327. le meas urement based upon the timestamp of the EDM measurement When the logging of auto points has started SYNC is displayed as an icon Next step IF the display mask THEN is not to be config ured CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to the screen from where SURVEY Configuration Auto Points page was accessed is to be configured DMASK F3 Refer to paragraph SURVEY Configure Auto Pts Display Mask S T O N E X Survey Auto Points R9 694 SURVEY Configure Auto Pts Display Mask STONEX Fixed Lines 1st Line 3rd Line 4th Line 5th Line 6th Line 7th Line Point ID auto Jr 2nd Line Reflector Height d Line Space Half 4 Hsd Auto Points dy Code auto dr Code Desc dy Line Space Half 4P CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed CLEAR F4 To set all fields to XX Line Line Space Full DEFLT F5 Available if the active configuration setis a default configuration set To recall the default 02a 1 CONT CLEAR DEFLT settings Description of fields Field Option Description lt Fixed Lines gt From 0 to 5 Defines how many lines do not scroll in SURVEY Survey Job Name Auto page when that display mask is used lt 1st Line gt Output Fixed to lt 1st Line Point ID auto gt lt 2nd Line gt to lt 16th Line gt Add Constant Angle Right
328. le of the measured point Horiz Dist The current horizontal distance of the measured point Slope Dist The current slope distance of the measured point Coding R9 170 STONEX Field Option Ht Diff Linework Description The current height difference between the station and the measured point The linework flag to be stored with the point The options available depend on whether a line area is currently open Refer to 10 2 Performing Linework for an explanation of the options that become available in SURVEY Survey Job name SCode page lt Measure Point gt Yes or No If one of the code boxes is tapped in SURVEY Survey Job name SCode page then that code is selected and the point is measured for lt Measure Point Yes gt lt String Attrib gt Choicelist Available for lt Show Codes All Codes gt When this field is active surveyed points that have the same code attached are strung to one line CS Refer to 15 3 Coding amp Linework Settings lt Method gt Not used Zig Zag Same direc tion Method by which subsequent code box is selected after a point is stored lt Direction gt and lt No Elements gt are invisible and the number of codes boxes shown in SURVEY Survey Job name SCode page is nine Each new code block is started at the same end as where the previous code block finished Each new code block is started at the same end as where th
329. lection Description A code is a description which can be stored with an object or alone Manage Codelists R9 130 STONEX Structure of codes Codes pe E Thematical codes Object related information recorded together with the actual object in the field Free codes Time related information recorded between objects in the field A time stamp is recorded with each free code It allows to export free codes and objects in a chrono logical order to be used for third party mapping software Code type Point code Line code Area code Optional Quick code Manage Codelists Code type Free code Optional Quick code R9 131 Code types The code type defines how and for which objects a code can be used It is possible to create a code of the same name but of different code types both on the instrument and in Stonex Tools Example The code Oak can exist with code type point code and with code type line code Point code To record a code directly with a point This is thematical point coding Line code To record a code directly with a line This is thematical line coding Area code To record a code directly with an area This is thematical area coding Free code To record a code based on time in between objects Quick code To start a point measurement and store the code by typing in one two or three pred
330. lied stylus from the left to the right To accept data entered into an input field and exit the edit mode Tap somewhere else on the screen outside of the input field Press and hold ON for 2 s User Interface R9 46 Turn instrument off Step Description step by step The instrument can only be turned off in R9 Main Menu Press and hold both USER and ON simultaneously Press YES F6 to continue or NO F4 to cancel Lock Unlock keyboard Option Description Lock To lock the keyboard press and hold SHIFT for 3 s The message Keyboard locked is momentarily displayed on the Message Line Unlock To unlock the keyboard press and hold SHIFT for 3 s The message Keyboard unlocked is momentarily displayed on the Message Line STONEX User Interface R9 47 4 4 Icons Description The screen icons display the current status information of the instrument Allocation of icons i S i 1 f S i a iLock Robotic m 1 Or I E 2X b Reflector ein fen t e UT c EDM f c d Compensator face I amp II 2 e Bluetooth 1 Survey 2 Programs 3 Manage f Line area 5o re Ti g CompactFlash card Sus h Battery 4 Convert 5 Config 6 acu i SHIFT CONT CS j Quick coding iLock Robotic Tapping the icon leads to QUICK SET Change Settings to Icon Description iLock active Low Visibility mode is
331. line and continues any open line area S T O N E X Config A Survey Settings R9 251 STONEX Field Option Description lt End Spline gt User input Stores the linework flag to stop a spline lt Cont Spline gt User input Indicates a line area is open with spline line type lt Begin Area gt User input Opens a new area when the next point is stored Any areas which are currently open are closed The point may or may not be stored with a point code lt ReOpen Last User input Opens the last used area again Area gt lt Close Area gt User input Closes all open areas Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen Config Survey Settings R9 252 15 4 Offsets Description Offsets can be configured and entered The offset values are applied to measured points The Offset function allows offset points to be determined for instance when the reflector cannot be set up directly on a point Transverse longitudinal and or elevation offsets can be defined from the reflector position to the offset point All of the displayed and recorded measurement data is in relation to the offset point The values for target eccentricity is retained after storage with Offset Mode Permanent The values are set to zero with Offset Mode Reset after REC PO Station P1 Current position P2 Offset point P3 Offset point d1 Offset cross d2 O
332. llowing table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Arc Calculations Input COGO R9 541 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Ce COGO Arc Calculations Input Input page SHIFT CONF F2 to configure the COGO application program 32 3 2 COGO Arc Calculations Input Input page 32 8 1 Task Calc Offset Point CALC F1 calculates the results COGO Offset Point Results Result page 32 8 1 STORE F1 stores the results COGO R9 542 32 8 4 Arc Calculation Segmentation Le Exceptions to line calcu lation segmentation STONEX The COGO arc calculation segmentation and the functionality ofall screens and fields are similar to those for COGO line calculation segmentation Refer to 32 7 3 Line Calculation Segmenta tion New field and option in COGO Define Segmentation Field Option Description Method Delta Angle To divide the arc by an angular value Delta Angle gt User input The angular value by which new points will be defined on the arc COGO R9 543 32 9 COGO Calculation Shift Rotate amp Scale Manual Method Description The COGO calculation shift rotate amp scale manual applies shifts and or rotation and or scale to one or several known points Th
333. losest to the circular level the electronic level moves down if the value in lt Tilt L gt gets bigger and vice versa If the value for lt Tilt T gt gets bigger the level moves left and vice versa Level amp Laser Plummet Level Laser Plummet Tilt L 0 0000 g Tilt T 0 0000 g CONT F1 To exit STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet Q2aft PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen STATUS R9 417 Description of fields Field Description lt Tilt L gt Longitudinal tilt of the vertical axis lt Tilt T gt Transversal tilt of the vertical axis Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Laser Plummet page STATUS Description of fields Level amp Laser Plummet S SC Laser Plummet page Field Option Description Laser Plummet gt On or Off To turn the laser plummet on or off Is always set on when accessing this screen Changing this setting turns the laser plummet on or off immediately lt Intensity gt From0 to The percentage of the intensity of the laser plummet is 100 displayed numerically and graphically The minimum value is 10 Changing this value with the right and left arrow keys changes the intensity of the laser plummet immediately Next step CONT F1 exits STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet S T O N E X STATUS R9 418 29 Functions 29 1 EDM Description Electronic Distance Measurement EDM is the s
334. lt Divide By Defined Line gt The new border will run in a certain distance from the line defined by Point A gt and Point B gt The new border will run through a point defined in Through Point gt COGO R9 578 COGO Define How to Divide Area Map page STONEX Field Option Description Through Point gt Choicelist Available for Shift Through Point The point through which the new border will run Rotation Pnt gt Choicelist Available for Using Swing Line The point around which the new border will rotate by lt Azimuth gt lt Azimuth gt Output Available for lt Using Swing Line gt The angle of the new border from lt Rotation Pnt gt to the new COGO point lt HDist XX gt User Input Output The distance from the line defined by lt Point A gt and lt Point B gt to the new border For lt Divide By Defined Line gt and lt Shift By Distance gt For lt Divide By Percentage gt or lt Divide By Area gt with lt Using Parallel Line gt or lt Using Perpendic Line gt Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Map page Refer to paragraph COGO Define How to Divide Area Map page The Map page provides an interactive display of the data Refer to 30 MapView Interactive Display Feature for information on the functionality and softkeys available COGO R9 579 Next step CALC F1 perform
335. lt LEFT gt Output The direction depends on lt Stake Mode gt The hori zontal distance from the current position to the point to be staked orthogonal to the left of the line defined by station and reflector to move to the left of the line defined in lt Symbols gt gt to move to the right of the line defined in lt Symbols gt lt CUT gt Output The negative height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be staked The value for lt Height Offset gt configured in STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page is taken into account Move down Stakeout R9 670 STONEX Field Option Description lt FILL gt Output The positive height difference from the height of the current position to the height of the point to be staked The value for lt Height Offset gt configured in STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page is taken into account Move up lt Height gt or lt Ht gt Output Available for lt Edit Height No gt in STAKEOUT Config uration Heights page The height of the current position is displayed as ortho metric height The value for lt Height Offset gt config ured in STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page is taken into account lt Design Ht gt or lt D Ht gt User input Available for lt Edit Height Yes gt in STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page The design height which is the height of
336. lting axis error The unit is displayed in Old g Shows the old instrument error which is currently valid on the instrument The unit is displayed in Next step IF the result is THEN to be stored CONT F1 overwrites the old tilting axis error with the new one to be determined REDO F2 rejects the new determined tilting axis error and repeats the again whole procedure Refer to step 2 of paragraph Tilting axis adjustment step by step S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 394 27 7 Compensator Adjustment I t Access step by step Step Description 1 Refer to 27 3 Accessing Check amp Adjust Menu to access TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu In TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu highlight Compensator 1t CONT F1 to access TOOLS Compensator Adjustment Description The compensator adjustment procedure determines the following instrument errors l Compensator longitudinal index error t Compensator transversal index error Compensator index The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more adjustment step by step information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter Ce Before determining the compensator index errors the instrument has to be levelled up using the electronic level e protected from direct sunlight e acclimatised to the ambient temperature approxim
337. lways displayed in degree regardless of the system settings 10 CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name The instrument turns to the reflector Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 28 STONEX Step Description For lt Automation iLock gt an iLock measurement is performed If no prism was found the instrument turns to the position typed in for lt Hz Compass gt and lt V Compass gt For lt Automation Robotic gt the instrument locks on the prism and the Robotic icon is displayed If no prism was found the instrument turns to the position typed in for lt Hz Compass gt and lt V Compass gt Refer to chapter Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 29 3 3 2 Description Access Hz V positioning step by step STONEX Positioning Hz V The QUICK SET Positioning Hz V screen is used when the instrument is remote controlled and the telescope should be turned to a certain direction On the Absolute page angular values for lt Hz Angle gt and lt V Angle gt related to the set orien tation can be typed in On the Relative page angular difference values for lt AHz gt and lt AV gt relative to the current telescope position can be typed in These values are added to the current telescope position to calculate the new direction for the telescope to turn to Press Hz V F2 in the QUICK SET Change Settings to screen Refer to 3 2 QUICK SET
338. m the CompactFlash card to the instrument These files are stored in the SYSTEM directory of the active memory device and use the extension fw Select Main Menu Tools Upload System Files Instrument Firmware Upload System Firmware From CF Card To Instrument EU CONT F1 01A To upload firmware and return to the screen CONT from where this screen was accessed Description of fields Field Option Description From Output Upload from CompactFlash card lt To gt Output Upload to the instrument lt Firmware gt Choicelist List of firmware files stored on the CompactFlash card lt Version gt Output Version of the firmware file Tools Upload System Files R9 345 Next step CONT F1 to upload firmware S T O N E X Tools VUpload System Files R9 346 24 Tools Calculator 24 1 Overview Description The calculator can be used to perform the following arithmetic operations such as e addition subtraction multiplication and division e statistics e trigonometry hyperbolic trigonometry and calculations with Pi e polar rectangular and angle conversions e powers logs roots and exponential functions Operating modes The calculator has two operating modes RPN mode and Standard mode The arithmetic operations available are identical the difference lies in the way information is entered stored and displayed on the s
339. matc Codes Without Codelist gt Codes can be typed in but not selected from a codelist A check is performed to see if a point code of this name already exists in the job If so the according attributes are shown lt Code Desc gt Output Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt The description of the code lt Attribute n gt User input Available for lt Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt Up to eight attribute values are available Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Stn Plot page Refer to 30 6 Plot Mode MapView Screen Area for information on the keys on the Plot page Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen Setup R9 642 33 6 Description Access SETUP Find Target STONEX Finding a Target Point e The SETUP Find Target screen can be accessed to guide the reflector to the selected target point e The screen is only available if the Stakeout application is available on the instrument e The functionality of this screen is similar to a stakeout routine and is intended to help find hidden survey bench marks or reference points Press SHIFT FIND F2 in SETUP Measure Target once enough data is available to roughly calculate the new orientation This screen is shown with Stake Mode Ortho from Stn For graphics symbols being displayed the settings are Symbols From Station and Graphics From Station Refer to
340. me Log By Distance Log By Height Diff gt For Log By For Log By Time Thetime interval before the next Time from auto point is logged 0 1s to 60 0s Min Distance gt User input Available for Log By Dist or Ht The value for the difference in distance before the next auto point is logged Min Height gt User input Available for Log By Dist or Ht The value for the height difference before the next auto point is logged Stop Position gt User input Available for lt Log By Stop amp Go gt The maximum distance within which the position is considered stationary lt Stop Time gt User input Available for lt Log By Stop amp Go gt The time while the position must be stationary until an auto point is stored S T O N E X Survey Auto Points R9 693 Field lt EDM Mode gt Option Tracking SynchroTrack Description Continuous distance measurement with 0 3 s meas uring time and 5 mm 2 ppm accuracy When the logging of auto points has started TRK is displayed as an icon Available only for lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt This is the measurement mode for the interpolation of angle measurements in IR tracking mode In difference to normal IR tracking mode where angle measure ments are only assigned to certain distance measure ments SynchroTrack will perform a linear interpola tion between the previous and following ang
341. me point using the same point ID Access within data management Step Description 1 Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management to access MANAGE Data Job Name 2 In MANAGE Data Job Name Points page highlight a point to be edited 3 EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Point Point ID Mean page Access within Survey Step Description 1 Main Menu Survey to access SURVEY Survey Begin 2 CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name Survey page 3 SHIFT AVGE F2 or SHIFT ABS F2 to access SURVEY Edit Point Point ID Mean page STONEX Manage Data R9 101 MANAGE All measured coordinate triplets recorded using the same point ID are shown Edit Point Point ID Edit Point 500 X STORE F1 Mean page Coords Code Mean To store the changes and to return to the screen Time dPos from where this screen was accessed 10 07 18 0 007 USE F2 S To change between the options in the Use column for the highlighted coordinate triplet To include or exclude this triplet in or from the calculation of the average Refer to Description of columns below EDIT F3 To view and edit the highlighted measured coor STORE USE EDIT DEL MORE PAGE dinate triplet It is possible to edit the point ID and the reflector height without impact on all other classes of the point with the same original name The coordinates are updated Codes cannot be change
342. mm Tools Check amp Adjust R9 404 27 12 Servicing the Tripod Servicing the tripod step by step The following table explains the most common settings Step Description Ce The connections between metal and timber components must always be firm and tight Tighten the leg cap screws moderately with the supplied allen key 2 Tighten the articulated joints on the tripod head just enough to Keep the tripod legs open when lifting the tripod off the ground 3 Tighten the allen screws ofthe tripod legs S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 405 28 28 1 Description Access STATUS Status Menu STONEX STATUS STATUS Functions The STATUS functions help using the instrument by showing the state of many instrument func tions All fields are output fields Unavailable information is indicated by Press USER and then STAT F3 Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key Status Menu 1 Station Information 2 Battery amp Memory 3 System Information 4 Interfaces 5 Level amp Laser Plummet CONT F1 To select the highlighted option and to continue at CONT with the subsequent screen STATUS R9 406 Description of the STATUS functions STONEX STATUS function Description Refer to chapter Station Information Information related to the current stati
343. n on the fields Next step STORE F1 to close the screen and to return to the screen from where CONFIGURE Edit Device was accessed STONEX Interfaces Ports Devices R9 319 18 4 5 Typical uses Supported radios User defined radios STONEX Device Radios for Remote Control To remote control the R9 The radio used with R9 for remote control is the RH9 R9 has to be set to the correct communi cation mode to send and receive data and commands via the radio Other radios than the default radios can be used Their settings must be defined by creating a new radio configuration Refer to 18 4 3 Creating a New Device These radios must be connected with a cable Refer to Appendix D Cables for information on cables Interfaces Ports Devices R9 320 18 4 6 Typical uses Supported RS232 STONEX Device RS232 To exchange information with a device via an RS232 interface e RS232 GeoCOM can be used to control the instrument via GeoCOM commands e RS232 GSI can be used to send data from the instrument to a computer e Port 1 is used to connect to RS232 devices with a cable Refer to Appendix D Cables for information on cables Example of use Step Description 1 A device with an RS232 interface must be connected to the instrument 2 Information can be exchanged between the instrument and the device For example measurement data can be continuously sent out f
344. n WI 21 WI 22 index infor 0 lt Compensator Off gt mation 3 lt Compensator On gt 5 Input mode No information WI 21 WI 22 WI 31 0 Measured values transferred from instrument WI 51 WI 81 WI 82 1 Manual input from keyboard WI83 WI 87 2 Measured value Hz Correction On 3 Measured value Hz Correction Off gt 4 Result calculated from functions 6 Units No information WI 21 WI 22 WI 31 0 Distance Unit Metre m gt last digit 1 1000m WI 81 WI 82 WI 83 1 Distance Unit Us ft ft gt last digit 1 1000 ft WI 87 2 lt Angle Unit 400 gon gt 3 lt Angle Unit 360 dec gt 4 Angle Unit 360 gt 5 Angle Unit 6400 mil 6 Distance Unit Metre m gt last digit 1 10000 m 7 Distance Unit Us ft ft gt last digit 1 10000 ft 7 Sign Positive value WI 21 WI 22 WI 31 Negative value WI 51 WI 81 WI 82 WI 83 WI 87 Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 327 Pos Name Description of values Applicable for 8 15 Data Data includes a sequence of 8 16 numerical or WI 11 WI 21 WI 22 8 23 alphanumerical characters WI 31 WI 51 WI 81 K Certain data blocks are allowed to carry WI 82 WI 83 WI 87 more than one value for example ppm mm This data is automatically transferred with the according sign before each single value 16 Separating Blank WI 11 WI 21 WI 22 24 character WI 31 WI 51
345. n Refer to chapter Ce The point code and any associated attribute values are stored with the point Ce Ifapointwith the same point ID exists in the job the codes the attribute 9 6 names and the attribute values of the new and the existing point must be identical Should they not be identical a screen opens where the code or attribute mismatch can be corrected Quick coding for a point code is finished gt oe Quick coding for free codes continues from here Ce The free code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist and initiates measurements Ce Attribute values for attributes of type e normal cannot be typed in Depending on the setting for Attributes in CONFIGURE Coding Settings the default or the last used attribute values are stored e fixed cannot be edited Ce Thefree code associated attribute values and time related information are stored The setting for Rec Free Code gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework determines if the free code is stored before or after the point 6 Quick coding for a free code is finished Quick coding for The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more lines areas step by step information on screens S T O N E X Coding R9 166 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to paragraph Activate quick c
346. n any open line area is closed The occupied point is stored with the selected code idependently of any line area Survey Auto Points R9 701 STONEX Field Option Choicelist User input Description e Ifaline code is selected then any open line is closed and a new line with the selected code is created The line ID is defined by the configured line ID template The occupied point is assigned to that line The line stays open until it is closed manually or another line code is selected e Ifanarea code is selected then the behaviour is as for lines Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt The setting for Show Codes in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework determines if either all codes or only point codes are available The attributes are shown as output input or choicelist fields depending on their definition Available for lt Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt Codes can be typed in but not selected from a codelist A check is performed to see if a code of this name already exists in the job If so the according attributes are shown Configure a display mask with a choicelist for code types to define if a point line or area code is typed in Code Desc Output The description ofthe code Survey Auto Points R9 702 Field Option Description lt Slope Dist gt Output The measured slope distance When START F1 is presse
347. n any point that is selected will be assigned to the first point field on the previous page the second point to the second point field etc If a point field is highlighted when the Map page is accessed then the point selected will be assigned to that field 2 FOCUS F2 to activate the focus tool The focus tool is made a up of a square placed at the centre of dashed crosshairs The focus tool always starts at the centre of the screen area CONT DONE EDIT ZooH Ere 3 Use the arrow keys to navigate the focus tool to the point to etipes tures select A point is available for selection when the square is centred around the point symbol P Q2at CONT DONE EDIT ZOOH ZOON PAGE MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 449 STONEX Step Description Display When there are multiple points within the same area and the precise selection is unclear pressing ENTER will access XX Select Point Press ENTER to select the point The point parameter text as defined in XX Map View Configuration Points page is highlighted Have multiple points been selected e Ifyes continue with step 6 e Ifno continue with step 8 XX Select Point Point ID The ID of the points within range of the point selec tion Point Code The code ofthe points within range of the point selection Select the desired point MORE F5 to display inform
348. n be created in Stonex Tools or on the instrument Real An input for the attribute must be a real number for example 1 23 New attributes with this attribute value type can be created in Stonex Tools Integer An input for the attribute must be an integer number for example 5 New attributes with this attribute value type can be created in Stonex Tools Attribute value regions The attribute value region defines if the attribute values must be selected from a predefined list S T O N E X Manage Codelists R9 134 Codelist STONEX None An input for the attribute must be typed in New attributes with this attribute value region can be created in Stonex Tools or on the instru ment Range An input for the attribute must fall within a predefined range New attributes with this attribute value region can be created in Stonex Tools Choicelist An input for the attribute is selected from a predefined list New attributes with this attribute value region can be created in Stonex Tools Example Code Attributes Attribute value Attribute value Example for the type region attribute value region Birch Height Real Range 0 5 3 0 Condition Text Choicelist Good Dead Damaged Remark Text None Description A codelist is a collection of codes that can be used to describe surveyed objects in the field Elements of a codelist e Code group e Code e Attributes Manage Codelists R9 135
349. nd return to the screen from where this screen was accessed PROGS F4 To format the application programs memory 02a i SYSTM F5 CONT PROGS SYSTH To format System RAM memory Description of fields Field Option Description lt Memory Device gt The type of memory to be formatted CF Card For instruments without internal memory Tools Format Memory Device R9 337 STONEX Field Option CF Card or Internal Memory Description For instruments with CompactFlash card and internal memory Format Method gt Format Quick Format Complete After formatting data is not visible anymore but still exists on the memory device and is overwritten as and when required Data is fully deleted Next step IF THEN the CompactFlash card is to be formatted CONT F1 to format the memory device and return to R9 Main Menu the application programs memory is to be formatted PROGS F4 to format the application programs memory All loadable application programs are deleted the System RAM is to be formatted SYSTM F5 to format the System RAM If the System RAM is formatted all system data such as user defined configuration sets and codelists will be lost Tools Format Memory Device R9 338 22 Description Access TOOLS Transfer XX STONEX Tools Transfer Objects This chapter describes the basi
350. ne Display Mask n Name Fixed Lines Define pa Nask 1 1st Line 2nd Line Reflector Height lt p CONT F1 3rd Line Line Space Full DD To accept changes and to return to CONFIGURE 4th Line Hz Ang le EE Display Settings 5th Line V Ang le dy CLEAR F4 6th Line Horiz Dist 4 To set all fields to XX Line Line Space Full ewr 1 Jane T Description of fields Q2a t DEELT F5 To recall the default settings Field Option Description Visible Yes or No Shows or hides the display mask as a page in SURVEY Fixed Lines gt From 0 to 5 Defines how many lines do not scroll in the survey screen when that display mask is used Ast Line gt Output Fixed to 1st Line Point ID 2nd Line gt to For each line one ofthe following options can be 16th Line gt selected Config Survey Settings R9 242 Field STONEX Option Add Constant Angle Right Annotation 1 4 Attrib free 01 20 Attrib 01 20 Automation Avg Max Dist Azimuth Backsight Pt ID Code Code free Code Desc Code Desc free Code Type Config Survey Settings Description Output field for additive constant of currently selected reflector Displays the horizontal angle difference between the backsight point and the current telescope position Input field for comments to be stored with the point Output field for attributes for free
351. nework flag R9 185 STONEX Field Option ReOpen Last Line End Line Cont Line Area Start Spline End Spline Cont Spline Begin Area ReOpen Any Area ReOpen Last Area Linework Description Opens the last used line again The last code used with the reopened line is automatically selected when the point is stored Closes all open lines Indicates a line area is open Stores the linework flag for beginning a spline and continues any open line area Closes a spline and continues any open line area Indicates a line area is open with spline line type Opens a new area when the next point is stored Any line area which is currently open is closed and the last point belonging to that line area is given the End Line Close Area linework flag The point may or may not be stored with a point code Opens an area from a list of all lines which are currently stored in the job when the next point is stored The last code used with the reopened area is automatically selected when the point is stored Any line area which is currently open is closed and the last point belonging to that line area is given the End Line Close Area linework flag Opens the last used area again The last code used with the reopened area is automatically selected when the point is stored R9 186 Field Option Description Close Area Closes all open areas Next st
352. nfigurations and their influence are shown in this table Configuration in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Show Codes Only Pt Codes All Codes Thematc Codes With Codelist Without Codelist With Codelist Without Codelist Required fields and their appearance in display mask Code Required Y Y Y Y S T O N E X Linework R9 188 Requirements STONEX Optional Appearance Choicelist User input Choicelist User input Code Type Required Y Optional Y Y Y Appearance Output Output Output Choicelist Linework Required Y Y Y Y Optional Appearance Choicelist Choicelist Choicelist Choicelist Adisplay mask must be configured with e afield for codes e achoicelist for Linework e The configuration ofa field for code types in a display mask is required for working with point line and area codes without choicelist Else the configuration of a field for code types is optional e Configure in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Coding e Show Codes Only Pt Codes gt or Show Codes All Codes gt e Thematc Codes With Codelist or Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt In CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Settings Linework defines the flags for Linework p V P o mt Linework R9 189 Le Access step by step Usi
353. ng WV PO cera ties EDM SS iLock settings ENEE 258 EDM Mode Average Fast ee Standard SynchroT rack eee eee Retire 261 TRACKING iere Eeer 261 Electronic adjustment ENEE 371 Electronic Distance Measurement EDM eens 419 End date erbe cadat c du cins 111 End Me iiiter iTi 111 ENTER 2 5e Stine a dieu detienen tie 42 STONEX WA STi E 371 Compensator Longitudinal adeptes isst Transversal Hz collimation Line of sight Standing axis aeui ttc i NETIC AUS E Vertical Ind Eegeregie eege Ee Exceeded limit Absolute coordinate difference een 103 AV CT ADC iere 104 Height Stakeout 659 Position StakeCout 659 Stakeout difference nee 679 Exclude Coordinate triplet from averaging ose 102 Export Data ss 205 Format ese n RE 205 To another device ee rrt tnn tente nnns 210 To custom ASCII format een 207 i qugu 72 175 R9 738 F len Management Filter Activate deactivate for codes Point line and area codes Points lines and areas eene Symbol ees ee EUR e RUE EE Finding a target point ENEE Firmware files directory EEN Firmware current version ENEE Firmware version Format Import Memory device Method sisi STONEX System EE 338 Format file export A
354. ng Linework Coding STONEX The Survey application program is used here to explain the combination of Linework Coding Step Description 1 Select Main Menu Survey to access SURVEY Survey Begin 2 In SURVEY Survey Begin select a job 3 Select a configuration set 4 Select a reflector 5 CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name This is what a display mask configured for Linework and coding looks like The most important keys are explained For the explanation of the other Keys refer to 35 2 Surveying Points Survey Default X Survey Drfset Dode Stode wap e ALL FI Point ID a To measure and store distances and angles Code 1234 STOP F1 Code Type Point Available if lt EDM Mode Tracking and Linework Begin Li ne 4 DIST F2 was pressed Stops the distance meas V 72 00 00 urements F1 changes back to ALL Horiz Dist De m DIST F2 Ht Diff De m To measure and display distances Available zj unless lt EDM Mode Tracking gt and or lt Log at Auto Pts Yes gt after the tracking or logging is ALL DIST REC SETAZ PAGE started REC F3 To record data If lt EDM Mode Tracking gt and or lt Log Auto Pts Yes gt records measured point and continues tracking Linework R9 190 Using Linework Coding for point codes step by step STONEX For lt Show Codes Only Pt Codes gt Step Field Description for thematical coding With c
355. ng an individual backsight point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template Refer to 15 1 ID Templates for more informa tion on point ID templates Setup R9 628 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Method gt Choicelist lt Method Local Resection gt lt Station ID gt User input The station ID of the instrument station Instrument Ht gt User input Instrument height lt Stn Ht From gt User Entered or Only available when lt Method Local Resection gt For lt Stn Ht From User Entered gt the height value of Target 1 Ht the station will be entered by the user and used to Diff calculate the height of the measured points For lt Stn Ht From Target 1 Ht Diff gt the first meas ured point will be given Height 0 and the height of the station will be calculated relative to this point lt Station Ht gt Output Only available when lt Stn Ht From User Entered gt The elevation of the instrument station STONEX Setup R9 629 Local resection step by step STONEX The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 CONT F1 to access SETUP Measure Target 1 2 SETUP Measure Target 1 33 4 4 Choose a target point and type in a reflector height Aim correctly at the reflector
356. ng stored without an attribute value Attributes of attribute type mandatory can only be created in Stonex Tools Code Change The screen XX Enter Mandatory Attribute will only Only appear when a new code with a mandatory attribute was Selected lt Thematc Codes gt Sets the coding method With Codes stored within the job codelist can be selected to Codelist code points lines and areas Without Codes stored within the job codelist cannot be selected Codelist to code points lines and areas Each code must be entered lt Show Codes gt Only Pt Codes Only point codes will be available in the choicelist for Config Survey Settings lt Code gt lt Point Code gt in a display mask of an appli cation program R9 249 CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Linework page STONEX Field Option Description All Codes All codes of the job codelist will be available in the choicelist for lt Code gt lt Point Code gt in a display mask of an application program Selecting a line area code opens a new line area lt String Attrib gt Choicelist Available for lt Show Codes All Codes gt When this field is active surveyed points that have the same code attached are strung to one line Next step PAGE F1 changes to the Linework page The flags for Linework are defined on this screen A flag e isstored as a property of a point e can be exported with a format file e is different to a
357. ng the COGO calculation e may be entered Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used Position only is calcu lated height can be typed in COGO R9 498 Diagram A Known P1 First known point P2 Second known point Q1 Direction from P1 to P3 Q2 Direction from P2 to P3 Unknown P3 COGO point COGO intersection calcu The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more lation with bearing information on screens bearing step by step Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Intersection Input Ce COGO Intersection Input Input page 32 3 SHIFT CONF F2 to configure the COGO application program 2 COGO Intersection Input Input page Method Brng Brng gt 1st Point gt The point ID of the first known point for the COGO calcu lation Select the point stored in the job STONEX COGO R9 499 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Ce SURVY F5 when 1st Point gt is highlighted To measure a point for 35 2 the COGO calculation Ce For all point fields the MapView interactive display on the Map page 30 5 can be used to select the desired point To type in coordinates for a known point open the choicelist when lt 1st Point gt is highlighted Press NEW F2 to create a new point 7 3 2 COGO Intersection Input Input pa
358. ngles Point ID DIST F2 Reflector Ht 1 250 m To measure and display distances Available L unless lt EDM Mode Tracking and or Log Hz 0 0000 d V 0 0002 g started Horiz Dist NM LLL REC F3 Ht Diff HM ee To record data un If lt EDM Mode Tracking and or Log Auto Pts Yes gt records measured point and 2 ACL DIST REC DONE PAGE continues tracking DONE F4 To end surveying an area and to access COGO Edit Area Area ID where the area can be stored PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT INDIV F5 and SHIFT RUN F5 To change between entering an individual point ID different to the defined ID template and the running point ID according to the ID template Refer to 15 1 ID Templates Auto Pts Yes after the tracking or logging is COGO R9 573 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Point ID gt User input The identifier for manually occupied points The config ured point ID template is used The ID can be changed in the following ways e To start anew sequence of point ID s type over the point ID e For an individual point ID independent of the ID template SHIFT INDIV F5 SHIFT RUN F5 changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template Refer to 15 1 ID Templates lt Reflector Ht gt User input The last used reflector height is suggested when accessing the Survey application program An
359. nical adjustment STONEX Tools Check amp Adjust Overview Stonex instruments are manufactured assembled and adjusted to the best possible quality Quick temperature changes shock or stress can cause deviations and influence the instrument accuracy It is therefore recommended to check and adjust the instrument from time to time This can be done in the field by running through specific measurement procedures The procedures are guided and have to be followed carefully and precisely as described in the following chapters Some other instrument errors and mechanical parts can be adjusted mechanically The following instrument errors can be checked amp adjusted electronically Lt Compensator longitudinal and transversal index errors i Vertical index error related to the standing axis c Hz collimation error also called line of sight error a Tilting axis error iLock iLock zero point error for Hz and V option Every angle measured in the daily work is corrected automatically if the compensator and the Hz corrections are activated in the instrument configuration Select Main Menu Config Instrument Settings Compensator to check the settings The results from check and adjust are displayed as errors but used with the opposite sign as corrections when applied to measurements Refer to the Stonex R9 User Manual for details Tools Check amp Adjust R9 371 Precise measurements To get precise me
360. nly affect the Setup EDM amp iLock settings e Any changes made to the EDM amp iLock Settings for example via Icons Quick Set Hotkeys while the Setup application program is not active only affect the Survey EDM amp iLock settings When entering the Setup application program the Setup EDM amp iLock Settings are active e When leaving the Setup application program the Survey EDM amp iLock Settings are active e Both Survey and Setup EDM amp iLock Settings are part of the configuration sets Diagram EDM amp iLock Settings EDH Mode CONT F1 Reflector 360 Pri sm 4 To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu Add Constant 0 0mm TEST F4 Automation Robotic dr To access the CONFIGURE EDM Test iLock Setting Norma 1 di Signal Frequency screen DAT PAGE F6 CONT TEST To change to other page on screen Config Instrument Settings R9 259 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt EDM Type gt Reflector IR Reflctrless RL Long Range LO All fields are set to the last used options The IR EDM exists for all instrument types and allows to measure the distance to a prism or a tape IR is the EDM that can be used with iLock and Robotic For lt Automation iLock gt or lt Automation Robotic gt lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt is automatically set Whenever lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt is selected the last setting f
361. nown must be also depending on the arc calculation method e an offset point e either the segment length or the number of segments Shift Rotate amp Scale To calculate the position of new points using 32 9 Manual e coordinates of known points e shifts rotation e scale Heights are not scaled The values for shifts rotation and or scale are entered manually Points with full coordinate triplets position only points and height only points can be used COGO R9 472 COGO menu options Description Refer to chapter Shift Rotate amp Scale Match Pts To calculate the coordinates of new points using the 32 10 shifts rotation and scale computed from selected points Points with full coordinate triplets position only points and height only points can be used Area Division To divide an area bya 32 11 e defined line e percentage e size of a sub area End COGO To end COGO and return to the screen from where COGO was accessed Next step IF THEN a COGO calculation method is to be started highlight the relevant option and press CONT F1 Refer to the chapters stated above COGO is to be configured SHIFT CONF F2 Refer to 32 3 Configuring COGO COGO is to be ended highlight End COGO and CONT F1 STONEX COGO R9 473 32 3 Access COGO Configuration Parameters page STONEX Configuring COGO Select Main
362. ns where the code can be corrected One point cannot have different codes XX Point Code Mismatch Point Code Mismatch Point ID 500 New Code aoc NA Code Desc toe of bank To storethe highlighted code and any associated attributes with the point being stored and to Stored Code top continue with the application program or data Code Desc top of bank management MORE F5 To display information about the code descrip 02a t tion the code group and any attributes associ STORE HORE ated with the highlighted code Description of fields Field Option Description lt New Code gt Output The code for the point lt Stored Code gt Output The code as stored for the existing point in the job S T O N E X Coding R9 178 Match codes step by Ste Description step p De Ce XX Point Code Mismatch opens automatically if the codes of the new and the existing point do not match 1 Highlight the code to be stored with the new point 2 STORE F1 stores the highlighted code and any associated attributes with the point being stored and continues with the application program or data management S T O N E X Coding R9 179 9 6 2 Description XX Attributes Already Stored STONEX Attribute Mismatch Ifa point with the same point ID exists in the job the codes the attribute names and the attribute values of the new and the existing point mus
363. nstrument and the interfaces 5 6 Tools e To format the memory device To upload files relevant for the instrument function ality for example firmware and language files To transfer non data related files between instru ment and CompactFlash card To perform arithmetic operations such as addition subtraction multiplication division statistical func tions trigonometric functions conversions or roots To view files on the CompactFlash card To type in or load a licence Key To calibrate the instrument 5 7 Main Menu R9 56 5 2 Access Description SURVEY Survey Begin Next step STONEX Survey Select Main Menu Survey Survey provides the functionality used to perform the survey Survey Begin Job EET RE Codelist test CONT F1 To accept settings and to continue with screen i SURVEY Survey Job Name Config Set 1234 CONF r2 Reflector Circular pri sm dl To configure auto point and remote point meas Add Constant 0 0 mn urements functionality SETUP F3 To set up station Accesses SETUP Station at CONT CONF SETUP Setup For Main Menu Survey Refer to chapter 35 Main Menu R9 57 Access Description R9 Programs Next step 5 3 STONEX Programs Select Main Menu Programs OR Press ON Programs accesses the application programs menu The screen of the application programs menu
364. nstrument source TPS Averaging of auto points An average is never calculated for auto points even if a measured point of class MEAS already exists with the same point ID S T O N E X Survey Auto Points R9 690 36 2 Access SURVEY Configuration Auto Points page STONEX Configuring Auto Points Select Main Menu Survey In SURVEY Survey Begin press CONF F2 to access SURVEY Configuration OR In SURVEY Survey Job Name press SHIFT CONF F2 to access SURVEY Configuration The settings on this page activate the logging of auto points and define the method of logging Configuration SCodeJAuto Points Remote Pt Log Auto Pts Yes CONT F1 Log By T ime To accept changes and return to the screen from Log Every 1 05 where this screen was accessed DMASK F3 Available for Log Auto Pts Yes To configure EDH Hode what is viewed in the Auto page in the Survey application program Refer to paragraph SURVEY Configure Auto Pts Display Mask 02a f PAGE F6 CONT DHASK PAGE To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description Log Auto Pts gt Yes Activates logging of auto points Ce All other fields on the screen are active and can be edited with this setting Survey Auto Points R9 691 Field Option No Description Deactivates logging of auto points and all fields on this screen
365. nt lt Pressure gt Pressure set on the instrument lt Atmos ppm gt Atmospheric ppm set on the instrument Next step CONT F1 to exit STATUS Station Information S T O N E X STATUS R9 409 28 3 Access STATUS Battery amp Memory Battery page STONEX STATUS Battery amp Memory Select STATUS Battery amp Memory Refer to 28 1 STATUS Functions on how to access the STATUS menu OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Tap the battery icon OR Tap the CompactFlash card icon Battery amp Memory Battery Memory Battery Ext 100 CONT F1 To exit STATUS Battery amp Memory 02a t PAGE F6 CONT PAGE To change to another page on this screen STATUS R9 410 STATUS Battery amp Memory Memory page STONEX Description of fields Field Description Any field The percentage of remaining power capacity for all batteries are displayed numerically Batteries not in use are shown in grey For internal and external battery being attached at the same time the internal battery is used until it is empty and then the external battery is used Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Memory page If no information for a field is available for example no CompactFlash card is inserted then is displayed Battery amp Memory Battery Memory Device Used CF Card Size Free KB Hem CF Card H
366. nt defining the 1st tangent lt Point 2 gt Choicelist The point ID with PI Point defining the 2nd tangent lt Radius gt User Input The radius of the arc COGO R9 487 Storing the results step by step STONEX Step Description 1 Press CALC F1 to calculate the inverse result and move to the results screen 2 Press STORE F1 to store the inverse result to the active job There are no points stored to the database only the inverse result 3 Inverse results can be exported from the job using a format file The format file is created with Format Manager in Stonex Tools COGO R9 488 32 5 32 5 1 Description STONEX COGO Calculation Traverse Method Overview Elements that must be known are e the coordinates of one point e the direction from the known point to the COGO point e the distance from the known point to the COGO point e offsets if required and configured The coordinates of the known point e may be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered The direction from the known point to the COGO point can be an azimuth or an angle Points with full coordinate triplets and position only points can be used Position only is calcu lated height can be typed in A COGO traverse calculation can be calculated for asingle point e multiple points Several single points are calculated in one sequence e sideshots
367. nt function REMOT F4 is not available in SURVEY Survey Job Name lt Hz Dist Tol gt User input The horizontal distance to the remote point is equal to the horizontal distance of the base point The value for lt Hz Dist Tol gt is the maximum tolerated length of the chord between the base point and the remote point lt Display Mask gt Choicelist Displays lt None gt until a display mask is chosen All display masks from Main Menu Config Survey Settings Display Settings can be selected Next step CONT F1 to return to the screen SURVEY Configuration was accessed from Survey Remote Point R9 722 37 4 Description Measuring remote points step by step STONEX Working Example Application Pick up points along a bridge The points to be measured are not directly accessible with a reflector Working technique Remote point surveying Settings lt Use Remote Pt Yes gt in the SURVEY Configuration Remote Pt page Step Description Ce The reflector height at the base point is always applied in the calculation of the base point elevation For the calculation of the remote point elevation the reflector height is automatically set to zero 1 Aim at the reflector that is placed at the base point which is directly underneath the remote point to be measured 2 SURVEY Survey Job Name DIST F2 to measure the horizontal distance to the base point REMOT
368. nt is set up and oriented to one or more known backsight targets Access step by step Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter Press ON to access the Programs menu Select and activate Setup to move to the first screen Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Station Setup Pm b i NI bP lt Method gt Ensure that Ori amp Ht Transfr is selected lt Station Coord gt Select the source for the instrument station coordi nates lt Station ID gt Enter Select the instrument station lt Instrument Ht gt Enter the height of the instrument station lt Fixpoint Job gt Select the fixpoint job of the control target points The geometric scale correction is displayed The correction displayed depends upon the options chosen in CONFIGURE TPS Corrections GeoPPM page e if lt Calc Scale Automatically gt lt Computd Scale gt is displayed e if lt Calc Scale Manually gt Current Scale gt is displayed 16 4 Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Measure Target STONEX Setup R9 622 SETUP Measure Target STONEX Measure Target 1 Point ID Reflector Ht Azimuth 9 V e zm EE ee Slope Dist NM o aa m AAzimuth AHoriz Dist m AHeight MELLE m 02a ALL prst REC Joone Setup ALL F1 To measure and store the distances and angles made to the control points
369. ntation are deter mined by sighting to one or more known target points maximum of ten target points Only angles or both angles and distances may be measured For a resection least squares or robust calculations are used For a resection Helmert Helmert calculations are used Access step by step Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter Press ON to access the Programs menu Select and activate Setup to move to the first screen Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Station Setup lt Method gt Select either Resection or Resection Helmert Pw Nh Ea lt Station ID gt Enter the instrument station lt Instrument Ht gt Enter the height of the instrument station lt Fixpoint Job gt Select the fixpoint job of the control target points Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Measure Target SETUP Measure Target 33 4 4 ALL F1 or REC F3 Refer to 33 4 4 Orientation and Height Transfer for details on fields keys 9o uoc STO N EX Setup R9 626 33 4 6 Local Resection Description Access step by step STONEX This method can be used to calculate the two or three dimensional local coordinates for the instrument station and the orientation of the horizontal circle from distance and angular measurements to two target points For Resection and or Resection Helmert refer to 33 4 5 Resection Resection Helmer
370. nteractive Display Feature R9 434 Example access for survey mode Step Description 1 Select Main Menu Survey OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Press ON Highlight Survey CONT F1 Refer to 31 2 Accessing the Programs Menu for information on the ON key CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name 3 PAGE F6 until SURVEY Survey Job Name Map page is active CE MapView can be open multiple times for example as SURVEY Survey Job Name Map page accessed from R9 Main Menu and as MANAGE Data Job Name Map page accessed using the USER key STONEX MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 435 30 3 Description Le Access step by step XX MapView Configuration Points page STONEX Configuring MapView Allows options to be set which are used as default options within MapView These settings are stored within the configuration set and apply to all Map and Plot pages regardless of how MapView is accessed Any changes made in XX MapView Configuration affect the appearance of MapView in all application programs not just the active application program Step Description 1 Refer to 30 2 Accessing MapView to access MapView in map plot or survey mode 2 SHIFT CONF F2 to access XX MapView Configuration MapView Configuration Points Lines amp Areas Displa Show Points Display with Point Symbol Point
371. nth level STO RCL X Y LASTX CLEAR STO F1 To store X to the memory Up to ten values can be stored RCL F2 To recall a value for X from the memory Up to ten values can be recalled X Y F3 To swap the values for X and lt Y gt LASTX F4 To recall the last X before recent calculation CLEAR F6 To delete everything S T O N E X Tools Calculator R9 362 SHIFT to access the second level of function keys HELP CONF DONE IER SHIFT CONF F2 To configure the calculator SHIFT DONE F4 To return to R9 Main Menu S T O N E X Tools Calculator R9 363 24 4 4 Calling and Closing the Calculator from an Input Field for Numeric Charac ters Ce COGO traverse calculation is used as example Call and close calculator Step Description Refer to step by step chapter 1 Select Main Menu Programs COGO to access the screen COGO COGO Begin 2 COGO COGO Begin Check the settings CONT F1 to access COGO COGO Menu COGO COGO Menu Highlight Traverse CONT F1 to access COGO Traverse Input COGO Traverse Input Highlight lt Azimuth gt 7 ENTER 8 CALC F5 to access TOOLS XX Calculator Ce Ifavalue had already been typed in for lt Azimuth gt this value is taken over into the input field in TOOLS XX Calculator 9 TOOLS XX Calculator S T O N E X Tools Calculator R9 364 STONEX
372. nty attributes can be added Ce LAST F4 recalls the last used attribute values for the selected code Ce DEFLT F5 recalls the default attribute values for the selected code Coding R9 161 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter 6 FREECODE Enter Attributes STORE F1 returns to the screen from where FREECODE Select Free Code was accessed and stores the free code any associated attribute values and time related information Coding R9 162 9 3 2 L Requirements Access Free coding with direct input step by step STONEX Free Coding with Direct Input In this chapter free coding with direct input is explained for points Refer to 7 4 Line Area Management for information on coding lines areas The user defined menu is configured to display the option Enter Free Code Press USER and select Enter Free Code to access the screen FREECODE Enter Free Code amp Attributes Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key Step Description 1 Refer to paragraph Access to access FREECODE Enter Free Code amp Attributes 2 FREECODE Enter Free Code amp Attributes Free Code The name for the free code Attribute n The attribute values for the free code Type in a code and attribute values As soon as a free code is typed in a codelist is created within the job Up to eight attributes can be added LAST F4 Available if a free co
373. o an other page on the screen Setup R9 640 SETUP Results Stn Code page STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Station ID gt User input Station ID of the current station set up lt No of Points gt Output Number of points used in calculation lt Set gt Output The displayed options are set and stored in the system All other values are taken from the current system setup Instrument Ht Output The current instrument height lt Stn Easting gt Output The calculated Easting lt Stn Northing gt Output The calculated Northing lt Stn Height gt Output The calculated Height lt New Azimuth gt Output New oriented azimuth with running angle as telescope moves Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Stn Code page The functionality of the Stn Code page is similar to MANAGE New Point Code page Refer to 7 3 2 Creating a New Point for more information on keys Description of fields Field Option Description Point Code gt The thematical code for the offset point Setup R9 641 SETUP Results Stn Plot page STONEX Field Option Choicelist User input Description Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt All point codes from the job codelist can be selected The attributes are shown as output input or choicelist fields depending on their definition Available for lt The
374. odelist Without codelist 1 lt Code gt Select a code from the choicelist Type in a code Only point codes are available for selection lt None gt to store a point without code or to perform Linework without coding to store a point without code or to perform Linework without coding lt Code Type gt e Point is displayed This field is an output field only lt Linework gt e Select a Linework flag to be stored with the point e Select to store a point without a Linework flag or to perform coding without Linework e ALL F1 e The point is stored with the selected code e The point is stored with the selected Linework flag The choice of flags available for lt Linework gt is updated Linework R9 191 Using Linework Coding for all codes step by step STONEX For lt Show Codes All Codes gt Step Field Description for thematical coding With codelist Without codelist 1 lt Code gt Select a code from the choicelist Type in a code Point line and area codes are available for selection S lt None gt to store a point without code or to perform Linework without coding to store a point without code or to perform Linework without coding 2 lt Code Type gt The type of the selected code Select the type of the entered This field is an output field only code 3 lt Linework gt e Selecta Linew
375. oding to activate quick coding 2 Type in the one two or three digits of the quick code 15 3 The current setting for lt Digits gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework determines by how many keystrokes quick coding is executed Ce ENTER to execute quick coding already after one or two keystrokes Available for lt Digits 2 gt and lt Digits 3 gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Ce ESC clears digits from the entry Ce The line area code assigned to the quick code is searched for in the job codelist Ce Anew line area is created and immediately stored with that line area code and attributes For the line area ID the line area ID template as defined in CONFIGURE ID Templates is used Ce The system asks for mandatory attribute values 3 Quick coding for a line area is finished Coding R9 167 9 5 SmartCodes 9 5 1 Overview Description SmartCodes is basically a quick way for code to be selected and point to be measured All existing coding linework and point measurement functionality is retained S T O N E X Coding R9 168 9 5 2 Access SURVEY Configuration SCode page STONEX Configuring SmartCodes Select Main Menu Survey In SURVEY Survey Begin press CONF F2 to access SURVEY Configuration OR In SURVEY Survey Job Name press SHIFT CONF F2 to access SURVEY Configuration The settings on this page activate the using of SmartCodes and define the method All settings in t
376. oftware If alanguage is not available for the system software the English language is used instead Application programs run in the language they were loaded Next step CONT F1 returns to R9 Main Menu Config General Settings R9 293 17 5 Lights Display Beeps Text Description The settings on this screen allow the lights and screen appearance to be configured turn the notification beeps on and off and define the behaviour of the keys Access Select Main Menu Config General Settings Lights Display Beeps Text OR Press SHIFT F11 CONFIGURE Lights Display Beeps CONT F1 Text To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu Lights page PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Redlaser gt On or Off To turn the redlaser of RL EDM on and off lt SureBeam gt On or Off To turn the Laser Guide GUS74 on and off This field is only available if GUS74 is fitted lt Intensity gt From 0 to To adjust the SureBeam Laser Guide intensity using 100 the left and right arrow keys lt Reticule gt On or Off To turn the reticule illumination on and off lt Intensity gt From0 to To adjust the reticule illumination intensity using the 100 left and right arrow keys S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 294 CONFIGURE Lights Display Beeps Text Display page STONEX
377. oints Northing Offset Cross Offset Height Offset Length Reflector Reflector Height SD Last Rec Slope Dist Transversal Tilt Survey Auto Points Description Insert half line space Output field for the longitudinal tilt of the vertical axis Output field for the number of auto points logged after pressing START F1 in SURVEY Survey Job Name Auto page Counting starts from 0 every time START F1 is pressed Output field for the North coordinate of the measured point Input field for the horizontal distance offset for the measured point perpendicular to the line of sight Input field for the height offset of the measured point Input field for the horizontal distance offset in the direction of line of sight Output field for the chosen reflector Input field for the reflector height Output field for the last recorded distance Output field for the measured slope distance Output field for the transversal tilt of the vertical axis R9 697 STONEX Field Option Description V Angle Output field for the vertical angle Next steps Step Description 1 CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to SURVEY Configuration Auto Points page 2 CONT F1 returns to the screen from where SURVEY Configuration Auto Points page was accessed Survey Auto Points R9 698 36 3 Auto Points Requirements lt Lo
378. on set onthe 28 2 instrument Battery amp Memory Information related to use and status of battery and 28 3 memory System Information Information related to the instrument hardware and 28 4 firmware Interfaces Information related to the configuration and use of 28 5 interfaces port and devices Bluetooth Information related to the configuration and use of 28 6 Bluetooth interfaces Level amp Laser Plummet Information related to electronic level and laser 28 7 plummet STATUS R9 407 28 2 STATUS Station Information Access Select STATUS Station Information Refer to 28 1 STATUS Functions on how to access the STATUS menu STATUS Station Information x Station Information Station ID 5 Instrument Ht 1 500 n Easting 75 609 m Northing B3 557 m Height 100 000 m Temperature 12 0 C Pressure 1013 3 mbar Atmos ppm 0 0 02a CONT F1 CONT To exit STATUS Station Information S T O N E X STATUS R9 408 Description of fields Field Description lt Station ID gt Station ID of the current station set up Instrument Ht gt Instrument height of the current station set up lt Easting gt Easting value of the instrument position lt Northing gt Northing value of the instrument position lt Ortho Ht gt The orthometric height of the instrument position is displayed lt Temperature gt Temperature set on the instrume
379. oordinate quality 1D CQ lc cos V gu vi D sin V 1DCQ Estimated coordinate quality of the height V Zenith angle 2D estimated coordinate quality 2 a ein 2 n2 2D CQ d p sin Vto py D 2DCQ Estimated horizontal coordinate quality 3D estimated coordinate quality 3D CQ ONE o y D 1 sin V 3D CQ Estimated spatial coordinate quality Manage Data R9 90 STONEX Working Example 1 Instrument Angular accuracy EDM accuracy Slope distance Hz V 1D CQ 0 00207 me 2 1mm 2D CQ 0 00303 m 3 0 mm 3D CQ 0 00367 m 3 7 mm Working Example 2 Instrument Angular accuracy EDM accuracy Slope distance Hz V 1D CQ 0 0927 m 2D CQ 0 0972 m 3D CQ 0 1343 m R9 2 2 6 1728 10 gon gt oHz V 2 V2 2 mm 2 ppm for an IR measurement 150m 210 gon 83 gon R9 2 2 6 1728 104 gon gt oHz V 2 V2 2 mm 2 ppm for an IR measurement 7000 m 210 gon 83 gon Manage Data R9 91 Access Create point step by step STONEX 7 3 2 Creating a New Point Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management to access MANAGE Data Job Name The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter MANAGE Data Job Name Points page NEW F2 to access MANAGE New Point MANAGE New Point Coords page lt Point ID gt The name of t
380. or lt Automation gt which was used with reflector is set When activated IR is displayed as an icon lt Automation None gt and lt Reflector Reflector less gt are selected The other fields are set to the last used options When activated RL is displayed as an icon lt Automation None gt is selected Last used options are reset for the other fields When activated LO is displayed as an icon lt EDM Mode gt Standard Fast Available for all EDM Type gt options Standard single distance measurement When activated STD is displayed as an icon Available only for lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt Fast single distance measurement Config Instrument Settings R9 260 STONEX Field Option Tracking SynchroTrack Average Description When activated FAST is displayed as an icon Available unless lt EDM Type Long Range LO gt Continuous distance measurement When activated TRK is displayed as an icon Available only for lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt This is the measurement mode for the interpolation of angle measurements in IR Robotic tracking mode In difference to normal IR Robotic tracking mode where angle measurements are only assigned to certain distance measurements SynchroTrack will perform a linear interpolation between the previous and following angle measurement based upon the times tamp of the EDM measurement Using this in
381. or communication 5 pin LEMO 0 Port 2 Handle Hotshoe connection for RH9 Port 3 BT Bluetooth module for communication with Bluetooth capable devices Location Port Description Port 1 This port is located at the base of the instrument and is always available Port 2 Handle This port is located on top ofthe Communication side cover Port 3 BT This port is housed within the Communication side cover S T O N E X Interfaces Ports Devices R9 312 18 4 Devices 18 4 1 Overview of Devices Description e Adevice is the hardware which is connected to the chosen port Devices are used to transmit and receive measurement data Before using any device with R9 it is necessary to configure the interface with which it will be used Refer to 19 Config M Interfaces Editing The Interface for information on how to configure interfaces e Some devices may be used with different interfaces for different applications Further information IF more information is THEN required on radios for remote control Refer to 18 4 5 Device Radios for Remote Control RS232 Refer to 18 4 6 Device RS232 S T O N E X Interfaces Ports Devices R9 313 18 4 2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices Description Access step by step STONEX Allows devices to be created edited selected and deleted Refer to 20 Config Inter
382. ork flag to be stored with the point Ce e Select to store a point without a Linework flag or to perform coding without Linework 4 e ALL F1 Ce l Fora point code being selected The point is stored with the selected code The pointis stored with the selected Linework flag The choice of flags available for lt Linework gt is updated Linework R9 192 11 11 1 Description Default configuration sets User defined configura tion sets Edit outside the configu ration set wizard L STONEX Manage Configuration Sets Overview The instrument has numerous user configurable parameters and functions This allows a variety of preferences to be addressed The configuration of the parameters and functions for an individual measuring technique are combined in a configuration set Default configuration sets exist on the instrument They use standard settings for the majority of application programs Default configuration sets can be edited and deleted It is always possible to restore the default configuration sets New configuration sets can be created The configuration set wizard assists in editing configu ration sets Parameters and functions can be edited without going through the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 4 Editing a Configuration Set for more information Each application program can be configured separately Application program se
383. orrected twice first by the determined iLock errors for Hz and V and then by the individual small deviations of the current pointing the Summary of errors to be adjusted electronically iLock offsets Instrument error Effects Hz Effects V Elimination Automatically with two face corrected with measurement proper adjust ment c Hz collimation error Y G a Tilting axis error d Y l Compensator index error E Y Y t Compensator index error Y Y Y i V Index error Y Y iLock Collimation error Y Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 378 STONEX 27 3 Accessing Check amp Adjust Menu Access Select Main Menu Tools Check amp Adjust OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key TOOLS Check amp Adjust Menu Check amp Adjust Menu 4 Combined tie iLock 2 Tilting Axis a 3 Compensator 1 t 4 Current Values 5 End Check amp Adjust CONT F1 To select the highlighted option and to continue with the subsequent screen CONF F2 01A t To access the TOOLS Configuration screen CONT CONF Refer to 27 4 Configure Check amp Adjust Description of the Check amp Adjust functions Function Description Refer to chapter Combined Lti ciLock To determine the t i cand iLock instrument errors 27 5 Tilting Axis a To determine the tilting axis a error 27 6 Compensator 1t
384. otection can be deacti vated e Orthe PIN code can be changed Start Up amp Power Down E lt Start Up amp Power Down X Start Up amp Power Down PIM Code Start Up amp Power Down PIM Code Use PIN PIN Code WEL Use PIN Yes Change PIN No 4f 02a d 02a d coT _ Pae cont PAGE Config General Settings R9 303 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Use PIN gt Yes or No Activates the PIN code protection This setting is not part of the configuration set lt New PIN gt User input The PIN code must be a number with four to six digits lt PIN Code gt User input The PIN code as previously defined on this page The correct PIN code must be typed in within five attempts or the PUK code is required Refer to 1 Instrument Protection with PIN Change PIN gt Yes or No Activates New PIN gt to type in a new PIN code Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen S T O N E X Config General Settings R9 304 18 Interfaces Ports Devices 18 1 Overall Concept Terminology Term Description Interface The procedures codes and protocols that enable two entities to interact for an exchange of data Each interface is given a meaningful display name which enables easy distinction between interfaces Port A connection through which a separate device may communicate with the ins
385. ow pointing in the direction of the point to be staked Timewise the last recorded point If no points are yet staked lt Orientate To North gt is used for the first point to be staked A point from lt Stakeout Job gt selected in STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin R9 654 Field Option Description To A point from lt Job gt selected in STAKEOUT Stakeout Point Store Begin To The direction of the orientation is parallel to a refer Line Stake ence line from lt Stakeout Job gt selected in STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin Open the listbox to create edit or delete a reference line To The direction of the orientation is parallel to a refer Line Store ence line from lt Job gt selected in STAKEOUT Stakeout Begin Open the listbox to create edit or delete a refer ence line lt To gt Choicelist Available for lt Orientate To Point Stake gt lt Orien tate To Point Store gt lt Orientate To Line Stake gt and lt Orientate To Line Store gt To select the point or line to be used for orientation Refer to 7 2 Accessing Data Management for information on creating editing and deleting a known point lt Stake Mode gt The method of staking out Polar The direction from the orientation reference the hori zontal distance and the cut fill is displayed Orthogonal The distance forwards to backwards from the point the distance right left to the point and the cut fill is displayed Visual Guides
386. p IF a device is THEN not to be created or edited CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE GSI Output was accessed to be created or edited DEVCE F5 to create or edit a device S T O N E X Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 324 Output format GSI Format STONEX GSI data is transmitted in blocks Every block consists of several data words refer to the exam ples below Every data word begins with a two character Word Index the WI code specifying the data type within this block Each GSI 8 word has in total 16 characters consisting of 7 infor mation characters followed by 8 data characters and by the blank character ASCII code 32 at the end of the data word The GSI 16 block is similar to the GSI 8 block but the block begins with and the data word contains 16 characters for large values such as UTM coordinates large alpha numeric codes attributes or point ID s Example 1 shows a GSI 8 block sequence with the words for point ID 11 Easting coordinate 81 and Northing coordinate 82 Example 2 shows a GSI 16 block sequence with the words for point ID 11 horizontal 21 and vertical angle 22 There are no hardcoded GSI files available Type GSI8 Polar amp Cart GSI16 Polar GSI16 Cartesian WI 11 Point ID Point ID Point ID WI21 Azimuth Azimuth WI22 V V WI31 SlopeDist SlopeDist
387. p R9 637 PAGE F6 To change to an other page on the screen Refer to 30 MapView Interactive Display Feature for more information Description of columns Column Description The indicates that the delta value of either measured horizontal angle distance or height exceeds the calculation limit Point ID The point ID of the measured target points Use Indicates if and how a target point is used in the station calculation Choices are 3D 2D 1D and NO AHz Can be displayed by pressing MORE F5 Difference between calculated and measured horizontal angle for the target points If a target point does not have coordinates are displayed Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by a ADist Can be displayed by pressing MORE F5 Difference between calculated and measured distance from the station to the target points If a target point does not have coordinates are displayed Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by a AHeight Can be displayed by pressing MORE F5 Difference between calculated and measured height ofthe target points If a target point does not have a height coordinate are displayed Differences exceeding the defined limit are indicated by a STONEX R9 638 Column Description AEast Can be displayed by pressing MORE F5 Difference between fixpoint and measured point calculated f
388. pical configuration set An additional page is available when a user defined display mask is used Orthogonal Stakeout ALL F1 Stake Map l To measure a distance and store distance and 000200 w angles hr 0 0000 n S DIST F2 To measure a distance BACK 4 49 2893 m REC F3 LEFT 0 0003 m To store angles and distance Distance must be FILL m measured before 2FACE F4 Ht 101 4958 n To take a measurement in Face I and Face II The oint stored is an average of the two measure ALL DIST REC 2FACE sURVY PAGE Pons S When using instruments fitted with iLock the point is automatically measured in both faces the resulting point is stored and the instrument is returned to the first face This hotkey is only available for lt EDM Mode Standard gt and lt EDM Mode Fast gt and in the Survey and Stakeout programs SURVY F5 To access Survey application program to measure points independent from the Stakeout application program To return to Stakeout application program press SHIFT QUIT F6 or ESC PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen Stakeout R9 668 SHIFT CONF F2 To configure stakeout Refer to 34 3 Config uring Stakeout SHIFT POS2D F3 To position the telescope X Y onto the point to be staked SHIFT POS3D F4 To position the telescope X Y Z onto the point to be staked SHIFT MSTAK F5 To enter angle and distance values to stake out a point
389. pied staked point Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Checks page Refer to paragraph STAKEOUT Configuration Checks page S T O N E X Stakeout R9 658 STAKEOUT Configuration Checks page STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Pos Check gt Yes or No Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordinate difference between the staked point and the point to be staked If the defined Pos Limit is exceeded the stakeout can be repeated skipped or stored Pos Limit gt User input Available for Pos Check Yes Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate difference accepted in the posi tion check Height Check gt Yes or No Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference between the staked point and the point to be staked If the defined Height Limit gt is exceeded the stakeout can be repeated skipped or stored Height Limit User input Available for Height Check Yes Sets the maximum vertical difference accepted in the height check lt Beep near Pt gt Yes or No The instrument beeps when the horizontal radial distance from the current position to the point to be staked is equal to or less than defined in lt Dist from Pt gt lt Dist from Pt gt User input Available for lt Beep near Pt Yes gt The horizontal radial distance from the current position to the point to be stak
390. ption Use Interface gt Yesor No Activates the interface Port Output This field is available when Use Interface Yes gt Port to be used lt Device gt Output This field is available when lt Use Interface Yes gt Device to be used lt Protocol gt This field is available when lt Use Interface Yes gt Protocol defines if the system expects a handshake or no handshake RS232 GSI A handshake is required A data block is sent out from the instrument and a receive confirmation is expected This handshake requires that GeoCom Mode be activated None No handshake is required GSI Format gt Output This field is available when Use Interface Yes gt GSIS GSI Polar and Cartesian 8 data characters Polar amp Cart Point ID Hz V SlopeDist PPM E N Elev GSI16 Polar GSI Polar 16 data characters Point ID Hz V SlopeDist PPM reflector height GSI16 Carte GSI Cartesian 16 data characters sian E N Elev Reflector Height R9 323 Field Option Pt N E Ht Date Pt E N Ht Date Description Coordinate data Northing BEFORE Easting Coordinate data Easting BEFORE Northing Pseudo NMEA Based on NMEA National Marine Electronics Associa GGA tion which is a standard for interfacing marine elec tronic devices GSI8 Polar GSI Polar 8 data characters Point ID Hz V SlopeDist PPM GSI16 Polar2 GSI Polar 16 data characters Point ID Hz V SlopeDist PPM Next ste
391. r Posn The character position at which the cursor is placed when ENTER is pressed in Point ID when surveying points Cursor Posn Last Character means that the cursor is placed immediately to the right of the last character Adapt the settings according to the requirements CONT F1 stores the new ID template into the ID template library and returns to CONFIGURE ID Template Library CONT F1 returns to CONFIGURE ID Templates Config Survey Settings R9 230 Examples for incrementation STONEX Step Description 9 CONT F1 returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE ID Templates was accessed For Increment Numeric only The rightmost numeric part is incremented within the point ID lt ID gt lt Increment By gt Next point ID Notes Point994 5 Point999 Point1004 994point 5 999point 1004point 123point123 10 123point113 Right hand side numbers are incremented Negative incre ments allowed Point11 6 Point5 Point 1 Point 7 Point 13 Abcdefghijklmn94 5 Abcdefghijklmno99 Incrementation fails if next Point ID increment fail increment will result in more than 16 characters Config Survey Settings R9 231 STONEX lt ID gt lt Increment By gt Next point ID Notes Abcdefghijklmno9 5 Abcdefghijklmnop4 Point ID increment fail Negative incrementing fails if
392. r for the COGO point depending on the point 15 1 ID template configured for Survey Pts in CONFIGURE ID Templates The point ID can be changed The calculated coordinates are displayed Type in a point ID COGO R9 493 Step Description Refer to chapter STAKE F5 to access the Stakeout application program and stake out the calculated COGO point After staking and storing the COGO point COGO Traverse Results Result page is displayed 34 4 SHIFT INDIV F5 for an individual point ID independent of the ID template SHIFT RUN F5 changes back to the next ID from the config ured ID template PAGE F6 changes to the Code page COGO Traverse Results Code page lt Code gt lt Point Code gt The thematical code All codes of the job can be selected Type in a code if required 9 and 7 3 2 PAGE F6 changes to the Plot page COGO Traverse Results Plot page An arrow points from the known point to the calculated COGO point 30 6 SHIFT QUIT F6 does not store the COGO point and exits COGO calcu lations 10 STORE F1 to store the result and return to COGO Traverse Input Input page For Write Logfile Yes in COGO Configuration Logfile page the result is written to the logfile STONEX COGO R9 494 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter 11 Are more COGO traverse calculations to be made e Ifyes
393. r of the device The creator can either be Default if the device is a default or User if the device has been created C amp Ifa Default device is edited by using EDIT F3 then its creator is still displayed as Default Next step IF the desired device is THEN present in the list highlight the desired device CONT F1 to close the screen and to return to the screen from where CONFIGURE Devices was accessed is not present in the list NEW F2 Refer to 18 4 3 Creating a New Device is present in the list but needs to be edited highlight the desired device EDIT F3 Refer to 18 4 4 Editing a Device Interfaces Ports Devices R9 316 18 4 3 Description Access step by step CONFIGURE New Device STONEX Creating a New Device Allows a new device to be configured Step Description 1 Refer to 18 4 2 Accessing CONFIGURE Devices to access CONFIGURE Devices 2 Highlight a device of the same type as the device to be created from the list 3 NEW F2 to access CONFIGURE New Device New Device Name Type Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bit Flow Control None dl STORE F1 To store the new device and to return to the at STORE screen from where this screen was accessed Interfaces Ports Devices R9 317 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description
394. r to 18 2 2 Accessing CONFIGURE Interfaces to access CONFIGURE Interfaces 2 CONFIGURE Interfaces Highlight GeoCOM Mode 3 EDIT F3 to access CONFIGURE GeoCOM Mode GeoCOH Hode Use Interface Yes hE Port Port 14 Device RS232 GeoCOH Protocol RS232 GeoCOH CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed 02a DEVCE F5 CONT DEVCE To create select edit or delete a device Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 330 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Use Interface gt Yes or No Activates the interface lt Port gt Output Available if lt Use Interface Yes gt Port to be used lt Device gt Output Available if lt Use Interface Yes gt Device to be used lt Protocol gt Output Available if lt Use Interface Yes gt Protocol to be used Next step IF a device is THEN not to be created or edited CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE GeoCOM Mode was accessed to be created or edited DEVCE F5 to create or edit a device Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 331 19 3 Description Access CONFIGURE Export Job Interface STONEX Export Job e The Export Job interface allows data from a job to be exported from the instrument to an external device Refer to 13 4 Exporting Data from a Jo
395. r to chapter e For lt Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt Codes for lines can be typed in but not selected from a codelist lt Line Code gt The line code to be stored with the point A check is performed to see if a line code of this name already exists in the job If so the according attributes are displayed Attribute n Up to eight attribute values are available Type in a code 8 Is lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt e Ifyes continue with the next row e Ifno continue with step 9 Ce NEW A F2 allows additional attributes to be created for this line code Ce NAME F3 or VALUE F3 Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in To highlight Attribute n or the field for the attribute value The name of Attribute n can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in Ce LAST F4 recalls the last used attribute values which were stored with this line code Ce DEFLT F5 recalls the default attribute values for the selected code 9 STORE F1 stores the new line entered and all associated information and returns to MANAGE Data Job Name Lines X page Manage Data R9 108 Step L Description The value for Start Time with which the line is stored is the time 7 4 3 when STORE F1 was pressed The same value is assigned to the value for lt End Time gt until a point is added to the line Any existing lines and areas which are open are closed Refer to
396. ram for example COGO Stakeout Job Job HA Meas d CONT D Codelist None To accept changes and access the subsequent screen The chosen settings become active CONF F2 Config Set SURVEY A To configure Stakeout application program Ref lector 360 Pri sm Accesses STAKEOUT Configuration Refer to Add Constant 23 4mm 34 3 Configuring Stakeout SETUP F3 01A 2 To set up station Accesses SETUP Station CONT CONF SETUP Setup Stakeout R9 650 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Stakeout Job gt Choicelist The job containing the points to be staked All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected lt Job gt Choicelist The active job All jobs from Main Menu Manage Jobs can be selected Points which are staked out are stored in this job The original points to be staked are not copied to this job The data from this job is shown in MANAGE Data Job Name lt Codelist gt Choicelist Output No codes are stored in the selected job All codelists from Main Menu Manage Codelists can be selected Codes have already been stored in the selected lt Job gt If codes had been copied from a System RAM codelist then the name of the codelistis displayed If codes have not been copied from a System RAM codelist but typed in then the name of the active job is displayed lt Config Set gt Choi
397. rd gt Select the source for the instrument station coordi nates Station ID gt Enter Select the instrument station Instrument Ht gt Enter the height of the instrument station Fixpoint Job gt Select the fixpoint job of the control target points The geometric scale correction is displayed The correction displayed depends upon the options chosen in CONFIGURE TPS Corrections GeoPPM page e if Calc Scale Automatically lt Computd Scale gt is displayed e if Calc Scale Manually gt Current Scale gt is displayed 16 4 Press CONT F1 to access SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth Setup R9 610 SETUP Set Stn amp Ori Set Azimuth SET F1 Set Stn amp Ori Setup BS Info Stn Info To set the station and orientation and exit the Set Azimuth Backsight ID 101 Setup application program Setup page Reflector Ht 1 567 m DIST F2 Aim at point and enter Azimuth To measure a distance to the point being used to Az imuth vo oof ge j Horiz Dist 99 988 m distance measurement is NOT required when setting the Station and the Orientation SET F1 Checking is NOT performed on the distance measurement when setting the Station and the 02a Orientation SET F1 ser prsr Az 0 EREE PAGE peo Available on the Setup page To set lt Azimuth 0 gt and running This value is not set to the system until SET F1 is pressed HOLD F5 or FREE
398. rd deviation of the orientation for resec tion and orientation and height transfer Pos Acc Target gt User input For Resection or Orientation and Height Transfer Posi tion accuracy of the target point for resection and orientation and height transfer lt Ht Acc Target gt User input For Resection or Orientation and Height Transfer Height accuracy of the target point for resection and orientation and height transfer When lt Method Local Resection gt th e following fields apply lt Define gt Choicelist Northing Axis Easting Axis For Local Resection To define the positive North or positive East axis The second point measured defines the direction of the positive North axis The second point measured defines the direction of the positive East axis When lt Method Resection Helmert gt the following fields apply lt Weighting gt 1 Distance or 1 Distance To change the distance weighting that is used in the calculation of the station height in the resection STONEX Setup R9 602 SETUP Configuration Checks page STONEX Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Checks page Configuration General Parameters Checks Logfile Known Backsight Checks Pos Check MEE CT Pos Limit 0 015 n Height Check Yes Height Limit 0 015 n 02a t coT PAG Description of fields CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the sc
399. red Survey Auto Survey Auto Points automatically recorded Survey Rem Pt Survey Remote Point Unknown User Entered Manually entered point The instrument source describes where the coordinate triplet was measured or entered The options are TPS Stonex Tools or Level Manage Data R9 88 Coordinate quality Description The Coordinate Quality is an indicator for the estimated quality of the point coordinates The coordinate quality of the measurements is used in point averaging Column Description Est 3D CQ Estimated 3D coordinate quality of computed position Est 2D CQ Estimated plan coordinate quality of computed position Est 1D CQ Estimated height coordinate quality of computed position Vertical angles are always assuming Zenith angles and not elevation angles Standard deviations of circle readings relate to one face measurements 200 n p Standard deviation of circle reading Og y Standard deviation of circle reading if Oy e _ 9uz v gon Oy Hz V rad p Oy Standard deviation of horizontal circle reading Oy Standard deviation of vertical circle reading S T O N E X Manage AData R9 89 STONEX Standard deviation of distance measurement o Standard deviation of distance measure Sp Cp ppm D D Seen Cp Constant part of EDM accuracy ppm ppm part of EDM accuracy D Slope Distance 1D estimated c
400. reen from where this screen was accessed PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT ABOUT F5 To display information about the program name the version number the date of the version the copyright and the article number Field Option Description When lt Method Known BS Point gt the following fields apply lt Pos Check gt Yes or No Allows a check to be made on the horizontal coordinate difference between the existing and the measured known backsight point If the defined Pos Limit gt is exceeded the setup can be repeated skipped or stored Pos Limit User input Available for Pos Check Yes Sets the maximum horizontal coordinate difference accepted in the posi tion check Setup R9 603 SETUP Configuration Logfile page STONEX Field Option Description lt Height Check gt Yes or No Allows a check to be made on the vertical difference between the existing and the measured known back sight point If the lt Height Limit gt is exceeded the stakeout can be repeated skipped or stored lt Height Limit gt User input Available for lt Height Check Yes gt Sets the maximum vertical difference accepted in the height check Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Logfile page Configuration General Parameters Checks Logfile Write Logfile Yes KB CONT F1 File Name logfile txt 4 To accept changes and return to the
401. repeat steps 2 to 11 e Ifno continue with step 12 12 SHIFT QUIT F6 to exit COGO calculation COGO R9 495 32 5 3 Traverse with Angle Right Access Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Traverse Input COGO raverse Input CALC F1 Traverse Input Input Map To calculate the COGO point Input page Method LERA INV F2 To calculate the values for the distance and the From 0002 gt offset from two existing points Available if Backsight 0001 lt HDist XX gt or lt Offset gt is highlighted Angle Right 230 8432 g SSHOT F3 Azimuth 80 8432 g To calculate the point as a sideshot HDist Grid 54 630 m LAST F4 Offset 0 RT m lat To select the values for the distance and the a CALC INV PAGE STONEX COGO offset from previous COGO inverse calculations Available if lt HDist XX gt or lt Offset gt is high lighted SURVY F5 To measure a point for the COGO calculation Available if lt From gt or lt Backsight gt is high lighted SHIFT CONF F2 To configure the COGO application program SHIFT MODIF F4 To mathematically modify the values for the angle right the distance and the offset Available if Angle Right gt HDist XX or lt Offset gt is highlighted R9 496 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Method gt Angle Right The direction from the known point to the COGO point is an angle
402. results COGO R9 527 32 7 3 Line Calculation Segmentation Description Diagram STONEX The COGO line calculation segmentation calculates the coordinates of new points on a line Elements that must be known are e coordinates ofthe start and the end point ofthe line OR abearing and distance from a known point that define the line AND EITHER e the number of segments dividing the line OR e asegment length for the line The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered d d d d Line divided by lt Method No of Segments gt a o PO P1 PO Start Point P1 End Point d Equally spaced segments result from dividing aline by a certain number of points COGO R9 528 COGO line calculation segmentation step by step STONEX di PO d1 d1 d2 Line divided by Method Segment Length P1 PO Start Point P1 End Point d1 lt Seg Length gt d2 Remaining segment The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Line Calculation Input COGO Line Calculation Input Input page SHIFT CONF F2 to configure the COGO application program 32 3 COGO Line Calculations Input Input page Task Segmentation 32 7 1 CALC F1
403. riplet cannot be included in the averaging computation Automatically set by the system Manage Data R9 103 Column Description USE F2 changes between the options Time The time the measured coordinate triplet was stored Date The date the measured coordinate triplet was stored The format is as defined in CONFIGURE Units amp Formats Time page dPos The horizontal distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the average lt dPos gt indicates unavailable information for example fora height only point dHt The height distance from the measured coordinate triplet to the average dHt gt indicates unavailable information for example for a position only point Y Available for measured coordinate triplets with Auto or Yes in the Use column if Averaging Mode Average Indicates an exceeding ofthe limits Next step IF a measured coor THEN dinate triplet is not to be viewed STORE F1 stores the changes and returns to MANAGE Data Job Name is to be viewed highlight a measured coordinate triplet and EDIT F3 S T O N E X Manage Data R9 104 7 4 Line Area Management 7 4 1 Overview Description A line area consists of points and can be created edited in MANAGE Data Job Name The indi vidual points are measured within any application program These can be all points Points can be simultaneously assigned to one or more lin
404. rmines if lines are displayed in MapView MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 437 Displayable line area information STONEX Field Option Description lt Show Line ID gt Yes or No Available for lt Show Lines Yes gt Determines if the ID of a line is displayed Show Line Code gt Yes or No Available for Show Lines Yes Determines if the code of a line is displayed Show Areas Yes or No Determines if areas are displayed in MapView Show Area ID gt Yes or No Available for Show Areas Yes Determines if the ID of an area is displayed Show Area Code Yes or No Available for Show Areas Yes Determines if the code of an area is displayed A line is shown as example 100 100 Line 200 Next step a lt Show Line ID gt b lt Show Line Code gt PAGE F6 changes to the Display page Refer to paragraph XX MapView Configuration Display page MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 438 XX Description of fields MapView Configuration Display page Field Option Description lt Show Pt Info gt When lt 200 Determines if point information is shown or not For Pts or As lt Show Pt Info When lt 200 Pts gt point information is Configured not shown when more than 200 points are displayed For lt Show Pt Info As Configured gt the point infor mation as configured in XX MapView Configuration
405. rom new station coordinates ANorth Can be displayed by pressing MORE F5 Difference between fixpoint and measured point calculated from new station coordinates Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Plot page SETUP Refer to 30 6 Plot Mode MapView Screen Area for details on the keys on the Plot page Results Plot page Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen Next steps IF THEN more target points are to be measured SHIFT SURVY F5 to access the SETUP Measure Target screen point measurements are to be accepted RECLC F1 to recalculate the station data and return to the SETUP Results screen STONEX Setup R9 639 Description Access SETUP Results Stn Coords page STONEX 33 5 3 Local Resection Calculation e This screen is displayed after the local resection calculation e After the station is set all following measurements will be related to this new station and orientation Press ALL F1 in the SETUP Measure Target 2 screen Results Xx Stn Coords Stn Code Plot Station ID No of Points 2 Set E N Ht Ori 4 Instrument Ht 1 255 m Stn Easting 53 044 m SET F1 Stn Northing 53 044 m To set data selected in lt Set gt and to store all Stn Height 455 220 n setup data and exit the application New Azimuth 350 0000 g program 02a PAGE F6 SET PAGE To change t
406. rom the instrument 3 A connection is maintained until the instrument is turned off the configuration is changed or the device is detached Default RS232 devices e RS232 e RS232 GSI e RS232 GeoCOM User defined RS232 All settings can be defined Interfaces Ports Devices R9 321 19 19 1 Description Access step by step CONFIGURE GSI Output STONEX Config Interfaces Editing The Interface GSI Output Data is streamed through the serial port RS232 and is stored to the active job GSI data is stored when lt Use Interface Yes gt and either ALL F1 or REC F3 is pressed The format of the data depends on the option selected in lt Output Format gt Step Description 1 Refer to 18 2 2 Accessing CONFIGURE Interfaces to access CONFIGURE Interfaces 2 CONFIGURE Interfaces Highlight GSI Output 3 EDIT F3 to access CONFIGURE GSI Output GSI Output Use Interface Yes MB Port Port 14 Device RS232 Protocol RS232 GSI dr GSI Format GSI8 Polar amp Cart 4 CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed 02a a DEVCE F5 CONT DEVCE To create select edit or delete a device Config Interfaces Editing The Interface R9 322 Description of fields STONEX Config Interfaces Editing The Interface Field Option Descri
407. s Field Option Description Point ID gt User input The identifier for manually occupied points The config ured point ID template is used The ID can be changed in the following ways e To starta new sequence of point ID s type over the point ID S T O N E X Linework R9 184 STONEX Field Option Description e Foran individual point ID independent of the ID template SHIFT INDIV F5 SHIFT RUN F5 changes back to the next ID from the configured ID template Refer to 15 1 ID Templates lt Linework gt Begin Line 3pt Curve ReOpen Any Line Linework The linework flag to be stored with the point The options available depend on whether a line area is currently open No linework flag is stored Opens a new line when the next point is stored Any line area which is currently open is closed and the last point belonging to that line area is given the End Line Close Area linework flag The point may or may not be stored with a point code Stores the linework flag for a curve through the next three measured points and continues a line area Opens a line from a list of all lines which are currently stored in the job when the next point is stored The last code used with the reopened line is automatically selected when the point is stored Any line area which is currently open is closed and the last point belonging to that line area is given the End Line Close Area li
408. s accessed from different modes and their associated functionality are available The displayed data in all modes of MapView can be shifted by using both the arrow keys and the touchscreen MapView is available in three modes Map mode Plot mode e Survey mode e Part of data management Is also available within some application programs Can be used to view select and edit points lines and areas Available as the Map page in data management and some application programs Is available to view results in various application programs For example COGO application program Available as the Plot page in some application programs Part of the Survey application program Is available within some application programs for example Stakeout application program Can be used to select lines and areas MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 431 e Same as Map mode but also shows the positions of the instrument and the reflector Provides special functionality when staking out points e Available as the Map page in Survey and some application programs Modes within applica It is possible to access different MapView modes from the same application program For tion programs example to access Map View in map mode or access the Map View in survey mode Displayable data The data displayed in MapView is defined by the application program through which it was accessed filters set in MANAGE Sorts amp Filters an
409. s active 3 In MANAGE Data Job Name Lines page highlight a line to be edited 4 EDIT F3 to access MANAGE Edit Line Line ID 5 MANAGE Edit Line Line ID General page The line ID and the type of points which are used to form the line during a survey can be edited Other line related data is shown in output fields No of Pts The number of points contained within the line lt Length gt The sum of the distances between the points in the sequen tial order in which they are stored for the line Start Time and Start Date gt The time date when the line was created Ce Aline cannot be renamed to an already existing line ID Manage Data R9 110 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter MORE F5 displays lt End Time gt and lt End Date gt This is the time date when the last point was added to the line This can be different to the time the point was created The values do not change after deleting the last added point or after editing unless an additional point is added to the line PAGE F6 changes to the Points page MANAGE Edit Line Line ID Points page All points belonging to the line are listed The point that was added last to the line is at the top of the list ADD F2 Accesses MANAGE Select Point with the Points and Map page To add an existing point from the active job to the line A new point is added above the point which was highlighted when ADD F2 was pressed EDI
410. s lock can be interrupted with pressing R INT F5 Ee R INT F5 can be used to interrupt the instrument from being locked onto the reflector for example to mark a ground point eS Distances to side shot points cannot be measured while the lock mode is interrupted with lt Automation Robotic gt S T O N E X Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 37 3 4 Working examples 3 4 1 Working Example 1 iLock Description Application Measure points with iLock Working technique Application program Survey Goal Find prism with iLock Requirement lt Automation iLock gt Prism search with iLock St D ipti Secher ep escription 1 Press ALL F1 in SURVEY Survey Job Name Ce Press DIST F2 to measure a distance The instrument searches for the prism with iLock search in the iLock window If a prism was found e Distance and angles are measured and stored e The instrument points in the direction of the prism and does not follow the prism when it is moving 4 If no prism was found e The instrument turns to the starting position of the iLock search S T O N E X Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 38 3 4 2 Description Requirement Prism search with Robotic step by step STONEX Working Example 2 Robotic Application Measure points with Robotic Working technique Application program Survey Goal Find prism with Robotic activated lt Automation Robotic gt
411. s the area division and accesses COGO Results of Area Division Refer to 32 11 4 Results of the Area Division STONEX COGO R9 580 32 11 4 Access COGO Results of Area Division Result page STONEX Results of the Area Division CALC F1 in COGO Define How to Divide Area Result of Area Division Result Plot Area Ratio 40 60 Area 1 Grid 434 16 n CONT F1 Area 2 Grid 654 13 m To accept the calculation and to continue with the subsequent screen Calculated COGO points are not yet stored PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen 02a i SHIFT CONF F2 CONT PAGE To configure the COGO application program Description of fields Field Option Description Area Ratio gt Output The ratio of the size of the two sub areas in percent Area 1 XX Output The size of the first sub area in m Area 2 XX Output The size of the second sub area in m Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Plot page COGO R9 581 COGO Results of Area Division Map page COGO Area Division Results ResultX page STONEX The points defining the area and the calculated COGO points are shown in black Next step CONT F1 access COGO Area Division Results The coordinates of the intersection points of the new border with the original area are displayed Area Divisions Results STORE F1 Result Code P1 ot To store the two results and to
412. s the point ID for the related offset point This could support an automatic workflow into CAD packages including setting symbols and stringing lines lt Prefix Suffix gt Prefix Adds the setting for lt Identifier gt in front of the auto point ID Suffix Adds the setting for lt Identifier gt at the end of the auto point ID Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Code page STONEX Survey Auto Points R9 708 SURVEY Auto Points Offset Code page STONEX The setting for lt Thematc Codes gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework determines the availa bility of the fields and softkeys Auto Points Offset 1 General Code Point Code Code Desc centre line 02a CONT NEW A LAST DEFLT PAGE CONT F1 To accept changes and return to the screen from where this screen was accessed NEW A F2 Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt To create additional attributes for the selected lt Point Code gt NAME F3 or VALUE F3 Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt Available for attributes for which an attribute name can be typed in To highlight lt Attribute n gt or the field for the attribute value The name of lt Attribute n gt can be edited and an attribute value can be typed in LAST F4 Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt To recall the last used attribute values for the selected code DEFLT F5 Available for lt Thematc Codes
413. s to the Firmware page STATUS Shows the versions of all system firmware System Information Firmware page Description of fields Field Description lt Firmware gt Firmware version of the onboard software lt Build User Iface gt Build version of the onboard software lt Build Processb gt Build version of the processor board lt Telescope Fw gt Firmware version of the telescope lt Boot gt Firmware version of the boot software lt API gt Firmware version for the application program interface S T O N E X STATUS R9 413 Field Description lt EF Interface gt Firmware version for the electric front interface lt Keyboard Display gt Firmware version for the graphical user interface Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Application page STATUS Shows the versions of all uploaded application programs System Information Application page Next step CONT F1 exits STATUS System Information S T O N E X STATUS R9 414 28 5 Description Access STATUS Interfaces STONEX STATUS Interfaces STATUS Interfaces gives an overview of all interfaces with the port and the devices currently assigned Select STATUS Interfaces Refer to 28 1 STATUS Functions on how to access the STATUS menu OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key The screen gives an overview of all interfaces wit
414. screen from Format File dxf frt where this screen was accessed PAGE F6 To change to another page on this screen SHIFT ABOUT F5 To display information about the program name 02 att the version number the date of the version the CONT PAGE copyright and the article number Setup R9 604 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Write Logfile gt Yes or No To generate a logfile when the application program is exited A logfile is a file to which data from an application program is written to It is generated using the selected lt Format File gt lt File Name gt Choicelist Available for lt Write Logfile Yes gt The name of the file to which the data should be written A logfile is stored in the DATA directory of the active memory device The data is always appended to the file Opening the choicelist accesses Logfiles where a name for a new logfile can be created and an existing logfile can be selected or deleted lt Format File gt Choicelist Available for lt Write Logfile Yes gt A format file defines which and how data is written to a logfile Format files are created using Stonex Tools A format file must first be transferred from the CompactFlash card to the System RAM before it can be selected Refer to 22 Tools Transfer Objects for information on how to transfer a format file Opening the choicelist acc
415. sed EYE EDIT F3 To configure the parameters related to the high lighted interface CTRL F4 Available for certain devices connected to certain interfaces To configure additional para maters at users conT EDIT cTRL USE To turn the highlighted interface on or off If the interface is turned on then the settings which were last used with that interface are active If the device which was last used with that inter face is no longer available the RS232 is assigned to that interface Export Job Interfaces Ports Devices R9 310 Next step IF THEN an interface is to be turned Highlight the interface and EDIT F3 on off a port is to be Refer to 19 Config Interfaces Editing The Interface selected or a device is to be selected a device attached to an Highlight the relevant interface and CTRL F4 interface is to be configured Refer to 20 Config Interfaces Controlling The Device an interface is to be turned Highlight the relevant interface and USE F5 on off S T O N E X Interfaces Ports Devices R9 311 18 3 Ports Description e The instrument is always fitted with the port located at the instrument base port 1 Addi tional ports are available for RH9 port 2 and for Bluetooth port 3 e The list of available devices always depends on the selected port Available ports Type Port R9 Port 1 For power and
416. ser Menu e Menu HGHT Jobs REE HGHT Data CONF TPS Corrections dr CONF EDH amp iLock Settings FUNC Check Recorded Point FUNC EDN Test 4 IMPT Data to Job lt p To accept changes and return to the screen from EXPT Data From Job where this screen was accessed Q1ATt PAGE F6 CONT DEFLT To change to another page on this screen CONT F1 9 rpd GP PO Config General Settings R9 291 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt 1 gt to lt 9 gt Choicelist All functions screens or application programs which can be assigned to the individual lines in the user defined menu Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen Config General Settings R9 292 17 4 Description Access CONFIGURE Languages on Instru ment STONEX Language The setting on this screen defines the language used on the instrument Three languages can be stored on the instrument at one time English and two others English cannot be deleted Refer to 23 2 System Languages Select Main Menu Config General Settings Language Description of fields CONT F1 To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu DEL F4 To delete the highlighted language Column Option Description Language Choicelist Sets the language The selected language is used for the system s
417. single measurement is performed with focus on accuracy and not on time Fast Pressing ALL F1 or DIST F2 a single measurement is performed with focus on time accuracy not as high as for lt EDM Mode Standard Tracking Pressing ALL F1 or DIST F2 continuous measurements are performed with focus on fast measurements Press REC F3 to store the measurements CS gt STOP F1 to stop tracking Average Pressing ALL F1 or DIST F2 with Avg Max Dist n n measure ments are performed with lt EDM Mode Standard During measure ments the current average and standard deviation are displayed Functions R9 420 EDM Mode Description SynchroTrack Available only for lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt This is the measurement mode for more precise measurements in Robotic mode Pressing ALL F1 or DIST F2 a linear interpolation between the previous and following angle measurement is performed based upon the timestamp of the EDM measurement Using this interpolation procedure a higher accuracy for all dynamic applications is possible S T O N E X Functions R9 421 29 2 29 2 1 Description STONEX Prism Search Methods iLock iLock is the sensor which recognises and measures the position of a prism by means of a CCD array A laser beam is transmitted and the reflected beam is received by the built in CCD array The position ofthe reflected spot with re
418. smnt gt from that station can also be directly measured when using this method Refer to chapter The value for the azimuth can be calculated from two existing points INV F2 when lt Azimuth gt is highlighted To perform a COGO inverse calculation Ce Upon pressing STORE F1 in COGO Inverse the result from the COGO inverse calculation is copied to the field which was high lighted when INV F2 was pressed Ce For Write Logfile Yes in COGO Configuration Logfile page the result ofthe COGO inverse calculation is written to the logfile 32 4 COGO R9 517 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Ce The value for the azimuth can be selected from previous COGO inverse 32 12 calculations LAST F4 when lt Azimuth gt is highlighted To recall previous results from COGO inverse calculations Upon pressing CONT F1 in COGO Last Inverse Calculations the selected result is copied to the field COGO R9 518 Description STONEX 32 7 COGO Calculation Line Calculations Method 32 7 1 Line Calculation Base Point The COGO line calculation base point calculates the base point station and offset of a point in relation to a line Elements that must be known are e coordinates of two points and an offset point OR coordinates of one point and an offset point bearing and distance from one point The coordinates of the known points e ma
419. spectto the centre ofthe CCD is computed These iLock Offsets are used to correct the horizontal and vertical angles The iLock offsets are also used to control the motors which turn the instrument to centre the crosshairs to the prism In order to minimise the time for measuring the crosshairs are not moved to the exact centre of the prism The iLock offset can be up to 500 cc depending on selected lt EDM Mode gt The iLock measures the iLock offsets between the crosshairs and prism centre and corrects the Hz and V angles accordingly Therefore the Hz and V angles are measured to the prism centre even if the cross hairs are not aimed precisely at the centre of the prism For Automation iLock gt the instrument can find a static prism and measure a distance once ALL F1 or DIST F2 is pressed The instrument does not follow a moving prism Refer to 16 1 EDM amp iLock Settings and to 3 Quick Settings SHIFT USER for more informa tion Functions R9 422 Field of view The telescope field of view is the region seen when looking through the telescope The Aim field of view is the region seen by the iLock Next step IF the reflector is THEN in the field of view Refer to paragraph iLock measurement for more information notin the field of view _ Refer to paragraph iLock search for more information iLock measurement If the reflector is in the field of view and lt Automation iLock gt the crossh
420. ss Point Code Radius From Pt Manage Data Field Option Description lt Sort gt Ascend Point ID Always available The method points are sorted Descend Point ID by Forward Time or Backward Time lt Filter gt Always available The method the points are filtered by Shows all points Shows points of highest class Shows points with point ID s between the entered start and end ID The points are left aligned and sorted by the first digit Shows points with point ID s matching the wild card Shows points which were recorded within a defined time window Shows points of the selected class Shows points with selected codes attached Refer to 7 6 2 Point Line and Area Code Filter Shows points within the defined radius from a particular point The radius is the horizontal distance R9 120 STONEX Field Option Individual Line Individual Area Description Shows points forming a selected line This may for example be useful during stakeout Shows points forming a selected area This may for example be useful during stakeout lt Start ID gt User input Available for lt Filter Range of Pt ID s gt The first point to be displayed lt End ID gt User input Available for lt Filter Range of Pt ID s gt The last point to be displayed lt Wildcard gt User input Available for lt Filter Pt ID Wildcard gt and are supported indicates an un
421. ssary due to external influences the instrument has to be returned to any Stonex authorized service workshop Inspecting the laser plummet step by step m 2 o Te Q 2 5 mm 1 5m Vv The following table explains the most common settings Step Description 1 Place and secure the instrument into the tribrach and onto a tripod 2 Using the tribrach footscrews level the instrument with the electronic level SHIFT F12 to access STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 403 STONEX Step Description PAGE F6 to access the Laser Plummet page Switch on the laser plummet Inspec tion of the laser plummet should be carried out on a bright smooth and horizontal surface like a sheet of paper Mark the centre of the red dot on the ground Turn the instrument through 360 slowly carefully observing the movement of the red laser dot The maximum diameter of the circular movement described by the centre of the laser point should not exceed 3 mm at a distance of 1 5 m If the centre of the laser dot describes a perceptible circular movement or moves more than 3 mm away from the point which was first marked an adjustment may be required Inform your nearest Stonex authorized service workshop Depending on brightness and surface the diameter of the laser dot can vary At 1 5 m itis about 2 5
422. st common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 ON Select Setup application program to set up the instrument 33 2 Main Menu Survey CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Begin 3 CONT F1 to access SURVEY Survey Job Name Turn the telescope until Hz 0 0000 g gt 4 Look through the telescope with Hz 0 0000 g to select an object which is easily recognisable Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 27 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Standing at the instrument point the compass to the selected object and turn the rotating dial until the N lines up with the north end of the compass needle Ce The compass dial must not be turned once the N is lined up with the north end of the compass needle Go to the reflector SHIFT USER to access QUICK SET Change Settings to QUICK SET Change Settings to COMPS F1 to access QUICK SET Orientation With Compass 3 3 1 QUICK SET Orientation With Compass From the reflector aim the N of the compass towards the instrument Read the horizontal angle as pointed to by the north end ofthe compass needle Hz Compass The horizontal angle read from the compass while aiming to the instrument lt V Compass gt If the compass works as a clinometer those values can also be used Ce The horizontal and vertical angle reads from the compass are a
423. stic Description Custom ASCII Export variables Refer to the online help of Stonex Tools Format definition Composed individually as format file using Stonex Tools Refer to the online help of Stonex Tools for information on creating format files Units Defined within the format file Height All height types are supported If the desired height cannot be computed the default value for the missing variable is output DXF Export variables All points are exported in local grid Height Orthometric height Convert Export Data from Job R9 205 13 2 Accessing the Data Export Functionality Access Select Main Menu Convert Export Data from Job OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key Next step IF exporting to THEN custom ASCII format Refer to 13 3 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII Format another device Refer to 13 4 Exporting Data from a Job to another Device DXF format Refer to 13 5 Exporting Data in DXF Format S T O N E X Convert Export Data from Job R9 206 13 3 Exporting Data from a Job to a Custom ASCII Format Description The settings on this screen define the data that is converted and exported and what format is used Data is exported from the selected job Currently active view filter and sort settings are applied The points that are exported are those that are visible in MANAGE Data
424. strument can be configured Power Down Once power is restored after a power loss the instrument returns to the screen in which it was operating when the power failed After restarting the instrument uses the same job and configuration set as before the power loss If either the job or configuration set are not avail able the first in the list is used e Two types of power loss could be experienced e Sudden power loss Internal or external battery being removed e Gradual power loss Internal or external battery running down naturally PIN Code APersonal Identification Number protection can be activated Type Description PIN protection active Instrument prompts for PIN code entry e after starting up Config General Settings R9 300 Access CONFIGURE Start Up amp Power Down Start Up amp Power Down page STONEX Type Description e when changing the PIN code in CONFIGURE Start Up amp Power Down PIN code generation By the user Attempts for correct PIN code Five After five false attempts a Personal UnblocKing code must be typed in PUK code generation e By Stonex Select Main Menu Config General Settings Start Up amp Power Down OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Manage ment Start Up amp Power Down Start Up amp Power Down PIN Code Start Screen Hain Henuff Power Down With
425. sually an abbreviation Input optional lt Creator gt The person s name who creates the new configuration set Input optional Enter a name STORE F1 stores the new configuration set with the entered name Starts the sequential configuration set wizard Manage A Configuration Sets R9 196 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter 5 CONFIGURE Wizard Mode 17 2 lt Wizard Mode Reduced gt Ce LIST F6 accesses CONFIGURE Quick Access Lists all screens within the configuration set Allows to access these individual screens and to change settings 6 CONT F1 to access CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework 7 CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework 15 3 8 CONT F1 to access CONFIGURE TPS Correction 9 CONFIGURE TPS Corrections 16 4 Configure atmospheric ppm geometric ppm and refraction 10 CONT F1 to access CONFIGURE EDM amp iLock Settings 11 CONFIGURE EDM amp iLock Settings 16 1 12 CONT F1 to access CONFIGURE Offsets 13 CONFIGURE Offsets 15 4 14 CONT F1 to access MANAGE Configuration Sets 15 MANAGE Configuration Sets The adapted configuration set is highlighted 16 CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to R9 Main Menu The high lighted configuration set is then the active configuration set Manage Configuration Sets R9 197 11 4 Description Access step by step with using configuration set wizard STONEX Edi
426. t Output Available for lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt The description of the code lt Attribute n gt User input Available for lt Thematc Codes Without Codelist gt Up to eight attribute values are available STONEX Setup R9 635 Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Plot page STO N EX Setup R9 636 33 5 2 Additional Information Description e The SETUP Additional Information screen displays information about the accuracy of the measured target points and allows exclusion of measurements that are not to be used in the calculation e Additional measurements can be made and measurements can be deleted Access Press INFO F4 in the SETUP Results screen SETUP Additional Information RECLC F1 Additional Information Status Plot To recalculate the station data and update all Status page values after target points have been deleted or excluded from the calculation Returns to the SETUP Results screen USE F3 To decide whether or not to use a target point in the calculation Changes the value in the Use column REMOV F4 02a t To delete a point from the list of measured target RECLC 1 uerg REHOV HORE PAGE points and exclude it from the Setup calculation MORE F5 To change between displaying AHz ADistt AHeight AEast and ANorth in the fourth column SHIFT SURVY F5 Accesses the SETUP Measure Target screen to measure more target points STO N EX Setu
427. t lt Offset XX gt User input Available for lt Task Calc Offset Point gt Offset from base point to offset point Positive to the right and negative to the left of the line Next step PAGE F6 accesses Map page Refer to paragraph COGO Line Calculations Input Map page The Map page provides an interactive display of the data Refer to 30 MapView Interactive Display Feature for information on the functionality and softkeys available COGO R9 522 COGO XX Point Results Result page STONEX Next step IF THEN Task Calc Base Point CALC F1 accesses COGO Base Point Results Refer to para graph COGO XX Point Results Result page Task Calc Offset Point CALC F1 accesses COGO Offset Point Results Refer to parag rahp COGO XX Point Results Result page Task Segmentation CALC F1 accesses COGO Define Segmentation Refer to para graph 32 7 3 Line Calculation Segmentation The result screens for base point and offset point are very similar The explanations given for the softkeys below are valid for the Result page Base Point Results STORE F1 Result CodelPTot To store result and to return to COGO Line Point ID Calculations Input Easting 122 780 m STAKE F5 Northing 215 253 n To access the Stakeout application program and Height 100 000 m stake out the calculated COGO point PAGE F6 Offset Point 0002 To change to another
428. t ID Template The type of ID template selected for editing determines the availability of the fields on this screen e Available for the default ID template No Template Used lt ID gt The name of the ID template cannot be changed since it is a default ID template The other fields on this screen are the same as in CONFIGURE New ID Template Refer to 15 1 3 Creating a New ID Template e Available for a user defined ID template All fields on this screen are the same as in CONFIGURE New ID Template Refer to 15 1 3 Creating a New ID Template Adapt the settings according to the requirements Edit ID template S tep step by step 1 2 5 6 CONT F1 stores the changes and returns to CONFIGURE ID Template Library STONEX Config Survey Settings R9 234 STONEX Step Description CONT F1 returns to CONFIGURE ID Templates CONT F1 returns to the screen from where CONFIGURE ID Templates was accessed Config Survey Settings R9 235 15 1 5 Deleting an ID Template Delete ID template step by step STONEX Step Description 1 Refer to 15 1 2 Accessing ID Template Configuration to access CONFIGURE ID Templates In CONFIGURE ID Templates highlight any field ENTER to access CONFIGURE ID Template Library CONFIGURE ID Template Library Highlight the ID template to be deleted DEL F4 It does not matter
429. t Rotation around the X axis lt Scale gt User input Scale factor STONEX COGO R9 562 Next step IF AND THEN a field displays the parameter highlight the field Enter the value of the parameter needs to be FIX F4 fixed to a value a field displays a the parameter highlight the field ADJST F4 value needs to be calculated all parameters are CONT F1 to return to COGO Match Common Points configured n STONEX COGO R9 563 32 11 Area Division 32 11 1 Overview Description The COGO calculation area division divides an area by a defined line by percentage or by the size of a subarea The area division methods are listed in the table below Elements that must be known for the calculation depend on the area division method At least three points are required to form an area Divide by Using Elements required Defined line Parallel line Through a point e Two points defining the line One point on the dividing line By a distance Two points defining the line e Distance Perpendicular line Througha point e Two points defining the line e One point on the dividing line By a distance Two points defining the line Distance Percentage Parallel line e Size of new area in percentage Two points defining the line Perpendicular line e Size of new area in percentage Two points defining the line STONEX COGO R
430. t Start Time gt The value for lt End Time gt changes when a point was added to the line Manage Data R9 112 7 4 4 Working Example Description Application Pick up points along fence lines with a gate The gate can also be represented as a line Some points belong to more than one line Setting F7 is configured to access the MANAGE Data Job Name screen Refer to 2 USER Key on how to configure hot keys Goal Each point is to be picked up once Diagram P1 Gate post P2 Gate post F1 First fence line F2 Second fence line F3 Third fence line F4 Fourth fence line G1 Gate Field procedure The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more step by step information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Create the lines F1 F2 and G1 7 4 2 2 Start Survey application program 35 1 S T O N E X Manage Data R9 113 STONEX Step Description Refer to chapter Press F7 MANAGE Data Job Name Lines X page The line F1 must be open the lines F2 and G1 must be closed To open close a line highlight the line and CLOSE F4 and OPEN F4 CONT F1 SURVEY Survey Job Name Measure points along fence line F1 until the last point before P1 These points are automatically added to line F1 Points can be coded separately Press F7 MANAGE Data Job Name Lines X page Hi
431. t be identical Should they not be identical a screen opens where the attribute mismatch can be corrected One point cannot have different attributes The name of the screen changes with pressing CURNT F5 or STORD F5 Pressing CURNT F5 Pressing STORD F5 XX Attributes Being Stored XX Attributes Already Stored For simplicity the screen shown is XX Attributes Already Stored Attributes Already Stored Point ID 500 Point Code tree Code Desc gum tree STORE F1 trunk dia 1 To store the selected attributes with the height 8 new created point and to continue with the spread 15 application program or data management CURNT F5 or STORD F5 To change between viewing the attribute names and values of the new created point and those stored for the existing point in the job 02a 1 STORE CURNT Coding R9 180 Match attributes step by step STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Point Code gt Output e For XX Attributes Already Stored The code of the existing point in the job e For XX Attributes Being Stored The code of the new point Attributes Output e For XX Attributes Already Stored The attributes as stored for the existing point in the job For XX Attributes Being Stored The attributes of the new point Step Description Ce XX Attributes Already Stored opens automatically if the attribute names and or values of the ne
432. t of shift from the original point to the calcu lated COGO points COGO R9 551 Field Option Description lt A Easting gt User input or output The amount of shift in East direction lt A Northing gt User input or output The amount of shift in North direction lt A Height gt User input or output The amount of shift in height Next step PAGE F6 accesses COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Rotate page Refer to COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Rotate page COGO The softkeys are the same as on the Shift page Refer to paragraph COGO Shift Rotate amp Scale Shift Rotate amp Scale Shift page for information on the keys Rotate page Description of fields Field Option Description lt Method gt User Entered The method by which the rotation angle will be deter mined The rotation can be manually typed in Computed The rotation will be calculated as lt New Azimuth gt minus lt Existing Az gt lt Rotation Pt gt Choicelist The point around which all points will be rotated STONEX COGO R9 552 Field Option Description lt Existing Az gt User input Available for lt Method Computed gt A known direc tion before rotating lt New Azimuth gt User input Available for lt Method Computed gt A known direc tion after rotating lt Rotation gt Userinputor Th
433. t of the point to be staked The value for lt Height Offset gt configured in STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page is taken into account Move up lt Height gt or lt Ht gt Output Available for lt Edit Height No gt in STAKEOUT Config uration Heights page The height of the current position is displayed as ortho metric height The value for lt Height Offset gt config ured in STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page is taken into account lt Design Ht gt or lt D Ht gt User input Available for lt Edit Height Yes gt in STAKEOUT Configuration Heights page The design height which is the height of the point to be staked is displayed as orthometric height The value for lt Height Offset gt configured in STAKEOUT Config uration Heights page is not taken into account Changing the value for lt D Ht gt changes the values displayed for lt CUT gt and lt FILL gt Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Map page Refer to paragraph STAKEOUT Orthogonal Stakeout Map page Stakeout R9 677 STAKEOUT The Map page provides an interactive display of the data Refer to 30 MapView Interactive Polar Stakeout Display Feature for information on the functionality and softkeys available Map page Next step PAGE F6 changes to the first page on this screen Stake out in polar mode The steps are identical to those of staking out in orthogonal mode Refer to 34 4 3 Stak
434. tal and vertical coordinate components A 2D control point is a point of class CTRL with horizontal coordinate components e Adjusted point is a point of class ADJ V Reference point is a point of class REF amp Average point is a point of class AVGE o Measured point is a point of class MEAS Estimated point is a point of class EST Ce Points of class NONE or points of class CTRL MEAS with a height only component cannot be displayed in MapView Ce A list of the point types available and their description is available by pressing SYMBL F3 in XX MapView Configuration Points page Refer to 30 3 Configuring MapView S T O N E X MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 446 Description Access 30 5 30 5 1 STONEX Map Mode MapView in Map Mode The map mode of MapView is available as the Map page in data management and some applica tion programs It can be used to display select and edit points lines and areas Refer to 30 2 Accessing MapView paragraph Example access for map mode OR From a choicelist in some screens for example in application programs which access data management OR As a part of an application program for example COGO The MANAGE Data Job Name Map page is used as the example below The functions described are the same for all Map pages in map mode MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 447 MANAGE Data Job Name Map page STONEX The softkeys described
435. terpolation procedure a higher accuracy for all dynamic applications for example machine guidance is possible When activated SYNC is displayed as an icon Available for all EDM Type gt options Repeats measurements in standard measuring mode The average distance of lt AVG Max Dist gt and the standard deviation for the averaged distance are calcu lated When activated AVG is displayed as an icon Config Instrument Settings R9 261 STONEX Config Instrument Settings Field Option Description lt AVG Max Dist gt User input Available if lt EDM Mode Average gt Input field for the maximum number of distances to be averaged from 2 to 999 distances lt Reflector gt Choicelist Reflector names as configured in Main Menu Manage Reflectors lt Add Constant gt Output The additive constant stored with the chosen reflector lt Automation gt None Measurements are done without iLock iLock Positioning to static prisms Robotic The instrument locks onto and follows the moving prism lt iLock Settings gt iLock Settings Normal Normal Mode is turned on Low Vis On Low Visability Mode is turned on To increase the instrument measuring ability during suboptimal weather conditions Available only when iLock or Robotic mode is activated This mode is automatically deactivated when the instrument is turned off Low Vis Low Visability Mode is permanently turne
436. than the predefined limits the procedure has to be repeated All measurements ofthe current run are rejected and are not averaged with the results from previous runs TOOLS Adjustment Accuracy No of Meas Shows the number of runs executed One run consists of a measure ment in face I and face II Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 387 Step Description All other fields display the standard deviations of the determined adjustment errors The standard deviations can be calculated from the second run onwards It is recommended to measure at least two runs 7 MEAS F5 if more runs have to be added Continue with step 2 OR CONT F1 to accept the measurements and to access TOOLS Adjustment Results No more runs can be added later TOOLS Adjustment Results CONT F1 Adjustment Results To accept and store the new determined instru ment errors where Yes is setin the Use column Writes to or appends to an existing logfile if the logfile recording has been enabled Refer to 27 4 Configure Check amp Adjust USE F4 To set Yes or No in the Use column for the high lighted set MORE F5 To view additional information about the 02a _CONT Teen use nore current used old instrument errors STONEX REDO F2 To reject all results and to repeat the complete check and adjust procedure Refer to step 2 of paragraph Combined procedure step by step Tools
437. the logfile STONEX COGO R9 583 32 11 5 Working Example Description Diagram Field procedure step by step STONEX Application Divide an area by a defined parallel line The new border has to run through a known point with the point ID 100 Goal The points forming the original area are to be picked The area division is to be calculated P3 d PO Point A gt of defined line P1 Point B gt of defined line P2 First new COGO point P2 P3 Second new COGO point PO d HDist XX Step Description 1 Main Menu Programs V COGO 2 COGO COGO Begin Select a job and a configuration set with the settings mentioned above CONF F2 to configure the COGO application program COGO R9 584 STONEX Step Description 3 CONT F1 to access COGO COGO Menu 4 Highlight Area Division 5 CONT F1 to access COGO Choose Area to be Divided 6 COGO Choose Area to be Divided Area to Use Survey New Area Area ID gt Type in an ID for the new area CONT F1 to access COGO Survey Job Name COGO Survey Job Name Point ID gt Type in a name for the first point of the area 9 ALL F1 to measure and store the first point of the area 10 Survey all points belonging to the area Point 100 must be part of the points 11 DONE F4 once all points are surveyed 12 COGO Edit Area Area ID Check the points forming the area
438. the subsequent CONT LES ond img Ee screen Description of fields Field Option Description lt Area to Use gt The setting determines the availability of the subse quent fields and screen Select Existing To use an area from the lt Job gt selected in COGO COGO Begin The area can be edited and a new area can be created from points existing in the lt Job gt Survey New To survey points that do not exist in the job yet The Area points will be added to a new area COGO R9 571 Field Option Description lt Area ID gt Choicelist For lt Area to Use Select Existing gt To select the area to be divided User input For Area to Use Survey New Area To enter a name for the new area lt No of Points gt Output Number of points forming the area lt Area gt Output The size of the selected area lt Perimeter gt Output The perimeter of the area Next step IF THEN lt Area to Use Select CONT F1 accesses COGO Define How to Divide Area Refer to Existing gt 32 11 3 Dividing an Area lt Area to Use CONT F1 accesses COGO Survey Job Name Refer to COGO Survey Survey New Area Job Name Survey page STONEX COGO R9 572 COGO Survey Job Name Survey page STONEX Points to be added to the new area can be surveyed Survey construction X ALL F1 Survey Offset Code Ma To measure and store distances and a
439. ting a Configuration Set There are two possibilities to edit a configuration set Using the configuration set wizard to be lead through the steps OR Outside of the configuration set wizard Each screen can be accessed separately without being guided through the steps Step Description 1 Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management to access MANAGE Config uration Sets In MANAGE Configuration Sets highlight a configuration set to be edited EDIT F3 to access CONFIGURE Wizard Mode This starts the sequential configura tion set wizard All following steps are identical with the creation of a new configuration set Refer to 11 3 Creating a New Configuration Set Follow the instructions in para graph Configuration step by step from step 5 onwards Manage Configuration Sets R9 198 Access without usingthe The currently active configuration set can be edited Choose one of the following options and configuration set wizard access the required screens to edit the configuration set Select Main Menu Config Refer to 5 Main Menu OR From inside an application program press USER and then CONF F2 OR In CONFIGURE Wizard Mode press LIST F6 Refer to 11 3 Creating a New Configuration Set S T O N E X Manage Configuration Sets R9 199 12 Manage Reflectors 12 1 Overview Description e Each reflector type has an additive constant
440. tion a1 Direction from PO to P2 a2 Direction from P1 to P2 Unknown P2 COGO point P1 Second known point TPS station The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter 1 Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Intersection Input L COGO Intersection Input Input page SHIFT CONF F2 to configure the COGO application program 32 3 COGO Intersection Input Input page Method TPS Obs TPS Obs 1st TPS Stn The point ID ofthe first TPS station which is the known start point of the first line for the COGO calculation COGO R9 516 STONEX Step Description lt TPS Measmnt gt The point ID of the TPS measurement which is the known end point of the first line for the COGO calculation lt Azimuth gt The azimuth related to the known end point of the first line for the COGO calculation 2nd TPS Stn gt The point ID of the second TPS station which is the known start point of the second line for the COGO calculation lt TPS Measmnt gt The point ID of the TPS measurement which is the known end point of the second line for the COGO calculation lt Azimuth gt The azimuth related to the known end point of the second line for the COGO calculation Points can only be selected from the active job Points for the lt 2nd TPS Stn gt and the lt TPS Mea
441. tion Description lt Compensator gt On Vertical angles are relative to plumb line The hori zontal angle is corrected for the transversal tilt errors if lt Hz Correction On gt Off Vertical angles are relative to vertical standing axis lt Hz Correction gt On The horizontal angles are corrected for the line of sight tilting axis and if lt Compensator On gt transversal tilt errors Off Horizontal angles are not corrected Next step CONT F1 returns to R9 Main Menu Config Instrument Settings R9 274 16 6 Instrument ID Description e The settings on this screen define the instrument identification number This number is used for the generation of the file names e Using format files the instrument ID can be output together with data from the instrument By doing so it can be identified which instrument was used for certain measurements Access Select Main Menu Config Instrument Settings Instrument ID CONFIGURE Instrument ID Instrument ID Instrument ID 1234 CONT F1 To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu 02a DEFLT F5 CONT DEFLT To recall the default instrument ID Description of fields Field Option Description Instrument ID gt User input Sets a four digit number as instrument identification number By default the last four numbers of the serial number are used S T O N E X Config Mnstrument Settings R9 275
442. tion behaviour Select Main Menu Config Instrument Settings Automatic Prism Search OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Within the configuration set wizard Refer to 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management Automatic Prism Search After Prism is Lost Predict for EE After Prediction Search with No Search 4 CONT F1 To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu 02a t DEFLT F5 CONT DEFLT To recall the default settings Config Instrument Settings R9 266 STONEX Description of fields Field Option Description lt Predict for gt From 1sto5s If the target is lost when lt Automation Robotic gt the path of the reflector is predicted for the selected amount of seconds lt Search with gt No Search iLock Last Point Perform no search after prediction Perform search after prediction with iLock ina dynamic iLock window If the target is lost when lt Automation Robotic gt then the instrument turns back to the last stored point The field of view is disabled while the instrument is repositioning Next step CONT F1 closes the screen and returns to R9 Main Menu Config Instrument Settings R9 267 16 4 TPS Corrections Description e The settings on this screen define the atmospheric ppm the geometric ppm and the refrac tion The geometric ppm can also be determine
443. tional descriptions such as the job name or the temperature e For free coding using a codelist Pressing the configured hot key opens a choicelist with the free codes of the job codelist e For free coding with direct input Pressing the configured hot key opens a screen for alphanumeric input Stored as time related information A time stamp is stored with each free code According to the require ments of the CAD package used free codes can be configured to be stored before or after the object Quick Use Selection of the codes Recording of the codes Coding Quick coding is the storing of an object plus a themat ical or free code using a minimum number of keystrokes Shortcuts must be assigned to codes in the job codelist Quick Code On mustbe setin CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Typing the shortcut searches for the assigned code and initiates a measurement e Forthematical codes Together with the objects R9 151 Coding Characteristic Description method e For free codes Stored as time related information before or after the points A time stamp is stored with each free code i Quick codes must be created in Stonex Tools Ce Characters that can be assigned to quick codes are e 0to9 e AtoZ not case sensitive e atoz not case sensitive Configure Coding Refer to 15 3 Coding amp Linework Settings for information on configuring coding S T O
444. to COMPS Hz V JSTCK CHKPT R G0 PS gt mation iLock gt and to lock onto the reflector R INT F5 to interrupt Robotic Description of fields Field Option Description iLock 2 Turn ON To activate iLock Automation iLock gt gt Turn OFF To deactivate iLock Automation None Robotic gt Turn ON To activate Robotic Automation Robotic 2 Turn OFF To deactivate Robotic Automation None S T O N E X Quick Settings SHIFT USER R9 24 STONEX Field Option Description EDM Type gt Change to IR gt Change to RL To activate measurements to reflectors lt EDM Type Reflector IR gt To activate reflectorless measurements lt EDM Type Reflctrless RL gt Deactivates iLock and Robotic Automation None EDM Mode 2 Change to TRK gt Change to STD To activate tracking with continuous measure ments lt EDM Mode Tracking To activate single measurements EDM Mode Standard V Angle gt Hold 2 Running The displayed value for the vertical angle is held after DIST F2 and until REC F3 is pressed lt V Angle Hold after DIST The displayed value for the vertical angle is updated after DIST F2 is pressed V Angle Running Ce Be aware that after restarting the instru ment this setting remains and is not changed Change Face no choices To change the face of the telescope Qu
445. to access COGO Define Segmentation COGO Define Segmentation lt Method gt How the line is to be divided Refer to paragraph Diagram Depending on the selection the following fields are user input or output fields Line Length gt Calculated line length between the selected Start Point gt and End Point gt COGO R9 529 STONEX Step Description lt No of Segs gt For lt Method No of Segments gt type in the number of segments for the line For lt Method Segment Length gt type in the segment length for the line A remaining segment may result from this method lt Seg Length gt For lt Method No of Segments gt this is the calculated length of each segment For lt Method Segment Length gt type in the required segment length Last Seg Lgth gt Available for Method Segment Length gt The length ofthe remaining segment Start PtID gt The point ID to be assigned to the first new point on the line The selected point ID templates from CONFIGURE ID Templates are not applied lt PtID Inc gt Start PtID gt is incremented numerically for the second third etc point on the line Refer to chapter CALC F1 to access COGO Segmentation Results The coordinates of the new points are calculated The heights are computed along the line assuming a linear slope between lt Start Point gt and lt End Point gt COGO Segmentation Results Result p
446. trument Device The hardware which is connected to the chosen port S T O N E X Interfaces Ports Devices R9 305 Concept STONEX Table This table gives an overview of the interaction between an interface port and device Concept Example Interface What type of information is to be communicated GeoCom Mode between the instrument and device Port Which port is being used to connect the device to Port 2 Handle the instrument Device Which device is being connected to the port and Baud Rate 115200 what are its communication settings and indi _ Parity None vidual parameters Data Bits 8 Stop Bit 1 Link Number 1 Set as Base Screen This screen gives an overview of all interfaces with the currently assigned port and device Interfaces Ports Devices R9 306 Point Description 1 Interfaces Interface Port GSI Output GeoCOHM Mode 1 Export Job sw Leien use CONFIGURE Interfaces EDIT F3 refers to interface parameters To configure the parameters related to the highlighted interface switching on off the interface port selection device selection and device communication settings e CONFIGURE Interfaces CTRL F4 refers to device parameters To configure additional parameters related to the highlighted device e CONFIGURE Interfaces USE F5 enables the immediate turning on off of an interface without the need for editing configuring The l
447. ttings are configured in the application program but are stored as part of the configuration set Refer to 31 Application Programs General Manage Configuration Sets R9 193 11 2 Accessing Configuration Set Management Access Select Main Menu Manage Configuration Sets OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR From a choicelist in some screens for example the begin screen of application programs MANAGE CONT F1 Configuration Sets To select the highlighted configuration set and to return to R9 Main Menu NEW F2 To create a new configuration set Refer to 11 3 Creating a New Configuration Set EDIT F3 To edit a configuration set Accesses the first screen ofthe sequential configuration set wizard for the highlighted configuration set Default configuration sets can be edited Refer to 11 4 Editing a Configuration Set DEL F4 To delete the highlighted configuration set MORE F5 To display information about the description the creator and the creation date ofthe configu ration set S T O N E X Manage Configuration Sets R9 194 Next step SHIFT SET D F4 Available unless a default configuration set is highlighted To turn the highlighted configura tion sets into a user defined default configura tion set stored in the instrument SHIFT DEFLT F5 To recall previously deleted default configura tion sets and to reset default configuration sets to the de
448. ubtracted e For azimuths Minimum 0 Maximum Full circle e For distances and offsets Minimum 0 m Maximum 30000000 m e performs a subtraction of 0 000 lt Azimuth gt Output The modified value for the field in the first line This field is updated with every mathematical operation Angles greater than the full circle are reduced accord ingly Next step CONT F1 accepts the modified value and returns to the screen from where this screen was accessed STONEX COGO R9 592 Example Calculations for an azimuth Example Calculations for a distance STONEX Step User input Value as calculated Value as displayed co lt Azimuth 250 0000 gt g 1 lt Multiply 2 gt 500 lt Azimuth 100 0000 gt g 2 Divide 3 166 667 Azimuth 166 6670 g 3 Add 300 466 667 Azimuth 66 6670 g 4 Subtract 100 366 667 Azimuth 366 6670 g The behaviour for an offset is identical Step User input Value as calculated Value as displayed os lt HDist Grid 250 000 gt m 1 lt Multiply 2 gt 500 lt HDist Grid 500 000 m 2 Divide 3 166 667 HDist Grid 166 667 m 3 Add 300 466 667 HDist Grid 466 667 m 4 Subtract 100 366 667 HDist Grid 366 667 m COGO R9 593 33 Setup 33 1 Overview Description The Setup program is used when setting up a TPS station to determine th
449. uments access SETUP Telescope Positioning The measurements of face I and face II are averaged on the base of face I The averaged value is stored No automatic measurement in two faces CS For the setup methods Method Set Azimuth gt or lt Method Known BS Point gt the selected option in the field lt Two Faces gt is ignored For these setup methods measurements are not made in two faces STONEX Setup R9 599 Field Option Description lt Use Scale gt Choicelist The appearance of the SETUP Results screen differs with this setting Yes The calculated scale factor and ppm value from the resection and orientation and height transfer calcula tion are displayed in the SETUP Results Sigma page The ppm value may be set in the system as the geometric ppm value In SETUP Station Setup the lt Current Scale gt is displayed and PPM F5 is avail able No The calculated scale factor from the resection calcula tion is displayed in the SETUP Results Sigma page but cannot be set as the geometric ppm value lt Auto Position gt 2D Instrument positions horizontally to the point 3D Instrument positions horizontally and vertically to the point Off Instrument does not position to the point lt Display AR gt Choicelist To set the direction to the backsight point to zero Yes Sets lt AR 0 0000 gt towards the backsight point If set in the current display mask lt AR gt displays the hori
450. ure Point Yes is set in the configuration settings tapping the code box with the supplied stylus automatically measures and stores the point with the highlighted code Selecting the code box by using the arrow keys will not measure and store the point S T O N E X Coding R9 176 Measuring lines ares using Code Blocks step by step STONEX The following table explains the most common settings Refer to the stated chapter for more information on screens Step Description Refer to chapter Activate lt Show Info Linework gt in SURVEY Configuration SCode page 9 5 2 Refer to paragraph Creating a Code Block step by step to access SURVEY Survey Job Name SCode page 9 5 4 Create a line area SmartCode and return to SURVEY Survey Job Name SCode page 9 5 3 The line area is opened and closed using the SmartCode To start an arc spline move the focus on lt Linework gt the last line of the page and select the linework flag to be stored with the point Move the focus on the line area code box ALL F1 to measure and store the point with the highlighted line area code Coding R9 177 9 6 Code and Attribute Mismatch 9 6 1 Code Mismatch Description When storing a point with a code it may happen that a point with the same point ID already exists in the job If the codes of the new and the existing point do not match a screen ope
451. used to form the line during a survey Select between all points measured points auto points and offset points of type 1 or 2 36 1 36 4 Manage Data R9 106 STONEX Step Description lt Line Style gt This is the line style in which lines areas are represented in MapView and Stonex Tools For lt Line Code lt None gt gt on the Code page a line style can be selected from a choicelist Otherwise the line style as defined for the selected line code is shown Type in a number for the line select the points to be stored with the line and select a line style if necessary Refer to chapter PAGE F6 changes to the Code page MANAGE New Line Code page The setting for Thematc Codes gt in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework determines the availability of the subsequent fields and softkeys e For lt Thematc Codes With Codelist gt The codes from the job codelist are used Line Code gt All line codes of the job codelist can be selected The description of the code is shown as an output field The line style is shown as defined for the selected line code It is the style in which lines areas are represented in MapView and Stonex Tools For lt Line Code lt None gt gt it can be changed The attributes are shown as output input or choicelist fields depending on their definition Manage Data R9 107 STONEX Step Description Refe
452. ust 381 Table of Contents R9 10 STONEX 27 5 Combined Adjustment l t i c and iLock 384 27 6 Tilting Axis Adjustment a 390 27 7 Compensator Adjustment I t 395 27 8 Current Instrument Errors 399 27 9 Adjusting the Circular Level of the Instrument and Tribrach 400 27 10 Adjusting the Circular Level of the Prism Pole 402 27 11 Inspecting the Laser Plummet of the Instrument 403 27 12 Servicing the Tripod 405 28 STATUS 406 28 1 STATUS Functions 406 28 2 STATUS Station Information 408 28 3 STATUS Battery amp Memory 410 28 4 STATUS System Information 413 28 5 STATUS Interfaces 415 28 6 STATUS Bluetooth 416 28 7 STATUS Level amp Laser Plummet 417 29 Functions 419 29 1 EDM 419 29 2 Prism Search Methods 422 29 2 1 iLock 422 29 3 Robotic 426 29 4 SureBeam 428 29 5 Illumination 430 30 MapView Interactive Display Feature 431 30 1 Overview 431 30 2 Accessing MapView 433 30 3 Configuring MapView 436 p M n al Table of Contents R9 11 30 4 MapView Components 441 30 4 1 Softkeys 441 30 4 2 Screen Area 443 30 43 Toolbar 445 30 4 4 Point Symbols 446 30 5 Map Mode 447 30 5 1 MapView in Map Mode 447 30 5 2 Selecting Points Lines and Areas 449 30 6 Plot Mode MapView Screen Area 453 30 7 Survey Mode 456 30 7 1 MapView in Sur
453. ust R9 381 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Adjust 2 weeks A reminder message is displayed each time the instru Reminder gt 1 month ment is turned on if one or more adjustment values 3 months were determined longer ago than the time specified 6 months with this parameter This helps to redetermine the 12 months or instrument errors on a regular basis Never A reminder message to readjust the instrument is never displayed This setting is not recommended Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Logfile page TOOLS Description of fields Configuration mm om 5 wm Logfile page le ption escription lt Write Logfile gt YesorNo To generate a logfile when the application program is exited A logfile is a file to which data from an application program is written to It is generated using the selected lt Format File gt lt File Name gt Choicelist Available for Write Logfile Yes The name of the file to which the data should be written A logfile is stored in the DATA directory of the active memory device The data is always appended to the file S T O N E X Tools V Check amp Adjust R9 382 STONEX Field Option Description Opening the choicelist accesses XX Logfiles where a name for a new logfile can be created and an existing logfile can be selected or deleted lt Format File gt Choicelist Available for Write Logfile Yes
454. ut is out of range I II The current face of the instrument is shown if the compensator and the Hz correction are turned on Tapping the icon leads to STATUS Bluetooth Icon Description The Instrument is Bluetooth capable The Bluetooth connection on Port 3 is established and is ready to be used 3 The Bluetooth connection on Port 3 is established active and is communicating 3 data Tapping the icon leads to MANAGE Data Job Name Icon Description 4 The number of lines and areas which are currently open in the active job is SS 0 shown User Interface R9 51 CompactFlash card The capacity of used space is shown in seven levels e Tapping the icon leads to STATUS Battery amp Memory Icon Description uw wu The CompactFlash card is inserted and can be removed a y The CompactFlash card is inserted and cannot be removed P Itis strongly recommended not to remove the CompactFlash card to avoid loss of data No icon No CompactFlash card is inserted Battery e The status and source of the battery is displayed If an external battery is connected and an internal battery is inserted then the internal battery is used Tapping the icon leads to STATUS Battery amp Memory Icon Description NE Aninternalbattery is inserted and in use o 8 DW Anexternal battery is connected and in use _
455. utput Available for Task Calc Base Point Horizontal distance along the arc from start point to base point lt AOffset XX gt Output Available for lt Task Calc Base Point gt Offset from base point to offset point Positive to the right and nega tive to the left of the line Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Code page COGO R9 536 COGO The functionality of the Code page is similar to COGO Traverse Results Code page XX Results Code page Next step PAGE F6 changes to the Plot page COGO The functionality of the Plot page is similar to COGO Traverse Results Plot page XX Results Plot page Next step STORE F1 stores the result and accesses COGO Arc Calculations Input Input page STONEX COGO R9 537 32 8 2 Arc Calculation Base Point Description The COGO arc calculation base point calculates the coordinates of the base point station and offset of a point in relation to an arc Elements that must be known are e coordinates of three points e coordinates of an offset point OR e coordinates of two points e radius to the two points e coordinates of an offset point The coordinates of the known points e may be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered STONEX COGO R9 538 Diagram PO Instrument station P1 Start Point gt P2 End Point P3 Offset Point P4 Base point d1 lt AOffset XX gt d
456. vey Mode 456 30 7 2 MapView in Staking Out Survey Mode 458 30 7 3 Selecting Lines and Areas 461 31 Application Programs General 463 31 1 Overview 463 31 2 Accessing the Programs Menu 464 32 COGO 465 32 1 Overview 465 32 2 Accessing COGO 467 32 3 Configuring COGO 474 32 4 COGO Calculation Inverse Method 480 32 4 1 Overview 480 32 4 2 Inverse Between Two Known Points Pt Pt 482 32 43 Inverse Between a Known Point and a Line Pt Line 484 32 4 4 Inverse Between a Known Point and an Arc Pt Arc 486 32 5 COGO Calculation Traverse Method 489 32 51 Overview 489 S T O N E X Table of Contents R9 12 32 5 2 Traverse with Azimuth Bearing 491 32 5 3 Traverse with Angle Right 496 32 6 COGO Calculation Intersections Method 498 32 6 1 Intersection with Bearing Bearing 498 32 6 2 Intersection with Bearing Distance 504 32 6 3 Intersection with Distance Distance 509 32 6 4 Intersection with By Points 511 32 6 5 Intersection with TPS Observation TPS Observation 515 32 7 COGO Calculation Line Calculations Method 519 32 7 1 Line Calculation Base Point 519 32 7 2 Line Calculation Offset Point 526 32 7 3 Line Calculation Segmentation 528 32 8 COGO Calculation Arc Calculations Method 532 32 8 1 Arc Calculation Arc Centre 532 32 8 2 Arc Calculation Base Point 538 32 8 3 Arc Calculation Offset Point 541 32 8 4 Arc Calculation Segmentation 543 32 9 COGO Calculation Shift Rotate amp Scale Manual Met
457. view 689 36 2 Configuring Auto Points 691 36 3 Auto Points 699 36 4 Offset Points of Auto Points 704 36 4 1 Overview 704 36 4 2 Configuring Offset Points 707 36 4 8 Working Example 712 37 Survey Remote Point 716 37 1 Overview 716 37 2 Accessing Remote Point 718 37 3 Configuring Remote Point 721 37 4 Working Example 723 Appendix A Menu Tree724 Appendix B Memory Types728 Appendix C Directory Structure of the Memory Device729 Index 731 S T O N E X Table of Contents R9 15 1 Description Access R9 Enter Security PIN Code STONEX Instrument Protection with PIN e The instrument can be protected by a Personal Identification Number e Ifthe PIN protection is activated the instrument will always prompt for a PIN code entry after starting up and before R9 Main Menu comes up e Ifa wrong PIN has been typed in five times a Personal UnblocKing code is required e Refer to 17 6 Start Up amp Power Down for information on activating PIN protection e This chapter explains the workflow of entering PIN and PUK e R9 Enter Security PIN Code is automatically accessed during starting up the instrument when Use PIN Yes in CONFIGURE Start Up amp Power Down PIN Code page and a PIN has been defined before Refer to 17 6 Start Up amp Power Down e R9EnterSecurity PUK Code is automatically accessed during starting up the instrument when a wrong PIN code has been typed in five times Enter Security PIN Code PIN
458. w and the existing point do not match 1 CURNT F5 and STORD F5 to display the attribute names and values to be stored with the point 2 STORE F1 stores the displayed attribute names and values with the point being stored and continues with the application program or data management Coding R9 181 10 Linework 10 1 Overview Description Two methods are available for the surveying of lines and areas These two methods can be combined and are described in the following table Linework by Description Linework e In all application programs a display mask can be configured to show the field lt Linework gt This field contains a choicelist where the Linework flags can be selected e The selection ofa linework flag determines e the action taken for a line area for example beginning a line e thelinework flag to be stored with the point e The Linework flags e are configured in CONFIGURE Coding amp Linework Linework e can be exported with a format file Coding e Line area codes can be selected in many application programs e Refer to 8 5 2 Creating a New Code and 9 Coding for more information CE e The Linework flag and coding are not linked e Additionally to Linework thematical point line and area codes can be used e Quick coding can be used as per normal STONEX Linework R9 182 10 2 L Requirements Preparing Linework S
459. y be taken from the active job e may be measured during the COGO calculation e may be entered COGO R9 519 Diagram Le Access COGO Line Calculations Input Input page STONEX PO Instrument station P1 Start Point gt P2 End Point P3 Offset Point P4 Base point d1 lt Offset XX gt d2 lt ALine XxX gt Line management is not available for COGO line calculations Refer to 32 2 Accessing COGO to access COGO Line Calculations Input Line Calculations Input X Input B CALC F1 Task Cale Base Point4 To calculate COGO point Hethod Pt Brg Dist INV F2 To calculate the values for the distance and the Start Point 0001 apj offset from two existing points Available if Azimuth 25 0000 g lt Azimuth gt or lt HDist XX gt is highlighted HDist Grid 2 500 m LAST F4 Offset Point EB TTE A To select the values for the distance and the offset from previous COGO inverse calculations 02a t Available if lt Azimuth gt or lt HDist XX gt is high CALC INV LAST SURVY PAGE lighted COGO R9 520 SURVY F5 To measure a point for the COGO calculation Available if lt Start Point gt or lt End Point gt is highlighted SHIFT CONF F2 To configure the COGO application program SHIFT MODIF F4 To mathematically modify the values Available if lt Azimuth gt lt ALine XX gt or lt HDist XX gt is highlighted
460. y of all screens and field are similar for the selecting of a line or area The step by step instructions for selecting a line using the touchscreen can be applied for areas Step Description 1 Select Main Menu Survey OR Select Main Menu Programs Survey OR Press USER Refer to 2 USER Key for information on the USER key OR Press ON Highlight Survey CONT F1 Refer to 31 2 Accessing the Programs Menu for information on the ON key 2 PAGE F6 until SURVEY XX Survey Map page is active 3 Tap on the line to be selected Ce When there are multiple lines within the same area and the precise selection is unclear tapping on the line will access XX Select Line 4 Have multiple lines been selected e Ifyes continue with step 5 e Ifno continue with step 7 5 XX Select Line MapView Interactive Display Feature R9 461 STONEX Step Description Point ID The ID of the lines within range of the line selection Point Code The code of the lines within range of the point selection Select the desired line MORE F5 to display information about the line code the start time the end time the length and the Open status of the line CONT F1 returns to SURVEY Data Job Name Map page A message appears in the message line Line Line Name was opened If the line was close before e Line Line Name was closed If the line was open before
461. y of the CompactFlash card Licence key files use the naming convention L_123456 key where 123456 is the instrument serial number e Licence keys can also be typed in manually in Main Menu Tools Licence Keys or the first time the application program is started Select Main Menu Tools Licence Keys OR Select an application program not yet activated Enter Licence Key Hethod Hanual Entry of Key At Key 4h18f9phweowrb CONT F1 To accept changes and return to R9 Main Menu or continue with application program 02a SHIFT DEL F4 CONT To delete all licence keys on the instrument Tools Licence Keys R9 369 Description of fields Field Option Description lt Method gt The method used to input the licence key to activate the application program or the protected options Upload Key The licence key file is uploaded from the CompactFlash File card The licence key file must be stored in the SYSTEM directory on the CompactFlash card Manual Entry Allows the licence key to be typed in manually of Key lt Key gt User input Available for lt Method Manual Entry of Key gt The licence key required to activate an application program Entry is not case sensitive Next step CONT F1 returns to R9 Main Menu or continues with selected application program S T O N E X Tools Licence Keys R9 370 27 27 1 Description Electronic adjustment Mecha

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PARADA - SnapStone  Manual de instrucciones ISOTEST inspect  TCPWeb_user-reference  Manual de Instalaçao POWERMAX X DC Indoor  Pitco Frialator L20-281 User's Manual  NGS Waikiki  User Manual UM1 - Solarlink GmbH  SiRFDemo User Guide  Guia de instalação - Epson America, Inc.  LONI Policy  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file